ESMP

FATA URBAN CENTERS PROJECT (FUCP)
MC Khar Bajaur Agency, FATA
ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION UNIT (PMU)

TARUCCI, FATA SECRETARIAT
PESHAWAR
January 2013
Environmental and Social Management Plan
FATA Urban Centers Project
Executive Summary
1. The Government of Pakistan (GoP) has initiated the FATA Urban Centers Project (FUCP) in
Khar, Bajaur Agency of the Federally Administered Tribal Areas (FATA) of Pakistan. It is financed
through the Multi Donor Trust Fund (MDTF), which has been established by the GoP to support the
recovery and rehabilitation of the crisis-affected areas of Khyber Pakhtunkhwa (KP), FATA, and
Balochistan. The present Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP) has been prepared to
address the potentially negative environmental and social impacts of the Project.
2. The FUCP includes a comprehensive package of possible municipal infrastructure subprojects

and almost all of the components required for a planned urban center. Potential subprojects include
drinking water supply, sanitation, solid waste management, street pavements, street lights, roads, a
park, a fire station, a bus stand/terminal, and up gradation of the existing slaughter house. Actual
investments under the project will be based on the results from a planning exercise underway in Khar
that will develop a package of priority investments based on current service delivery baselines and
feedback collected from the community regarding their foremost needs. Other components of the
project include technical assistance and implementation support.
3. The selected sub-projects may have some potential negative social and environmental
impacts. To address these potential impacts, this Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP)
has been prepared, which identifies the appropriate mitigation measures, defines the institutional
arrangements for environmental and social management, specifies monitoring requirements, describes
the documentation and capacity building protocols for effective implementation of ESMP.
4. The effective implementation, reporting and monitoring of ESMP will require capacity
building of the core project staff that also include the staff of Local Government and Rural
Development Directorate (LG&RD), the designated staff of Political Administration and key
representatives of the communities. The ESMP includes institutional arrangements for the
environmental and social management of the project. Under these arrangements, there will be
recruitment of Environment and Social Specialists, whereas Environmental and Social Focal Points
(ESFPs) will be nominated in the directorate of LG&RD. Furthermore, ESMP identifies the training
needs of those ESFPs. The ESFPs will ensure implementation of ESMP in the sub-projects under
FUCP. The TARUCCI Project Management Unit (TPMU) will be responsible for preparing ESMP
implementation reports which will also be shared with the Bank.
5. A Grievance Redress/Complaint Handling Mechanism is a part of this ESMP. It also includes

a separate mitigation plan for each type of sub-project. The plan will be made an integral part of the
sub-project designs from proposal development through approval and implementation process.
i
List of Acronyms
ACS Additional Chief Secretary
AIU Agency Implementation Unit
EA Environmental Assessment
EC European Commission
EHS Environment, Health, and Safety
EIA Environmental Impact Assessment
EPA Environment Protection Agency
EPP Emergency Project Paper
ESA Environmental and Social Assessment
ESSAF Environmental and Social Screening and Assessment Framework
ESFP Environmental and social focal point
ESMP Environmental and Social Management Plan
EU European Union
FATA Federally Administered Tribal Area
FDA FATA Development Authority
FR Frontier Region
GIS Geographical information system
GoKP Government of Khyber Pakhtunkhwa
GoP Government of Pakistan
GPS Global positioning system
Ha Hectare
ICT Information Communication Technology
IDP Internally displaced person
IEE Initial Environmental Examination
ii
KP Khyber Pakhtunkhwa
LAA Land Acquisition Act (1894)
MC Municipal Committee
MDTF Multi Donor Trust Fund
MEA Multilateral Environmental Agreement
MoU Memorandum of understanding
M&E Monitoring and evaluation
NEQS National Environmental Quality Standards
NGO Non-Governmental Organization
NWFP North-Western Frontier Province (now KP)
OP Operational Policy
O&M Operation and maintenance
PDO Project Development Objective
PCNA Post-Crisis Needs Assessment
PEPA Pakistan Environmental Protection Act (of 1997)
PEPC Pakistan Environmental Protection Council
PKR Pakistan Rupees
PMU Project Management Unit
PSC Project Steering Committee
TARUCCI Tribal Areas Rural to Urban Centers Conversion Initiative
TPMU TARUCCI Project Management Unit
TPV Third party validation
UN United Nations
WB World Bank
iii
Table of Contents
Executive Summary
1. Introduction ............................................................................................................. 1
1.1 ESMP Objectives ........................................................................................... 1
3. The specific objectives of the ESMP include the following: ................................ 1
1.2 ESMP Components........................................................................................ 1
1.3 Background of MDTF ................................................................................... 1
1.4 TARUCCI Program ...................................................................................... 2
1.5 Environmental and Social Screening and Assessment Framework .......... 3
2. Legislative and Regulatory Review ....................................................................... 3
2.1 National Laws and Regulations .................................................................... 3
2.1.1 Pakistan Environmental Protection Act, 1997 ...........................................................3
2.1.2 Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency: Review of IEE and EIA Regulations, 2000
...................................................................................................................4
2.1.3 National Environmental Quality Standards: ...............................................................4
2.1.4 Land Acquisition Act, 1894 .......................................................................................5
2.2 The World Bank Operational Policies:........................................................ 5
2.2.1 Environmental Assessment (OP 4.01): ......................................................................5
2.2.2 Other WB OPs ...........................................................................................................5
2.3 National Institutional Setup for Environmental Management .................. 6
2.4 Environmental and Social Guidelines .......................................................... 6
2.4.1 Environmental Protection Agencys Environmental and Social Guidelines ..............6
2.4.2 World Bank Environmental and Social Guidelines....................................................7
3. Project Description.................................................................................................. 8
3.1 Project Objectives .......................................................................................... 8
3.2 Project Components ...................................................................................... 8
3.2.1 Component-I: Priority Infrastructure Investments .....................................................8
3.2.2 Component II: Technical Assistance and Implementation Support ...........................9
3.3 Project Implementation Arrangements ..................................................... 10
3.3.1 Bank Implementation Support and Oversight Arrangements for the Project ...........10
3.4 Consultation Strategy during Project Implementation: .......................... 11
3.5 Communications .......................................................................................... 12
3.6 Grievance Redress/Complaint Handling Mechanism .............................. 12
3.7 Project Area ................................................................................................. 13
4. Impact Assessment and Mitigation...................................................................... 16
4.1 Environmental Assessment Process ........................................................... 16
4.2 Potential Impacts and Mitigation ............................................................... 18
4.2.1 Water Supply Schemes ............................................................................................18
4.2.2 Sanitation Scheme ....................................................................................................19
4.2.3 Solid Waste Management Scheme ...........................................................................21
4.2.4 Street Pavement........................................................................................................22
4.2.5 Roads 23
iv
4.2.6 Slaughter House .......................................................................................................25

4.2.7 Establishment of a Ladies/Children/Family Park .....................................................26
4.2.8 Bus Stand/Terminal ..................................................................................................28
4.2.9 Purchase of Vehicles for Fire brigade ......................................................................29
4.2.10 Street Lights .............................................................................................................30
5. Environmental and Social Management ............................................................. 31
5.1 Institutional Arrangements for ESMP Implementation .......................... 31
5.2 Mitigation Plans ........................................................................................... 31
5.3 ESMP Monitoring Plan ............................................................................... 45
5.4 Training Plan ............................................................................................... 45
5.5 Documentation and Reporting ................................................................... 46
5.6 Disclosure Requirements............................................................................. 47
5.7 ESMP Implementation Cost ....................................................................... 47
Annex A ..................................................................................................................... 48
Annex B ..................................................................................................................... 55
Annex C ..................................................................................................................... 56
Annex D: ..................................................................................................................... 60
Annex E ..................................................................................................................... 63
Annex F ..................................................................................................................... 65
Annex G ..................................................................................................................... 66
Annex H ..................................................................................................................... 67
Annex I ..................................................................................................................... 69
Annex J ..................................................................................................................... 81
v
List of Tables
Table 3.1: Indicative List of Investments ....................................................................... 8

Figure 3.1: FATA and Bajaur Agency .......................................................................... 14
Figure 3.2: Bajaur MC ................................................................................................... 15
Table 4.1: Environmental and Social Screening Matrix (Unmitigated) ................... 17
Table 5.1: Mitigation Plan for Water Supply Schemes .............................................. 32
Table 5.2: Mitigation Plan for Sanitation Schemes .................................................... 33
Table 5.3: Mitigation Plan for Solid Waste Management Schemes/Systems ........... 34
Table 5.4: Mitigation Plan for Street Pavement Schemes .......................................... 35
Table 5.5: Mitigation Plan for Municipal Roads ......................................................... 36
Table 5.6: Mitigation Plan for Slaughter House Renovation Scheme ....................... 38
Table 5.7: Mitigation Plan for Construction of Public Parks .................................... 39
Table 5.8 Mitigation Plan for Construction of Bus Stand/Terminal scheme ........... 41
Table 5.9: Mitigation Plan for Street Lights Scheme .................................................. 43
Table 5.10: Mitigation Plan for Purchase of vehicles for Fire brigade ..................... 44
Table 5.12: ESMP Implementation Budget ................................................................. 47
Table A.1: Selected NEQS for Waste Effluents .......................................................... 48
Table A.2: NEQS for Industrial Gaseous Emissions .................................................. 49
Table A.3: National Environmental Quality Standards for Ambient Air ............... 50
Table A.4: NEQS for Motor Vehicles Exhaust and Noise .......................................... 51
Table A.5: National Standards for Drinking Water Quality ..................................... 52
Table A.6: National Environmental Quality Standards for Noise ........................... 54
vi
1. Introduction
1. This document presents the Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP) for FATA Urban
Centers Project, to be implemented in Khar City, Bajaur Agency (Tribal District) of Federally
Administered Tribal Area (FATA) by the PMU of TARUCCI (Tribal Areas Rural to Urban Center
Conversion Initiatives).
2. TARUCCI is an initiative of FATA Secretariat to transform tribal areas from a scattered rural
society to urban ones. The various sub projects and interventions under FUCP can potentially have
some negative social and environmental impacts. Therefore this ESMP has been prepared which
identifies the appropriate mitigation measures, defines the implementation arrangements for ESMP
implementation, reporting and monitoring requirements, and describes the documentation and
capacity building protocols for effective implementation of ESMP. The FUCP will be funded through
MDTF, administered by the World Bank on the request of Government of Pakistan. MDTF supports
the recovery and rehabilitation of crisis affected areas of Khyber Pakhtunkhwa (KP), FATA and
Balochistan. .
1.1 ESMP Objectives
3. The specific objectives of the ESMP include the following:
To comply with the regulatory and policy requirements of the Government of Pakistan
and the World Bank.
To provide a mechanism to implement the environment and social mitigation and control
measures.
To propose institutional arrangements to implement the above- measures
To define environmental and social monitoring requirements to ensure effective
implementation of the mitigation and control measures.
To identify capacity building needs with respect to the environmental and social aspects
of the project.
To specify the documentation requirements with respect to the ESMP implementation.
1.2 ESMP Components

4. The key elements of the ESMP include the following:
Assessment of potential impacts;
Institutional Setup;
Environmental and Social Trainings;
Mitigation Plans;
Disclosure Requirements.
Documentation and Reporting System; and
Monitoring Mechanism.
1.3 Background of MDTF

5. In early 2009, the Government of Pakistan (GoP) launched major military operations in the KP-
FATA. This crisis imposed a huge social and economic cost, on top of the obvious human
tragedy. The military operations led to significant damage to physical infrastructure and services
1
while displacing approximately 3 million people. While the majority of Internally Displaced
Persons (IDPs) have returned to their places of origin, many have lost their homes and
livelihoods. Those who stayed behind have suffered equally and are as poor and vulnerable as the
IDPs.
6. In 2009, the GoP asked the Asian Development Bank (ADB) and the World Bank (WB) to jointly
conduct a Damage and Needs Assessment (DNA) to ascertain the extent of post-crisis impact on
various sectors and local communities. The DNA covered those areas which were firstly affected
by the GoPs counter insurgency operations. In view of the complex nature of the crisis and in
order to address the root causes that lead to the crisis on a long term and in a sustainable manner,
the Government also requested development partners including the World Bank, the Asian
Development Bank (ADB), the United Nations Development Program (UNDP) and the European
Union (EU) to jointly prepare a Post Crisis Needs Assessment (PCNA) that was completed in
2010. The PCNA assessed and quantified the short and medium term social and economic needs
of the region. Recognizing the need for a harmonized approach to respond to the crisis, the GoP
has established the MDTF for the recovery and rehabilitation of the crisis affected areas of KP,
FATA and Balochistan and also requested the World Bank to administer the MDTF.
7. The PCNA provides the underpinning for long term peace building in FATA. Drawing on
extensive stakeholder consultations, the Report identifies key crisis drivers and the consequent
priority areas that need to be addressed to support a coherent and durable peace-building strategy.
These have been organized into four strategic objectives related to political and governance
reform, employment and livelihood opportunities, provision of basic services, and efforts for
counter-radicalization and reconciliation.
1.4 TARUCCI Program

8. The tribesmen of the Pakistans rugged North-West frontier with Afghanistan i.e. Federally
Administered Tribal Areas (FATA) have always found themselves trapped between regional
military powers or world empires fighting for power. The current three decades old crisis is in no
way different if viewed in the historical context and these tribesmen have to struggle for their
survival. This long drawn militancy and war like situation has left immense effects on the tribal
society and has kept it backward and primitive in all walks of life which is nothing but a rural
tribal society.
9. The Tribal Areas Rural to Urban Centers Conversion Initiative (TARUCCI) has a unique
initiative of development for tribal areas to establish properly planned urban centers in the
headquarters of all the tribal agencies (districts) and change the rural-tribal society into a more
urbanized one which will be characterized by all the civic facilities such as housing townships for
families of government officials, teachers, doctors, officers of local garrisons and local populace
to encourage the local tribesmen to take up abode in urban areas. These urban hubs will also
include bazaars and commercial areas, up graded agency headquarter hospitals with tertiary care
facilities, upgraded residential school and colleges for girls and boys for resident as well as
students from surrounding rural areas, civic amenities and services including sewerage and
garbage disposal facilities, fruit and vegetable markets, slaughter houses, bus and truck
stand/terminals. Security umbrella to the urban hubs will be provided by the Army or Frontier
Corps Garrison already present at the selected location. In short, a full municipal system has been
decided to be launch which will not only bring about a visible social change but also an immense
economic growth. This new social contract for FATA has pointed towards a millennium change
in the socioeconomic conditions of the tribesmen.
2
10. It is based on the premise that the scattered settlement pattern in FATA is a key cause of poor
service delivery, lack of accessibility, scarce livelihood opportunities, and inadequate security
leading to opportunities for militants to challenge the writ of the government. It therefore
envisages focusing on the existing urban centers in FATA to enable provision of quality services,
employment opportunities, and security while new urban center will be established in the
Agencies and Frontier Regions (FRs) headquarters.
1.5 Environmental and Social Screening and Assessment Framework

11. The Bank has prepared an Environmental and Social Screening and Assessment Framework
(ESSAF), in accordance with the OP 8.0 for emergency operations applicable to all interventions
under the KP/FATA/Balochistan MDTF. It specifies the environmental and social assessment
requirements that the implementing agency(ies) will need to fulfill before any Project component
under the MDTF can be implemented. The Framework also describes the generic
environmental/social monitoring and reporting requirements to be fulfilled during Project
implementation, in addition to defining the broad institutional arrangements required for
environmental and social safeguard aspects associated with the individual projects under the
MDTF. Procedures for screening of all possible environmental and social impacts will be
described in detail in the project ESMP. The ESSAF has been shared with the FATA Secretariat
and disclosed locally by the FATA Secretariat on its website on 15 December 2010. The present
ESMP has been prepared in pursuance of the environmental and social assessment requirements
defined in the ESSAF.
2. Legislative and Regulatory Review
12. This Section discusses the policy, legal and administrative framework as well as institutional set-
up relevant to the environmental and social assessment of the proposed Project. Also included in
the Section are the environmental and social laws, guidelines and policies of national agencies as
well as the World Bank.
2.1 National Laws and Regulations

13. Pakistans statute books contain a number of laws concerned with the regulation and control of
the environmental and social aspects. However, the enactment of comprehensive legislation on
the environment, in the form of an act of parliament, is a relatively new phenomenon. The laws on
environmental and social issues have been enforced in rest of the Pakistan except FATA.
14. It is worth mentioning that no Act or legislation regarding Environmental issues has been
extended to FATA due to the fact that under Article 247(3) of the Constitution of Pakistan, any
laws, regulations or any other legislation cannot be extended to FATA until the President of
Pakistan notifies the extension of a certain law to FATA with direction to the Governor of
Province of KP. However FATA Secretariat has taken the initiative for certain legislation
including environmental laws to be extended to FATA but no decision has been made so far by
the Federal Government in this regard.
15. The laws relevant to the developmental projects in environmental perspective in Pakistan are
briefly described below: these laws, currently applicable to Pakistan, will deem to be applicable to
FATA as well.
2.1.1 Pakistan Environmental Protection Act, 1997
16. The Pakistan Environmental Protection Act, 1997 (the Act) is the basic legislative tool
empowering the government to frame regulations for the protection of the environment The Act
is applicable to a broad range of issues and extends to socioeconomic aspects, air, water, soil,
3
marine and noise pollution, as well as the handling of hazardous waste. The discharge or
emission of any effluent, waste, air pollutant or noise in an amount, concentration or level in
excess of the National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS) specified by the Pakistan
Environmental Protection Agency (Pak-EPA) has been prohibited under the Act, and penalties
have been prescribed for those contravening the provisions of the Act. The powers of the federal
and provincial Environmental Protection Agencies (EPAs), established under the Pakistan
Environmental Protection Ordinance 1983, have also been considerably enhanced under this
legislation and they have been given the power to conduct inquiries into possible breaches of
environmental law either of their own accord, or upon the registration of a complaint.
17. The requirement for environmental assessment is laid out in Section 12 (1) of the Act. Under this
section, no project involving construction activities or any change in the physical environment can
be undertaken unless an initial environmental examination (IEE) or an environmental impact
assessment (EIA) is conducted, and approval is received from the federal or relevant provincial
EPA. Section 12 (6) of the Act states that the provision is applicable only to such categories of
projects as may be prescribed. The categories are defined in the Pakistan Environmental
Protection Agency Review of IEE and EIA Regulations, 2000 and are discussed in Section 2.1.2
below.
2.1.2 Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency: Review of IEE and EIA Regulations, 2000
18. The Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency Review of IEE and EIA Regulations, 2000 (the
Regulations), developed by the Pak-EPA under the powers conferred upon it by the Act, provide
the necessary details on preparation, submission and review of the initial environmental
examination (IEE) and the EIA. Categorization of projects for IEE and EIA is one of the main
components of the Regulations. Projects have been classified on the basis of expected degree of
adverse environmental impacts. Project types listed in Schedule I are designated as potentially
less damaging to the environment, and those listed in Schedule II as having potentially serious
adverse effects. Schedule I projects require an IEE to be conducted, provided they are not located
in environmentally sensitive areas. For the Schedule II projects, conducting an EIA is necessary.
19. Based upon the cost and nature of the subproject, Schedule II would be applied to FUCP and EIA
would have to be carried out for it.
2.1.3 National Environmental Quality Standards:
20. The National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS), promulgated under the PEPA 1997,
specify the following standards:
Maximum allowable concentration of pollutants in gaseous emissions from industrial
sources,
Maximum allowable concentration of pollutants in municipal and liquid industrial
effluents discharged to inland waters, sewage treatment and sea (three separate set of
numbers).
Maximum allowable emissions from motor vehicles.
Ambient air quality standards.
Drinking water standards
Noise standards.
21. The above NEQSs are presented in Tables A.1 to A.6 in Annex A. Some of these standards will
be applicable to the gaseous emissions and liquid effluents discharged to the environment as well
as noise generation from the activities under the proposed project.
4
2.1.4 Land Acquisition Act, 1894

22. The national Land Acquisition Act (LAA) of 1894 amended from time to time has been the de-
facto policy governing land acquisition and compensation in the country. The LAA is the most
commonly used law for acquisition of land and other properties for development projects. It
comprises of 55 sections pertaining to area notifications and surveys, acquisition, compensation
and apportionment awards and disputes resolution, penalties and exemptions. However, the
involuntary acquisition of land is not involved in this project; any lands needed for the sub-
projects will be donated by the concerned communities or existing government land will be used.
If government land will not be available, the government will purchase land through Political
Administration of the Bajaur Agency, through open market negotiation on willing seller willing
buyer basis. The process followed by the government for purchase of land is given in Annex B.
2.2 The World Bank Operational Policies:

The WB Operating Policies (OPs) relevant to the proposed project are discussed in the following
sections.
2.2.1 Environmental Assessment (OP 4.01):
23. The World Bank requires environmental assessment (EA) of category A projects proposed for
Bank financing to help ensure that they are environmentally sound and sustainable, and thus to
improve decision making. The OP defines the EA process and various types of the EA
instruments.
The proposed project consists of activities which have environmental and social
consequences, including:
Deterioration of air quality,
Water contamination and consumption,
Damage to top soil, land erosion,
Safety hazard.
24. Since none of the potential impacts of the project are likely to be large scale, unprecedented
and/or irreversible, the project has been classified as Category B, in accordance with OP 4.01.
Furthermore, the present ESMP has been prepared in accordance with this OP, to identify the risks
and mitigation measures.
2.2.2 Other WB OPs
25 The WB OP 4.04 (natural habitats), OP 4.09 (Pest Management), OP 4.11 (Physical cultural
resources) OP 4.36 (Forests), OP 4.37 (Safety of Dams), OP 7.50 (Projects on international
waterways), not likely to be relevant for the construction activities under the projects covered by
this ESMP, hence these OPs are not triggered. A summary of the status of the WB OPs is
presented in the table below:
Operational Policy Triggered Reason
Environmental Assessment (OP 4.01) Yes This is the umbrella policy for the Banks
environmental safeguards.
Access to Information Policy July 1, 2010 Yes This Policy will apply to FUCP, and as per
policy all project documents including
environmental and social information (ESMP)
will be disclosed/made available to the public.
Involuntary Resettlement (OP 4.12) No No involuntary taking of land or involuntary
5
Operational Policy Triggered Reason

resettlement is involved.
Forestry (OP 4.36) No No deforestation is involved
Natural Habitat (OP 4.04) No This policy is concerned with the conservation
biodiversity. No damage is expected to natural
habitat in case of FUCP.
Pest Management (OP 4.09) No Use of harmful pesticides is not involved in
FUCP
Safety of Dams (OP 4.37) No No construction of dams is involved
Projects in International Waters (OP 7.50) No No project on International Water ways
Cultural Property (OP 4.11) No This policy seeks to avoid adverse impacts on
cultural resources. In FUCP, no damage to
cultural heritage is expected. However chance
find procedures are included in the mitigation
measures to deal with any discovery of
sites/artifacts of cultural, archeological,
historical, or religious importance.
Indigenous People (OP 4.10) No No indigenous people exist in the project area.
Projects in Disputed Area (7.60) No No subprojects are to be carried out in any
disputed area.
2.3 National Institutional Setup for Environmental Management

26. The apex environmental body in the country is the Pakistan Environmental Protection Council
(PEPC), which is presided over by the Chief Executive of the Country. Other bodies include the
Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency (Pak-EPA), provincial EPAs (for four provinces,
Azad Jammu and Kashmir, and Gilgit Baltistan), and environmental tribunals.
27. The EPAs were first established under the 1983 Environmental Protection Ordinance; the PEPA
1997 further strengthened their powers. The EPAs have been empowered to receive and review
the environmental assessment reports (IEEs and EIAs) of the proposed projects, and provide their
approval (or otherwise). The proposed project is located in FATA, hence this ESMP will be sent
to the Pakistan/KP EPA for information and review.
2.4 Environmental and Social Guidelines

28. Two sets of guidelines, the Pak-EPAs guidelines and the World Bank Environmental Guidelines
are reviewed here. These guidelines address the environmental as well as social aspects.
2.4.1 Environmental Protection Agencys Environmental and Social Guidelines
29. The Federal EPA has prepared a set of guidelines for conducting environmental assessments. The
guidelines derive from much of the existing work done by international donor agencies and non-
governmental organizations (NGOs). The package of regulations, of which the guidelines form a
part, includes the PEPA 1997 and the NEQS. These guidelines are listed below.
Guidelines for the Preparation and Review of Environmental Reports,
Guidelines for Public Consultation,
Guidelines for Sensitive and Critical Areas,
Sectoral Guidelines.
6
It is stated in the Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency Review of IEE and EIA
Regulations, 2000 that the EIA or IEE must be prepared, to the extent practicable, in accordance
with the Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency Environmental Guidelines. However because
of the nature and size of FUCP, no EIA or IEE would be needed.
2.4.2 World Bank Environmental and Social Guidelines
30. The principal World Bank publications that contain environmental and social guidelines are listed
below.
Environment, Health, and Social (EHS) Guidelines prepared by International Finance
Corporation and World Bank in 1997.
Pollution Prevention and Abatement Handbook 1998: Towards Cleaner Production
Environmental Assessment Sourcebook, Volume I: Policies, Procedures, and Cross-
Sectoral Issues.
Social Analysis Sourcebook.
All environmental and social safeguard operational policies.
7
3. Project Description
31. This Section presents a simplified description of the Project, its objectives and its various
components.
3.1 Project Objectives

32. The development objective of FUCP is to improve urban services and management in Khar of
Bajaur Agency and develop a framework for urban management in FATA. The project will
contribute towards priority recovery, rehabilitation and investment needs of FATA identified
under the recently completed Post Crisis Needs Assessment (PCNA).
3.2 Project Components

3.2.1 Component-I: Priority Infrastructure Investments
33. This component will support priority infrastructure investments in Khar, Bajaur Agency. The
universe of infrastructure sub-projects to be supported under this component will include
rehabilitation/reconstruction, expansion, and/or upgrading of urban municipal infrastructure and
services including water supply, sanitation, solid waste management, streetlights, drains, and
roads, firefighting, and a general bus stand/terminal.
34. The investment sub-projects to be supported under this component shall be demand driven.
The criteria utilized for identifying them includes:
The established need for the proposed service within the existing populations;
Sub-project readiness for implementation;
Availability of adequate implementation capacity.
35. A household survey will be conducted in order to determine the demand for priority services. The
results of the survey will be used to select investments that satisfy the established need criterion.
Networked services like water supply, sewerage, and roads will be appraised holistically in a
geographic area. Sub-project readiness for implementation will be assessed through the feasibility
studies conducted for each proposed investment subproject. In this regard, capacity building of
IAs will be provided under Component 2.
36. Preliminary rapid assessments have been undertaken by the LG&RD Directorate to establish
coverage of existing municipal services in Khar. Moreover, satellite images for Khar have been
obtained for plotting of population distribution and existing service delivery infrastructure using
GIS mapping techniques. The following investments are under consideration for financing under
the project.
Table 3.1: Indicative List of Investments
Municipal Services Description
1 Paved Road 5.4 km new municipal roads

2 Paved Road Rehabilitation of 5 km existing road
3 New Drinking Water New distribution system including 6 nos tube wells
Supply
4 Drinking Water Rehabilitation of existing distribution system
Supply
5 Street Paving 29,520 feet new pavement of streets
6 Sewerage System Sewerage system
8
Municipal Services Description
7 Solid Waste Tractors with front end loader (2 nos.), tractor trolleys (2 nos.), hand carts,
Management System concrete bins, plastic/fiber glass bins, water tankers/dozers (2 nos.) etc.
8 Drains 30,100 ft long new rain water drains

9 Street Lights 50 nos. solar light main poles, 700 tube light poles
10 Fire Brigade Truck 3 no. new fire brigade truck, 1 no. repair
11 Park Construction of a parks with recreational facilities
12 Slaughter House Buildings (renovation and up gradation of the existing facilities
13 Bus Terminal Waiting lounge, washrooms, ticketing cabins, parking lot for buses, canteen.
37. The collected data will further be complemented by results from a detailed household survey to be
conducted under the project that will aim to establish: a) the extent of service provision on
household basis; b) household satisfaction with existing service delivery; and c) remaining
priority needs. The survey will thus validate and supplement the baseline data that is currently
available against targeted services. In addition, the survey shall further help to identify priority
demands or established needs that will be used as a basic criterion for the selection of proposed
investment subprojects.
38. The infrastructure investments will be grouped into quick wins, which are simple to undertake
but have high visibility like street lighting to improve security. These will be implemented
immediately to help establish credibility and support for project interventions. Investments
requiring detailed technical engineering designs and thus longer preparation time, like water
supply networks, will form the other group.
39. Contractors hired for execution of civil works will be encouraged, through incentives, to hire local
labor as far as possible for unskilled work items, to provide employment opportunities to the local
population, and to provide on-the-job training labor for skilled work, to ensure access of youth to
skilled labor opportunities. The Design Consultant will be encouraged to specify local
construction materials and employ designs that maximize labor inputs. Implementation oversight
and quality control will be ensured through hiring of Supervision Consultants.
3.2.2 Component II: Technical Assistance and Implementation Support
40. Technical Assistance will be provided for: a) design and development of an overall urban
management framework to be implemented under the TARUCCI program in all 14 towns in
FATA; and b) detailing the implementation plan for the pilot center (Khar, Bajaur Agency) being
supported by the proposed project. This component is also envisaged to strengthen the fiduciary
and safeguard capacity of FATA Secretariat to the extent that the next cycle of MDTF funding for
TARUCCI can be designed as a results-based lending initiative.
41. Support to the overall framework will include:
Developing conceptual framework for overall program;
Developing implementation road map for the overall program;
Developing guidelines for structure and spatial planning, demarcating urban boundary
etc;
Strengthening institutional structures, their business processes and procedures;
9
Evolving a Communications Strategy for the initiative.

Exposure visits regarding social and environmental aspects to other similar projects.
42. Implementation Support will focus on strengthening of the already established TARUCCI
Project Management Unit (TPMU), and building key competencies within it for the effective
coordination and oversight of project activities. This will include financing: a) salaries of the staff
and consultants hired for the project; b) costs of goods, equipment etc. needed for project
management; c) developing management information system; d) non-salary operational
expenditures; and e) costs for procuring services.
43. The component will also support strengthening of the Directorate of LG&RD for the design and
implementation of priority municipal service investments. This will include financing: a) salaries
of the staff and consultants hired for the project; b) costs of goods and equipment needed for sub-
project management and implementation; c) developing management information system; d) non-
salary operational expenditures; and e) costs of procuring civil works.
3.3 Project Implementation Arrangements

44. Overall Oversight Arrangements: The FATA Secretariat will manage Project implementation
with support from the already established Oversight Committee chaired by the Governor, Khyber
Pakhtunkhwa and the Steering Committee headed by the Additional Chief Secretary (ACS),
FATA.
45. Project Implementing Entity will be the FATA Secretariat.
46. The Project Management Unit (TARUCCI PMU) has been established and functioning since 25
Nov 2010, headed by a dedicated Project Director, and will be the main counterpart responsible
for coordinating and monitoring the project on behalf of FATA Secretariat. TPMU will have the
overall coordination and monitoring role for component 1. It will provide support to the
Directorate of LG&RD for procurement of works and services, coordination with the Bank,
financial management, and implementation of environmental and social safeguards It will also be
the implementing entity for component 2. It will identify the technical assistance and capacity
building activities in close consultation with FATA Secretariat and the Directorate of LG&RD,
and will be responsible for outsourcing third party audits and evaluations as required by the Bank
during project implementation.
47. The Directorate of LG&RD will be responsible for implementation, supervision and monitoring
of investments in municipal infrastructure and services under component 1. TPMU and the
Directorate of LG&RD are currently in the process of acquiring appropriate staff and resources
for carrying out their responsibilities.
48. Compliance of ESMP by the Civil Works Contractor(s): Civil works contractors and their
employees shall adhere to the mitigation measures as given in the ESMP and also take all other
measures to prevent social and economic harms, and to minimize the impact of operations on the
environment, detail is given Annex C.
3.3.1 Bank Implementation Support and Oversight Arrangements for the Project
49. In view of the security challenges across FATA constraining Bank staff access, there is a need for
alternative approaches to implementation support, particularly for field supervision and
monitoring of investments. The Projects supervision plan has been developed considering the
limitations of Bank staff access to the Project area. The CPS (FY 2010-2013) in recognizing this
challenge emphasizes that the Bank needs to find ways to enhance supervision, while mitigating
the risks associated with a challenging security environment.
10
50. For the FUCP, the proposed supervision mechanisms include:

a) Missions to FATA Secretariat/TPMU/Directorate LG&RD, Peshawar: Six-monthly regular
implementation support missions will be fielded to FATA Secretariat/TPMU/Directorate
LG&RD offices in Peshawar. In case of travel to Peshawar is restricted, the counterparts will
be invited to the Banks office in Islamabad. Participants will include the Banks Task Team,
FATA Secretariat/TPMU/Directorate LG&RD officials, Resident Engineer of the Supervision
Consultant, civil works Contractor/s, and others as needed.
b) Third Party Monitoring: The MDTF Secretariat is looking at third party monitoring
alternatives to help oversee project implementation in difficult environments like FATA. In
view of the prevailing security environment limiting monitoring opportunities, a goal of this
arrangement will be to strengthen the Banks technical supervision of the MDTF portfolio by
ensuring year-round access to project sites across the regions. The third party arrangement
will help Bank teams through on-site monitoring of physical progress, quality assurance, and
cross verification of civil works, and interface with targeted groups for selected projects
supported by the MDTF. It will thus provide an independent assessment of the reported
progress, and complement Banks implementation support. It will report directly to the Bank,
but work closely with the project implementing agencies.
c) Technology-based Measures: FUCP will also consider using technology such as geo-
referencing through Global Positioning System (GPS) enabled cameras for physical asset
verification, and mobile phones based voice messaging for beneficiary participation, tracking,
and verification. While these measures cannot fully replace the utility of actual field visits,
they provide a useful alternative in crisis affected areas where access may be an issue.
Moreover, the MDTF Secretariat is currently in the process of engaging Pakistan Space and
Upper Atmosphere Research Commission (SUPARCO) for satellite-based monitoring across
the border areas for the entire MDTF portfolio.
3.4 Consultation Strategy during Project Implementation:

51. The projects participation strategy will focus on conducting public consultations. Consultations
at each stage of planning will ensure that a wide cross section of public is included in spatial
planning and prioritization of sub-projects for implementation. Public consultations will,
therefore, take place both at an overall planning level for the urban center and for each sub-
project.
52. The project will adopt a flexible approach to consultations at each stage. This will include
identification of (i) appropriate stakeholders and (ii) consultation instruments. At the spatial
planning stage, a wide cross-section of stakeholders and extensive Focus Group Discussions will
be held to elicit feedback on an overall level. Such FGDs will lead to publics prioritization of
schemes and overall feedback on the spatial plan. At the sub-project planning level, public
consultations will also be held at a localized scale and with stakeholder groups directly affected.
As an example, a sub-project on establishment of a Public Park will include consultation with
women and children through door-to-door interviews or FGDs in schools and/or a group of
households. Thus, the instrument for consultation will vary according to the scheme under
consideration and the types of stakeholders. Project staff will identify stakeholders, process of
consultation and instruments for consultation for each sub-project requiring public consultation.
Findings of consultations will be documented and incorporated in project design and process of
implementation.
53. The project will take a gender inclusive approach to consultation. Women will be consulted as far
as possible and socially acceptable agents such as school teachers, LDVs will be used for
11
undertaking such consultations. Further, the instrument for consulting women will be culturally
appropriate.
54. A Grievance Redress Mechanism will provide an avenue for raising issues related to planning and
implementation. Further, a communications strategy will provide guidance on keeping the public
informed about the pace and scale of project activities.
3.5 Communications
55. An effective Communication Strategy can help bridge the trust deficit amongst the target
population and government agencies. It can communicate the intended benefits of the planned
interventions to the population of Khar, while simultaneously managing expectations. TPMU is in
the process of contracting in resources to develop a Communications Strategy and a community
outreach plan, as tools for promoting greater community participation, and to:
Ensure that residents of FATA, particularly Khar, Bajaur, are kept well informed on a
continuous basis, about the objectives and interventions of FUCP;
Respond to requests from persons with queries on the project; and
Manage expectations.
3.6 Grievance Redress/Complaint Handling Mechanism

56. Any person/stakeholder especially a beneficiary has a right to file a complaint and/or seek queries
about the project. In order to ensure that queries/complaints/grievances are addressed in a timely
and satisfactory manner, a localized Grievance Redress Mechanism (GRM)/Complaint Handling
System has been established for the newly established Municipal Committee Khar and FATA
Urban Centers Project. It will allow a complainant to address any disagreeable decision, practice
or activity arising from and/or non-compliance of ESMP and safeguards or any other issue related
to the project/services. A detailed description and step-by-step Grievance Redress mechanism has
been established by the TPMU. Mainly, the Project Director-TPMU will be responsible for the
compliance of GRM under the project, led by the Assistant Director-LG&RDD who is based at
MC Khar and has been designated as a focal point to receive and provide response to queries and
complaints. A Grievance Redressal Committee (GRC) has been constituted for major grievances
is headed by the Additional Political Agent, Bajaur. Other committee members include Project
Director- TPMU, Assistant Director-LG&RDD and Social Safeguard Specialist-TPMU. The
Social Safeguard Specialist will work as Secretary of the GRC. Detailed mechanism of GRM has
been given in Annex D.
57. All stakeholders will be fully informed of their rights to seek information, queries and registering
complaints, verbally or in writing during the period of the project, through dissemination of
information on GRM by bill-boards at entry and exit points of Khar city, advertisement in the
newspapers, announcements in the radio and distribution of pamphlets. Care will always be taken
to prevent grievances through careful implementation of the project, by ensuring full consultation
and participation of the stakeholders, and by establishing extensive communication and
coordination between the TPMU, LG&RDD, Political Administration, contractor(s) and
supervision consultants. Efforts will be made to settle the complaints/issues at the AD-
LG&RDD; else all possible attempts will be made to resolve the complaints at the TPMU and
Additional Political Agent levels to minimize litigation. All complaints and resolutions will be
properly documented by the TPMU through the Secretary GRC, and will be available for review,
monitoring and evaluation purposes. The GRM will also be displayed on FUCP and FATA
Secretariat websites; TPMU will update the status of actions taken on these websites. Other
channels will involve direct complaint to the Focal Point, call at toll-free hotline (0800), SMS,
12
verbal or in writing. These channels will also provide an opportunity to tribal women to seek
information, or register their grievances as per their convenience.
3.7 Project Area

58. Bajaur is one of the FATA agencies (Tribal Districts), and is bounded by District Dir (settled
district) to the north-northeast, Mohmand Agency to the south, Malakand district to the east, and
Afghanistan towards west. The total area of the Agency is 1,290 km2, which is mostly hilly and
mountainous with little flat land. The total cultivated area is only 75,300 ha, most of which is rain
fed, having insufficient rainfall with low agriculture productivity. The Agency population was
595,227 according to the 1998 census with a growth rate of 4.33 percent. The FUCP will be
implemented in the agency headquarter Khar. See Figures 3.1 and 3.2 for maps of the area.
13
Figure 3.1: FATA and Bajaur Agency
14
Figure 3.2: Bajaur MC
15
4. Impact Assessment and Mitigation
59. This Section identifies the potentially negative environmental and social impacts of the sub-
project under the FUCP and also proposes appropriate mitigation measures to address these
impacts.
4.1 Environmental Assessment Process

60. The environmental and social assessment process that was employed during the present ESMP is
discussed below. As part of the environmental and social impact assessment process, a screening
matrix was developed tailored specifically to the proposed sub-projects, focusing the potential
environmental and social impacts during the design, construction and operation phases. The
matrix examined the interaction of project activities with various components of the environment.
The impacts were broadly classified as physical, biological and social, and then each of these
broad categories further divided into different aspects. The potential impacts thus predicted were
characterized as follows, with the matrix is provided in Table 4.1.
High negative (adverse) impact,
Low negative impact,
Insignificant impact,
High positive (beneficial) impact,
Low positive impact, and
No impact.
61. The negative impacts predicted in this manner were the unmitigated impacts. Appropriate
mitigation measures were recommended as part of this ESMP, thus reducing the occurrence
possibility and severity of the potentially adverse impacts. The negative impacts identified
through this process are discussed in the sections below.
16
FUCP, FATA Secretariat
Table 4.1: Environmental and Social Screening Matrix (Unmitigated)
Physical Biological Social
Erosion/Contamination
Impacts on Agriculture
Blocked Access Routes
Water Availability and
Surface Water Quality
Land donation/Buying
Groundwater Quality
Impacts on Irrigation
Noise and Vibration
Natural Vegetation
Aesthetic Value
Cultural Issues
Safety Hazard
Gender Issues
Infrastructure
Public Health
Consumption
Air Quality
Network
Wildlife
Soil
Water Supply Schemes - -1 -2
-1 0 -1 0 -2 -1 0 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1
1
Sanitation Schemes -2 -1 -2 -2 0 -1 -1 -1 0 0 -1 -1 -1 -2 -1 -1 0 -2
Solid Waste Management Schemes -2 -1 -2 -2 0 -1 -1 -1 0 0 -1 -1 -1 -2 -1 -1 0 -2
Street Pavements - N
-1 0 -1 0 0 -1 0 -1 0 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1
1
Road construction - -2
-1 -1 -1 0 0 -1 0 -2 -1 -1 -2 -1 -1 0 -1 0
1
Slaughter house -1 0 -2 -1 0 -1 0 -1 0 0 -1 -2 -1 -2 -1 0 0 -2
Park - -2
-2 0 0 -1 -1 -2 0 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 -1 -2
1
Bus stand/terminal -2 -2 0 0 -1 0 0 -1 -2 0 -1 -2 -1 -1 0 -1 -1 -2
Vehicles for Fire brigade 0 -1 -1 -1 -2 0 0 -1 -1 0 -1 -2 0 -1 0 0 0 N
Street lights -1 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -2 0 0 -1 -2 -1 0 0 z -1 N
Key: -2: High negative impact; -1: Low negative impact; 0: insignificant/negligible impact; +1: low positive impact; +2: High positive impact, N: no impact.
17
4.2 Potential Impacts and Mitigation

62. The following types of schemes have been identified in the Project design as potential
investments at this stage:
Water Supply Schemes (new as well as rehabilitation of old schemes)
Sanitation Scheme
Solid Waste Management Scheme
Street Pavement
Municipal Roads (new as well as rehabilitation of existing ones )
Street lights
Purchase of new Fire Brigade trucks and repair of one existing.
Parks
Rehabilitation/Improvement of an existing Slaughter House
Improvements in existing Bus Terminal
The potentially negative environmental and social impacts of the above schemes are discussed below.
4.2.1 Water Supply Schemes

63. The potential impacts of the water supply schemes are listed below:
Supply of contaminated water to the users
Depletion of water source, and affecting others water users
Location and design of scheme socially unacceptable
Gender sensitive location of tube wells
Inequitable distribution of scheme benefits
Construction activities causing:
Soil erosion and contamination
Water contamination
Blocked access routes
Noise
Damage to crops/cultivation fields/trees/natural vegetation of significance
Damage to existing infrastructure (road, irrigation, pavements, drains, others)
Safety hazard for nearby population
Damage to sites of archeological, historical, cultural, or religious significance (i.e.
cultural heritage sites).
Impact on women privacy
Community conflicts over location of tubewells or installation of household connections.
64. Mitigation Measures: Most of the above impacts particularly those associated with the
construction activities are temporary in nature and low to moderate in significance, as shown in
18
Table 4.1. Furthermore, their possibility of occurrence and significance will be further reduced
with the help of the mitigation measures listed below:
Land if required for the scheme to be donated by the community on voluntary basis,
existing government land will be used, or land will be provided by the Political Agent
(either purchased or through donation). Checklist and agreement format in Annex E and
Annex F will be used for this purpose and procedure for purchase of land is given in
Annex B. The procedure for land donation is mentioned in Annex G.
Selection of water source after laboratory analysis to ensure that it complies with the
NEQS for drinking water.
Protecting the water source from contaminants.
Selecting a water source in a manner that it does not negatively affect the existing water
users.
Locating and designing the scheme using the following criteria (checklist in Annex H
will also be used for this purpose):
o Ensuring equitable distribution of scheme benefits through community participation
o Ensuring no blocked access, avoiding damage to crops, cultivation fields,
cultivation fields, graveyards and cultural heritage sites
o After carrying out consultation with the beneficiary community, including
women - ensuring that the scheme is socially acceptable and suitable to women.
o Ensuring no damage to cultural heritage sites and graveyards.
o Minimizing tree felling requirements to the extent possible. If unavoidable, maintain
documentary and photographic record of each tree felled, and carry out compensatory
tree plantation (five plants for every tree felled).
o Measures to protect privacy of women
o Relevant mitigation measures will be included in all contract/bidding documents
Water User Committee to handle conflicts and extensive community consultations and
participation at design, construction and operations and maintenance.
Employing good engineering/construction practices and due diligence during construction
activities to avoid/minimize: soil erosion and contamination; release of polluted
water/effluents; excessive noise generation near the communities; damage to crops and
cultivation field; tree cutting, damage to public infrastructure (damaged infrastructure to
be restored/repaired); damage to graveyards and other cultural heritage sites; and
safety/health hazard for the community. The site will be restored and cleared of all
debris/scrap/left over construction material after completion of construction works. The
generic safeguards requirements for construction works are presented in Annex C.
Raising awareness amongst communities regarding the importance of health and hygiene,
safe drinking water and methods of water purification.
The contractor will be required to follow the WB EHS Guidelines provided in Annex J.
Sub project specific consultation will be undertaken prior to implementation and will be
properly documented to ensure that the proposed mitigation plans are appropriate and
generally acceptable.
4.2.2 Sanitation Scheme
65. The potential impacts of the sanitation schemes are listed below:
19
Contamination of soil and water from the release of untreated sewage, sludge from the
treatment facility, and the associated health hazards.
Location and design of scheme socially unacceptable
Inequitable distribution of scheme benefits.
Water contamination
Noise
Damage to crops/cultivation fields/natural vegetation of significance, trees
cultural heritage sites).
Risk of falling into ditches to be made for the construction of man holes
66. Mitigation Measures
Land, if required for the scheme, will be donated by the community on voluntary basis or
existing government land will be used. If existing government land would not be
available, the government will purchase private land through open market negotiation on
willing seller willing buyer basis but no FUCP funds will be used for purchase of land
(checklist Involuntary Resettlement and agreement for Contribution of Assets in Annex E
and F while process for purchase of land is given in Annex B. The procedure for land
donation is mentioned in Annex G.
Treating and disposing the sewage in a manner that the soil and water (particularly the
drinking water) is not contaminated (e.g. septic tanks, oxidation ponds, treatment plants,
others)
Appropriately disposing the sludge from the treatment facility in a manner not to cause
soil and water contamination.
Locating and designing the scheme using the following criteria (checklist in Annex H
will also be used for this purpose):
Community participation in the designing, construction and implementation of sub-
projects. The design of the scheme will be finalized after carrying out consultation with
the beneficiary community, including women - ensuring that the scheme is socially
acceptable and suitable to women.
Ensuring equitable distribution of scheme benefits through community participation
Ensuring no blocked access, avoiding damage to crops, cultivation fields, cultivation
fields, graveyards and cultural heritage sites
After carrying out consultation with the beneficiary community, including
Ensuring no damage to cultural heritage sites and graveyards.
20
Minimizing tree felling requirements to the extent possible. If unavoidable, maintain

documentary and photographic record of each tree felled, and carry out compensatory tree
plantation (five plants for every tree felled).
Fencing around ditches of man holes to protect children, elderly, general public and
animals from ditches
Relevant mitigation measures will be included in all contract/bidding documents
Raising awareness amongst communities on importance of safe sewage disposal, hygiene
practices, contamination of drinking water.
4.2.3 Solid Waste Management Scheme
67. The potential impacts of the solid waste management schemes are listed below:
Contamination of soil and water from inappropriately disposing the solid waste, and the
associated health hazards.
Health hazard for the sanitary workers
Odor from the solid waste
Location of disposal site socially unacceptable
Inappropriately located disposal site affecting public infrastructure, crops/cultivation
fields, trees and natural vegetation of importance, access routes, or cultural heritage sites.
Community attitudes towards garbage throwing or non-use of waste bins
Compiling of non-recyclable/decomposable material
68. Mitigation Measures. The possibility of occurrence and significance of the above impacts will
be reduced with the help of the mitigation measures listed below.
available, the Political Agent will purchase private land through open market negotiation
on willing seller willing buyer basis but no FUCP funds will be used for purchase of land
Disposing the solid waste in a manner that the soil and water (particularly the drinking
water) is not contaminated (e.g. sanitary earth-fill).
21
The truck transporting the solid waste will be properly covered.

Ensuring equitable distribution of scheme benefits through community participation
Locating the disposal site and designing the scheme using the following criteria (checklist
in Annex H will also be used for this purpose):
Away from drinking water sources, cultural heritage sites, forested areas, trees, natural
vegetation of significance, and sensitive receptors such as schools and hospitals
Segregation of solid wastes at the collection level and dumping/piling of bio-degradable
solid waste and composting of biodegradable waste will be promoted
Community participation in the designing, construction and implementation of sub-
projects. The design of the scheme will be finalized after carrying out consultation with
the beneficiary community, including women - ensuring that the scheme is socially
acceptable and suitable to women.
Inculcating environmental, health and hygiene awareness in the community to reduce
waste generation, minimizing disposal of plastics (e.g. polyethylene bags), and to
promote recycling of waste.
Raising awareness amongst communities (men, women and children) on importance of
safe waste disposal, hygiene practices.
Providing personal protective equipment to the sanitary workers and also raising their
awareness regarding the health hazards associated with inappropriately handling the solid
waste.
4.2.4 Street Pavement
69. The potential impacts associated with the street pavement are listed below:
Blockage of drainage and sewerage
Tree cutting
Water contamination
Noise
22
Safety hazard for nearby population.

dust
70. Mitigation Measures. Most of the above impacts particularly those associated with the
Table 4.1. Furthermore, their possibility of occurrence and significance will be further reduced
Designing the scheme,
Ensuring equitable distribution of scheme benefits through community participation.
Ensuring no blockage of drainage and sewerage.
Carrying out consultation with the beneficiary community, including women - ensuring
that the scheme is socially acceptable.
Sprinkling and other mitigation measures to control generation of dust/air pollution.
Alternate routes for community access/ to facilitate community mobility including men,
women and children.
Relevant mitigation measures will be included in all contract/bidding documents.
4.2.5 Roads
71. The potential impacts associated with rural roads include the following:
Road alignment socially unacceptable, causing loss of productive land, damage to crops,
blocked access routes, and other similar problems
Disruption of natural drainage
Tree cutting
Inappropriate disposal of spoil/surplus soil
Water contamination
23
Noise and dust

cultural heritage sites)
Safety hazards/risks of accidents for the community associated with vehicular traffic on
the completed road.
Interruption to commercial activities
Land required for new roads leading to involuntary resettlement
72. Mitigation Measures: The following mitigation measures will greatly reduce the possibility
of occurrence and the severity of the potentially negative impacts listed above:
Locating and aligning the road using the following criteria (checklist in Annex H will
also be used for this purpose):
Ensuring no blocked access, avoiding damage to crops, cultivation fields, cultivation
Ensuring equitable distribution of scheme benefit through community participation
Carrying out consultation with the beneficiary community, including women - ensuring
that the scheme is socially acceptable and suitable to women.
Avoiding blockage of natural drainage. Provide alternates as appropriate
Alternate routes to facilitate commercial activities
Sprinkling and other mitigation measures to control generation of dust/air pollution
Alternate routes for community access/ to facilitate community mobility including men,
women and children
Construction of speed breakers in front of schools, hospitals and other community
services.
24

The design will include safe pedestrian crossing for community use such as schools,
hospitals.
Installation of warning signs along the road on sensitive receptors.
Educating the community for appropriate precautionary measures against safety hazards
associated with vehicular traffic.
If screening procedure confirms that land will be required and leave to voluntary
resettlement, the sub project will be classified as category A. a full EA and RAP will be
prepared and shared with the Bank for approval. Public consultation will also take place
as required for RAP.
4.2.6 Slaughter House
73. This is one of the activities included in the PC-1 of Municipal Committee Khar. Following are
some of the negative impacts which may be associated with this activity:
The odor and noise from the slaughter house may affect the local population.
Safety concerns for surrounding population.
Insects, mosquitoes and flies may enter into the slaughter house and contaminate meat.
Contamination of soil and water particularly drinking water.
Issues associated with solid waste disposal.
Blockage of drainage and sewerage
Tree cutting (in case of a new or expansion of existing facility)
Construction activities causing (in case of a new or expansion of existing facility):
Water contamination
Noise
25
Proper in out gates will be constructed to avoid the animals getting frightened by seeing
the slaughtered animals.
Proper internal and external sewerage system will be constructed.
Proper flooring of the slaughter house will be constructed and proper netting facility will
be installed.
There will be a proper arrangement for disposal of solid waste by arranging carriage
system for the slaughter house. Liquid waste will also be properly drained in such a way
that contamination of drinking water is avoided.
Ensuring no blockage of drainage and sewerage
Proper waste management system will be integrated into sub-project design.
plantation (five plants for every tree felled)
4.2.7 Establishment of a Ladies/Children/Family Park
75. The potential impacts associated with construction of parks include the following:
Non utilization of park by women due to cultural restrictions on women mobility
Tree cutting
Water contamination
Noise
26

People visiting the park may face transportation problem.
There may be a need of washrooms in the park.
The people may face drinking water problem.
The children may get injured and hurt due to unsafe play areas.
76. Mitigation Measures. Most of the above impacts particularly those associated with the
Table 4.1 Furthermore, their possibility of occurrence and significance will be further reduced
The site for construction of parks will be selected at a nearby distance i.e. 500 to 600
meters from the local population so that the people may not face transportation problem.
The location for a park will be selected accessible to public.
Proper landscaping will be carried out.
Roads and footpaths will be constructed.
Proper in-out and parking facility will be provided.
Safe drinking water facility, wash rooms for male/females/disables will be provided.
Proper plantation for provision of shade will be made.
Benches will be provided at appropriate spots.
Health and safety measures for children will be considered. This will include the
development of a protocol to ensure that children health and safety will be included in the
design and construction phase.
Ensuring no blockage of drainage and sewerage
Public awareness and Promotional activities to encourage access of women to the park
Women specific parks will be developed or specific arrangements will be made to protect
privacy of girls and women in the parks, according to local norms and culture. It will
ensure equal access by the girls and women to the parks.
27
4.2.8 Bus Stand/Terminal
77. The potential impacts associated with construction of a Bus Stand/Terminal include the following
negative impacts:
Tree cutting
Traffic jam
Severe weather conditions may disturb the passengers.
Solid waste may be seen spread all over.
Mud, rain water may create problems for passengers.
Security problems.
Women may not use the stand/Terminal due to privacy issues.
Water contamination
Noise
78. Mitigations Measures. The following measures will be adopted to reduce the negative impacts of
this activity:
Separate in-out gates will be constructed for incoming and outgoing vehicles to avoid
traffic jam in/around of the bus stand/terminal.
The location will be selected out from the congested area but not too far away that the
passengers need other means of transportation to reach the bus stand/terminal.
28
Proper vehicles stand for the vehicles different routes.

Dust bins will be installed in the bus stand/terminal to avoid spreading of solid waste
everywhere.
Toilet facility for male, females, and disabled persons.
Proper plantation in the bus stand/terminal for provision of shade.
Proper waiting areas for males and females separately.
Proper sewerage system especially for rain water.
Proper ticketing system for passenger of various routes.
Proper Security arrangements
As separate bus stand/terminal construction is not possible, therefore separate waiting
area with toilet facilities will be provided for women.
Relevant health and safety measures will be included in the design and construction of the
subproject.
4.2.9 Purchase of Vehicles for Fire brigade
79. The potential impacts associated with this activity include the following negative impacts:
The noise of the vehicles may disturb the locals.
The movement of Fire brigade trucks may cause traffic problems.
Availability of water may become a problem in emergency.
The fire brigade staff while fighting fire may get skin and chest problems
80. Mitigation Measures. The following measures will be adopted to reduce the negative impacts of
this activity:
Proper arrangement of water will be made in emergency like separate tube well or water
tank.
Proper training of firefighting will be provided to the staff recruited.
Personal protective equipment will be provided to the staff to follow health and safety
standards
A new and proper equipped vehicle will be purchased.
29
4.2.10 Street Lights
81. The potential impacts associated with the installation of street lights include:
Street light poles pose traffic hazards.
Open wires used in street lights may cause electric shocks to pedestrians.
Construction activities if any may cause:
Energy saver lights instead of incandescent lamps will be used.
Standard engineering practices will be used while designing and installing the system,
ensuring no blockage of drainage, sewerage or public access
All possible efforts will be made to avoid damages to infrastructure but in case of any
damages, contractor(s) will be responsible to restore the damaged infrastructure to the
pre-project condition(s).
30
5. Environmental and Social Management
This Section presents the mechanism to manage the environmental and social aspects of the Project.
5.1 Institutional Arrangements for ESMP Implementation

83. The Project Director, TARUCCI will be responsible for the overall implementation of ESMP as
well as environmental and social performance of the Project. S/he will be supported by the full
time environment and social specialists in the TPMU and designated Environmental and Social
Focal Points (ESFPs) in the AIU (Agency Implementation Unit), and Local Government and
Rural Development Directorate. These ESFPs will coordinate with PMU, AIU and LG&RDD for
the effective implementation of ESMP, including integrating the environmental and social
measures in the sub-projects design, implementation, monitoring, and progress reporting on
ESMP implementation. TPMU will engage the services of an environmental consultant to
support the environment specialist, if so needed, to implement the ESMP effectively.
5.2 Mitigation Plans

84. Separate environmental and social Mitigation Plans have been prepared for each type of scheme
discussed in Section 4. These Plans are presented in Tables 5.1 to 5.11. These Plans will be used
during the scheme inception and design stage, and will be made part of the scheme proposal
preparation and approval process thus ensuring integration of environmental and social
considerations in the entire identification-design-implementation cycle of each scheme.
31
Table 5.1: Mitigation Plan for Water Supply Schemes

Environmental and Mitigation Measures Responsibility Notes
Social Aspect
Land requirement Land, if required for the scheme, will be donated by the community on voluntary basis FUCP/LG staff/PA
or existing government land will be used or purchased by the Government. No FUCP staff
funds will be utilized for purchase of land. Checklist and agreement format in Annex
E, F will be used for this purpose. Procedure provided in Annex B will be used if land
has to be purchased. The procedure for land donation is mentioned in Annex G.
Water quality Selection of water source after laboratory analysis to ensure that it complies with the FUCP/LG staff
NEQS for drinking water.
Scheme locaion Use checkilist in Annex H for scheme location FUCP/LG staff
Protect the water source from contaminants FUCP/LG staff
Select a water source in a manner that it does not negatively affect the existing water FUCP/LG staff
users.
Ensure equitable distribution of scheme benefits through community participation FUCP/LG staff
Ensure no blocked access FUCP/LG staff
Carrying out consultation with the beneficiary community including women ensuring FUCP/LG staff
that the scheme socially feasible
Ensuring no damage to cultural heritage sites and graveyards. FUCP/LG staff
Relevant mitigation measures will be included in all contract documents.
Measures to protect privacy of women
Minimizing tree felling requirements to the extent possible. If unavoidable, maintain FUCP/LG staff
Water User Committee to handle conflicts and extensive community consultations and FUCP/LG
participation at design, construction and operations and maintenance. staff/community
Construction Phase Employing good engineering/construction practices and due diligence during FUCP/LG staff
construction activities to avoid/minimize: soil erosion and contamination; release of
polluted water/effluents; excessive noise generation near the communities; damage to
crops and cultivation field; tree cutting, damage to public infrastructure (damaged
infrastructure to be restored/repaired); damage to graveyards and other cultural
heritage sites; and safety/health hazard for the community. The site will be restored
and cleared of all debris/scrap/left over construction material after completion of
32

Social Aspect
construction works. The generic safeguards requirements for construction works are
presented in Annex C.
EHS Issues The contractor will be required to follow the WB EHS Guidelines provided in Annex Conractor
J.
Consutation Sub project specific consultation will be undertaken prior to implementation and will FUCP/LG
be properly documented to ensure that the proposed mitigation plans are appropriate
and generally acceptable.
O&M Phase Raising awareness amongst communities on the importance of safe drinking water and LG Staff
methods of water purification.
Table 5.2: Mitigation Plan for Sanitation Schemes
Social Aspect
or existing government land will be used or purchased by the Government. No FUCP staff
funds will be utilized for purchase/leasing of land. Checklist and agreement format in
Annex E, F will be used for this purpose. Procedure provided in Annex B will used if
land has to be purchased. The procedure for land donation is mentioned in Annex G.
Water quality Treating and disposing the sewage and sludge in a manner that the soil and water FUCP/LG staff
(particularly the drinking water) is not contaminated (e.g. septic tanks, oxidation
ponds, treatment plants, others)
Appropriately disposing the sludge from the treatment facility in a manner not to cause FUCP/LG staff
soil and water contamination.
Scheme locaion ensuring equitable distribution of scheme benefits through community participation FUCP/LG staff
Use checkilist in Annex H for scheme location FUCP/LG staff
Community participation in the designing , construction and implementation of sub
projects.
Ensuring no blocked access, avoiding damage to crops, cultivation fields, cultivation FUCP/LG staff
After carrying out consultation with the beneficiary community, including FUCP/LG staff
Minimizing tree felling requirements to the extent possible. If unavoidable, maintain Community/AIU
33

Social Aspect
Construction Phase Employing good engineering/construction practices and due diligence during Community/AIU
heritage sites; and safety/health hazard for the community. The site FUCP/LG staff
will be restored and cleared of all debris/scrap/left over construction material after
completion of construction works. The generic safeguards requirements for
construction works are presented in Annex C.
Fencing around ditches of main holes to protect children, elderly, general public and
animals from ditches.
J.
Consutation Sub project specific consultation will be undertaken prior to implementation and will FUCP/LG staff
O&M Phase Raising awareness amongst communities on importance of safe sewage disposal, LG staff
hygiene practices, and clean drinking water.
Table 5.3: Mitigation Plan for Solid Waste Management Schemes/Systems
Social Aspect
or existing government land will be used or purchased by the Government. No FUCP Staff
funds will be utilized for purchase/leasing of land. Checklist and agreement format in
Annex E, F will be used for this purpose. Procedure provided in Annex B will used if
land has to be purchased. The procedure for land donation is mentioned in Annex G.
Water quality Disposing the solid waste in a manner that the soil and water (particularly the drinking FUCP/LG staff
water) is not contaminated (e.g. sanitary earth-fill).
Disposal site locaion Ensuring equitable distribution of scheme benefits through community participation FUCP/LG staff
Away from drinking water sources, cultural heritage sites, forested areas, trees, natural FUCP/LG staff
34

Social Aspect
vegetation of significance, and sensitive receptors such as schools and hospitals
Ensuring no blocked access, avoiding damage to crops, cultivation fields, cultivation FUCP/LG staff
Carrying out consultation with the beneficiary community, including FUCP/LG staff
Relevant mitigation measures will be included in all contract/bidding documents. FUCP/LG staff
J.
O&M Phase Inculcating environmental awareness in the community to reduce waste generation, LG Staff
minimizing disposal of plastics (e.g. polyethylene bags), and to promote recycling of
waste. Raising awareness amongst communities on importance of safe waste disposal,
hygiene practices, and clean drinking water.
Segregation of solid wastes at the collection level and dumping/piling of bio-
degradable solid waste and composting of bio-degradable waste will be promoted.
Promoting composting of biodegradable waste LG Staff
Providing personal protective equipment to the sanitary workers and also raising their LG Staff
awareness regarding the health hazards associated with inappropriately handling the
solid waste.
The truck transporting the solid waste will be properly covered LG Staff
Table 5.4: Mitigation Plan for Street Pavement Schemes

Social Aspect
Design of Scheme Ensuring equitable distribution of scheme benefits FUCP/LG staff
Ensuring no blockage of drainage and sewerage FUCP/LG staff
Carrying out consultation with the beneficiary community, including FUCP/LG staff
35

Social Aspect
Women - ensuring that the scheme is socially acceptable and suitable to women.
Ensuring equitable distribution of scheme benefits through community participation FUCP/LG staff
Alternate routes for community access/ to facilitate community mobility including
men, women and children.
Sprinkling and other mitigation measures to control generation of dust/air pollution.
Constructoin phase Employing good engineering/construction practices and due diligence during FUCP/LG staff
J.
Table 5.5: Mitigation Plan for Municipal Roads

Social Aspect
Land requirement Land, if required for the scheme, will be donated by the community on voluntary FUCP/LG staff
basis or existing government land will be used or purchased by the Government. No
FUCP funds will be utilized for purchase/leasing of land. Checklist and agreement
format in Annex E, F will be used for this purpose. Procedure provided in Annex B
will used if land has to be purchased. The procedure for land donation is mentioned in
Annex G.
36

Social Aspect
Road alignment Ensuring no blocked access, avoiding damage to crops, cultivation fields, cultivation FUCP/LG staff
Ensuring equitable distribution of scheme benefits through community participation FUCP/LG staff
Avoiding blockage of natural drainage. Provide alternates as appropriate FUCP/LG staff
carrying out consultation with the beneficiary community, including FUCP/LG staff
Constructoin phase Employing good engineering/construction practices and due diligence during FUCP/LG staff
Relevant mitigation will be included in all contract/bidding documents
Alternate routes for community access/to facilitate community mobility including
men, women and children.
Sprinkling and other mitigation measures to control generation of dust air pollution.
Alternate routes to facilitate commercial activities.
J.
37

Social Aspect
If screening procedure confirms that land will be required and leave to voluntary FUCP
resettlement, the sub project will be classified as category A. a full EA and RAP
will be prepared and shared with the Bank for approval. Public consultation will
also take place as required for RAP.
O&M Phase Installing warning signs along the road. FUCP/LG staff
Construction of speed breaker sin front of schools, hospitals and other community
services.
Educating the community for appropriate precautionary measures against safety FUCP/LG staff
hazards associated with vehicular traffic.
Table 5.6: Mitigation Plan for Slaughter House Renovation Scheme

Social Aspect
Land requirement (for any Land, if required for the scheme, will be donated by the community on voluntary FUCP/LG staff
possible facility basis or existing government land will be used or purchased by the Government. No
expansion) FUCP funds will be utilized for purchase/leasing of land. Checklist and agreement
Annex G.
Scheme locaion/design Proper in out gates will be constructed to avoid the animals getting frightened by FUCP/LG staff
seeing the slaughtered animals.
There will be a proper arrangement for disposal of solid waste by arranging carriage FUCP/LG staff
system from the slaughter house . Liquid waste will also be properly drained in such a
way that contamination of drinking water is avoided.
Proper internal sewerage system will be constructed. FUCP/LG staff
Ensure no blocked access FUCP/LG staff
Proper flooring in the slaughter house will be made and proper netting facility will be FUCP/LG staff
installed to check the entry of insects and mosquitoes.
Proper waste management system will be integrated into the subproject design.
Relevant mitigation measures will be incorporated in all contract/bidding documents.
38

Social Aspect
Construction Phase Employing good engineering/construction practices and due diligence during FUCP/LG staff
J.
O&M Phase Raising awareness amongst butchers to focus on the hygienic measures and the LG Staff
importance of cleanliness.
Ensuring no blockage of drainage and sewerage LG Staff
Table 5.7: Mitigation Plan for Construction of Public Parks

Social Aspect
39

Social Aspect
Annex G.
Scheme locaion The site for construction of public park will be selected so as to be accessible to local FUCP/LG staff
population i.e. at 500 to 600 meters from local population
Use checkilist in Annex H for scheme location
Proper landscaping, Roads and footpaths, Proper in out and parking facility will be FUCP/LG staff
provided.
Drinking water facility, wash rooms for male/females/disables will be provided. FUCP/LG staff
Proper plantation, benches, proper facility for special people will be provided. FUCP/LG staff
Health and safety measures for children will be considered.

Relevant mitigation measures will be included in all the contract/bidding documents
Women specific parks or specific arrangements will be made to protect privacy of
girls and women in the park, according to the local norms and culture. It will ensure
equal access by the girls and women to the parks.
Ensuring no blockage of natural drainage and sewerage
Construction Phase Employing good engineering/construction practices and due diligence during
J.
40

Social Aspect
O&M Phase Raising awareness amongst people regarding use of parks and public places after Agency LG staff
completion of the project, proper cleanliness and maintenance of lawns, proper
watering and care of plants, painting of pots and other installations at the park at
regular interval of time will made.
Table 5.8 Mitigation Plan for Construction of Bus Stand/Terminal scheme

Social Aspect
Annex G.
Scheme locaion/design The site for construction of bus stand/terminal will be selected so as to be accessible FUCP/LG staff
to local population but away from congested area.
Use checkilist in Annex H for scheme location
Provision of proper vehicles stand for different routes, site for waste collection, toilet FUCP/LG staff
facility for male, females, disabled, proper plantation in the bus stand/terminal proper
waiting areas for males and females separately, proper sewerage system especially for
rain water, proper ticketing system for passenger of various routes
Proper security arrangements
41

Social Aspect
Health and safety measures for passengers will be considered. FUCP/LG staff
Separate waiting area with toilet facility will be provided for women. FUCP/LG staff
Proper sewage disposal arrangements FUCP/LG staff
Proper drainage system for rain water
Construction Phase Employing good engineering/construction practices and due diligence during LG&R staff
J.
O&M Phase Proper solid waste management practices, sweepers and all the drainage and FUCP/LG staff
sanitation issues of the bus stand/terminal will be addressed to be properly
maintained. Security system and tax collection will be made.
42
Table 5.9: Mitigation Plan for Street Lights Scheme

Social Aspect
Land requirement As obvious, street lights are mainly installed along the road side and in the streets, FUCP/LG staff
land requirement for the street light scheme will not be that much necessary and still
if land was required for the scheme will be donated by the community on voluntary
basis or government land will be utilized. Checklist and agreement format in Annex
E, F will be used for this purpose. Procedure provided in Annex B will used if land has
to be purchased.
Scheme locaion Use checkilist in Annex H for scheme location FUCP/LG staff
Energy saver mercury lights instead of incandescent will be used, proper insulators FUCP/LG staff
will be used while installing the street lights, the poles will be so designed to break
away when hit i.e. with collapsible support,
Health and safety measures for the local population will be considered. FUCP/LG staff
Construction Phase All possible efforts will be made to avoid damages to infrastructure but in case of any FUCP/LG staff
damages, contractor (s) will be responsible to restore the damaged infrastructure to
the pre-project condition.
Standard engineering practices will be used while designing and installing the system, FUCP/LG staff
ensuring no blockage of drainage, sewerage and public access.
Employing good engineering/construction practices and due diligence during FUCP/LG staff
43

Social Aspect
Relevant mitigation measures will be included in all contract/bidding documents FUCP/LG staff
J.
O&M Phase All the wires and installations will be thoroughly checked for open wires at regular FUCP/LG staff
intervals of time by the technicians. The communities will be made aware of the
importance of the street lights which is an important tool in security issues, the people
will be mobilized to own this activity and cooperate with the municipal staff in the
O&M of the scheme.
Table 5.10: Mitigation Plan for Purchase of vehicles for Fire brigade

Social Aspect
O&M Phase Proper arrangement of water will be made in emergency like separate Municipal staff
tube well or water tank.
Proper training of firefighting will be provided to the staff recruited.
Personal protective equipment will be provided to the staff to follow
health and safety standards
A new and proper equipped vehicle will be purchased.
Relevant mitigation measures will be included in all contract/bidding
documents
44
5.3 ESMP Monitoring Plan

85. The purpose of environmental and social monitoring is to ensure the effective implementation of
the ESMP, particularly the environmental and social mitigation measures. Monitoring will be
carried out at two tiers. At the first tier, the ESFPs of the LG&RDD will carry out monitoring
during their routine visits to the field, with the help of visual observations and discussions with
the communities/beneficiaries and other stakeholders. ESFPs will report to the Environment and
Social Specialists of the TPMU on compliance and non-compliance of ESMP. At the second tier,
the Environment and Social Specialists of TPMU will be responsible for the overall supervision
and monitoring with the help of spot checks during their regular field visits. Monitoring
checklists will be prepared on the basis of the environmental and social mitigation measures and
will be used for the environmental and social monitoring described above.
86. In view of the difficulties in access to the Project area, it is recommended that the use of hi-tech
equipment such as GPS, mobile phones with GPRS facility, and digital camera is maximized in
obtaining, recording, processing, and disseminating the baseline and monitoring data collected in
the field. Furthermore, satellite imagery and geographical information system (GIS) should also
be used to document and process the field data.
87. Third Party Monitoring/Annual Environmental and Social Audit: In addition to the
monitoring described above, an outside agency (an independent consultant/firm) will carry out the
third party monitoring/annual environmental and social audit The objective of this monitoring
would be to review the compliance of ESMP and its effectiveness on an ongoing basis, to identify
any environmental and/or social issues of non-compliance caused by the sub-projects that may
exist on ground, and to frame recommendations to improve ESMP compliance.
5.4 Training Plan

88. The objectives of environmental and social trainings include providing basic knowledge and
information on the key environmental and social issues associated with the proposed sub-projects
to the key project personnel, safeguard staff including the ESFPs of line agencies. The training
plan is presented in Table 5.11. The PMUs Environment and Social Specialists will be
responsible for the implementation of this plan.
45
Table 5.11: Environmental and Social Training Plan
Description Aspects to be Covered Participants Frequency
Environmental and social Environmental and social PMU, Line At the start of the project;
orientation awareness; Directorates Afterwards as required
Key environmental and
social issues associated with
project
ESA findings;
ESMP and its components;
ESMP implementation.
ESMP implementation ESMP components ESFPs At the start of the project;
Environmental and Social Afterwards as required
Mitigation Plans;
Environmental Monitoring;
Documentation and
reporting
Environmental and social Environmental and Social All the stakeholders On-going/informal
management Mitigation Plans;
Waste disposal;
Importance of safe drinking
water;
Personal hygiene;
Water conservation;
Prevention and cure of
diseases such as malaria and
dengue.
5.5 Documentation and Reporting

89. Complete documentation will be maintained for the entire ESMP implementation process. This
will include the following:
Environment and social mitigation measures will be implemented by the contractors
Environmental and social mitigation checklists to be filled by the ESFPs of line directorates,
Environmental and social monitoring checklists verified by Environment and Social
Specialists of TPMU,
Visit reports with photographs prepared by the ESFPs and TPMU safeguard staff,
Training reports prepared by TPMUs safegarud staff ,
AIU quarterly reports on ESMP implementation activities prepared by ESFP,
Quarterly reports on overall ESMP implementation of the project, to be prepared by the
TPMU safeguard staff on the basis of the AIUs quarterly reports described above including
GPS and GIS data,
Third party monitoring and evaluation will be carried out on annual basis and 6 months
before the completion of FUCP, to address any outstanding issues before closure of the
project.
ESMP implementation report for the entire duration of the project to be prepared by TPMU
safeguard staff as a part of project completion report.
46
Copmlete record of health and safety will be maintained including quarterly report of
accidents, if any.
Sample reporting format is given in Annex I which will be customised for the project.
The project will compile a report on the basis of the filled scheme siting checklist given in
Annex H on an annual basis and share it with the World Bank.
Project Director of the TPMU will have overall responsiblity for the above documentation and
reporting. These reports will be shared with the Bank and other stakeholders on a regular basis
for review and comments.
5.6 Disclosure Requirements

90. After clearance of ESMP by the Bank, ESMP will be shared with all relevant agencies, line
directorates, concerned indigenous/community organizations and general public of Khar city.
Subsequently, it will be disclosed in Urdu and English by the FATA Secretariat, and also made
available at the websites of FATA Secretariat and project specific website. Copies of ESMP will
also be sent to Federal and or KP EPAs and civil society organizations. It will also be made
available at the project specific World Banks InfoShop.
5.7 ESMP Implementation Cost

91. The cost of ESMP implementation over the project three years duration has been estimated to be
PKR 5.1 million. . The breakdown of this estimate is provided below.
Table 5.12: ESMP Implementation Budget

Description Cost (PKR m) Notes/basis
Cost of TPMU safegaurd staff Salary cost of TPMU safeguard staff
is already included in establishment
cost of FUCP.
Third party monitoring/annual 1.26 The cost of this activity will be born
Environmental and Social audit by componenet II of the project.
Hiring of short term consultant for 1.44 At critical stages of ESMP
ESMP implementation implementation
Trainings 2.0 Actual cost estimates will be given
later.
Miscellaneous 0.4 For unforseen expenses
Total (for 3 years) 5.1
47
Annex A
National Environmental Quality Standards
The National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS), promulgated under the PEPA 1997, specify
the following standards:
Maximum allowable concentration of pollutants in gaseous emissions from industrial sources,
Maximum allowable concentration of pollutants in municipal and liquid industrial effluents
discharged to inland waters, sewage treatment and sea (three separate set of numbers).
Maximum allowable emissions from motor vehicles.
Ambient air quality standards.
Drinking water standards
Noise standards.
The above NEQSs are presented in Tables A.1 to A.6 below. Only a few of these standards will be
applicable to the gaseous emissions and liquid effluents discharged to the environment from the
activities under the proposed project.
Table A.1: Selected NEQS for Waste Effluents
Parameter Unit Standards (maximum
allowable limit)
Temperature increase C <3
pH value (acidity/basicity) pH 6-9
5-day biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) mg/l 80
at 20 C
Chemical oxygen demand (COD) mg/l 150
Total suspended solids mg/l 200
Total dissolved solids mg/l 3,500
Grease and oil mg/l 10
Phenolic compounds (as phenol) mg/l 0.1
Chloride (as Cl) mg/l 1,000
Fluoride (as F) mg/l 10
Sulfate (SO4) mg/l 600
Sulfide (S) mg/l 1.0
Ammonia (NH3) mg/l 40
Cadmium mg/l 0.1
Chromium (trivalent and hexavalent) mg/l 1.0
Copper mg/l 1.0
Lead mg/l 0.5
Mercury mg/l 0.01
Selenium mg/l 0.5
Nickel mg/l 1.0
Silver mg/l 1.0
Total toxic metals mg/l 2.0
Zinc mg/l 5
Arsenic mg/l 1.0
Barium mg/l 1.5
Iron mg/l 8.0
Manganese mg/l 1.5
Boron mg/l 6.0
Chlorine mg/l 1.0
Notes:
48
1. The standard assumes that dilution of 1:10 on discharge is available. That is, for each cubic meter of
treated effluent, the recipient water body should have 10 m3 of water for dilution of this effluent.
2. Toxic metals include cadmium, chromium, copper, lead, mercury, selenium, nickel and silver. The effluent
should meet the individual standards for these metals as well as the standard for total toxic metal
concentration.
Source: Government of Pakistan (2000) (SRO 549 (I)/2000).
Table A.2: NEQS for Industrial Gaseous Emissions

mg/Nm3 unless otherwise stated
Standards
Parameter Source of Emission (maximum allowable
limit)
Smoke Smoke opacity not to exceed 40% or 2 Ringlemann Scale or
equivalent smoke number
Particulate matter 1 (a) Boilers and furnaces:
i. Oil fired 300
ii. Coal fired 500
iii. Cement Kilns 300
(b) Grinding, crushing, clinker coolers 500
and related processes, metallurgical
processes, converters, blast furnaces
and cupolas
Hydrogen Chloride Any 400
Chlorine Any 150

Hydrogen fluoride Any 150
Hydrogen sulphide Any 10
Sulphur Oxides 2, 3 Sulfuric acid/Sulphonic acid plants 5,000
Other Plants except power Plants 1,700

operating on oil and coal
Carbon Monoxide Any 800
Lead Any 50
Mercury Any 10
Cadmium Any 20
Arsenic Any 20
Copper Any 50
Antimony Any 20
Zinc Any 200
Oxides of Nitrogen 3 Nitric acid manufacturing unit 3,000
Other plants except power plants

operating on oil or coal:
i. Gas fired 400
ii. Oil fired 600
iii. Coal fired 1,200
Notes:
1. Based on the assumption that the size of the particulate is 10 micron or more.
2. Based on 1% sulphur content in fuel oil. Higher content of sulphur will cause standards to be pro-rated.
3. In respect of emissions of sulphur dioxide and nitrogen oxides, the power plants operating on oil and coal as
fuel shall in addition to NEQS specified above, comply with the standards provided separately.
49
Table A.3: National Environmental Quality Standards for Ambient Air 1
Time- Concentration in Ambient Air
Pollutants weighted Effective from Effective from Method of Measurement
Average 1st July 2010 1st January 2013
Sulfur Annual 80 g/m3 80 g/m3 Ultraviolet Fluorescence
Dioxide Average*
(SO2) 24 hours** 120 g/m3 120 g/m3
Oxides of Annual 40 g/m3 40 g/m3 Gas Phase Chemiluminescence

Nitrogen as Average*
(NO) 24 hours** 40 g/m3 40 g/m3
Oxides of Annual 40 g/m3 40 g/m3 Gas Phase Chemiluminescence

Nitrogen as Average*
(NO2) 24 hours** 80 g/m3 80 g/m3
Ozone (O3) 1 hour 180 g/m3 130 g/m3 Non dispersive UV

absorption
Suspended Annual 400 g/m3 360 g/m3 High Volume Sampling,
Particulate Average* (Average flow rate not less
Matter 24 hours** 550 g/m3 500 g/m3 than1.1 m3/minute).
(SPM)
Respirable Annual 200 g/m3 120 g/m3 Ray absorption
Particulate Average*
Matter. 24 hours** 250 g/m3 150 g/m3
PM10
Respirable Annual 25 g/m3 15 g/m3 Ray absorption

Particulate Average*
Matter. 24 hours** 40 g/m3 35 g/m3
PM2.5
1 hour 25 g/m3 15 g/m3
Lead (Pb) Annual 1.5 g/m3 1.0 g/m3 ASS Method after sampling
Average* using EPM 2000 or equivalent
24 hours** 2.0 g/m3 1.5 g/m3 Filter paper
Carbon 8 hours** 5 mg/m3 5 mg/m3 Non Dispersive Infra Red
Monoxide (NDIR)
(CO) 1 hour 10 mg/m3 10 mg/m3
*Annual arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year taken twice a week 24 hourly at
uniform interval.
** 24 hourly /8 hourly values should be met 98% of the in a year. 2% of the time, it may exceed but
not on two consecutive days.
1
Full text of the Standards is available at the Pak-EPA website: (http://www.environment.gov.pk/info.htm).
50
Table A.4: NEQS for Motor Vehicles Exhaust and Noise2
a) For In-Use Vehicles
Standard
Parameter (Maximum Measuring Method Applicability
Permissible Limit)
1 Smoke 40% or 2 on the To be compared with Immediate
Ringlemann Scale Ringlemann Chart at a effect
during engine distance 6 or more. r
acceleration mode.
2 Carbon 6% Under idling conditions:

Monoxide Non-dispersive infrared
detection through gas
analyzer.
3 Noise 85 db (A). Sound meter at 7.5 meters
from the source.
b) For New Vehicles

i. For Passenger Cars and Light Commercial Diesel Vehicles (g/Km)
Type of HC+ Measuring Applicabilit
Category/Class Tiers CO PM
Vehicle NOx Method y
Passenger M 1: with Pak-II 1.0 0.70 0.08 NEDC i. All
Cars reference mass IDI 0 (ECE 15+ imported
(RW) up to EUDCL) and local
2500 kg. Cars manufacture
with RW over 1.0 d diesel
2500 kg to meet Pak-II DI 0.90 0.10 vehicles
0
NI category with effect
standards. from 01-07-
Light NI-I (RW<1250 Pak-II 1.00 0.70 0.08 2012
Commercial kg) IDI
Vehicles Pak-II DI 1.00 0.90 0.10
NI-II (1250 kg< Pak-II 1.25 1.00 0.12
RW <1700 kg0 IDI
Pak-II DI 1.25 1.30 0.14
NI-III Pak-II 1.50 1.20 0.17
(RW>1700 kg) IDI
Pak-II DI 1.50 1.60 0.20
Parameter Standard (maximum permissible limit) Measuring Method
Noise 85 db (A) Sound meter at 7.5 meters from the

source.
2
Full text of the NEQS is available at the Pak-EPA website: (http://www.environment.gov.pk/info.htm).
51
(ii) For Heavy Duty Diesel Engines and Large Goods Vehicles (g/Kwh)
Type of Category / Measuring

Tiers CO HC NOx PM Applicability
Vehicle Class Method
Heavy Duty Trucks and Pak- 4.0 1.1 7.0 0.15 ECE-R-49 All Imported
Diesel Buses II and local
Engines manufactured
diesel vehicles
with the effect
1-7-2012
Large goods N2 (2000 and Pak- 4.0 7.0 1.10 0.15 EDC
Vehicles up II
Parameter Standard (maximum permissible limit) Measuring Method
Noise 85 db (A) Sound meter at 7.5 meters from the
source.
(iii) Emission Standards for Petrol Vehicles (g/km)
Type of HC+ Measuring

Category / Class Tiers CO Applicability
Vehicle NOx Method
Passenger M 1: With reference Pak-II 2.20 0.50 NEDC All imported and
mass (RW) up to (ECE 15 + new models*
2500 kg. Cars with EUDCL) locally
RW over 2500 kg. to manufactured
meet N1 category petrol vehicles
standards with effect from 1st
Light N1-I (RW<1250 kg) Pak-II 2.20 0.50 July, 2009**
Commercial
Vehicles N1-II (1250 kg>RW Pak-II 4.00 0.65
<1700 kg)
N1-III (RW>1700 Pak-II 5.00 0.80
kg)
Motor 2.4 strokes <150 cc Pak-II 5.50 1.50 ECER 40
Rickshaws
and motor 2.4 strokes>150 cc Pak-II 5.50 1.30
Cycles
Parameters Standard (maximum permissible limit) Measuring Method
Noise 85 db (A) Sound meter at 7.5 meters
from the source
Explanations:
DI: Direct Injection
IDI: Indirect Injection
EUDCL: Extra Urban Driving Cycle
NEDC: New Urban Driving Cycle
Vehicles designed and constructed for the carriage of passengers and comprising no
M:
more than eight seats in addition to the driver's seat
N: Motor vehicles with at least four wheels designed and constructed for the carriage of goods.
* New model means both model and engine type change
The existing models of petrol driven vehicles locally manufactured will immediately switch
**
ever to Pak-II emission standards but not later than 30th June, 2012
Source: Government of Pakistan (2009) (SRO 72 (KE)/2009).
Table A.5: National Standards for Drinking Water Quality3
Properties/Parameters Standard Values for Pakistan
3
52
Properties/Parameters Standard Values for Pakistan
Bacterial
All water intended for drinking (E. Coli or Must not be detectable in any 100 ml samples
Thermotolerant Coliform bacteria)
Treated water entering the distribution system Must not be detectable in any 100 ml samples
(E.Coli or thermotolerant coliform and total
coliform bacteria)
Treated water in the distribution system (E.Coli or Must not be detectable in any 100 ml samples
thermo tolerant coliform and total coliform In case of large supplies, where sufficient samples
bacteria) are examined, must not be present in 95% of the
samples taken throughout any 12- month period.
Physical
Color 15 TCU
Taste Non objectionable/Accept able
Odor Non objectionable/Accept able
Turbidity < 5 NTU
Total hardness as CaCO3 < 500 mg/l
TDS < 1000
pH 6.5 8.5
Chemical
Essential Inorganic mg/Litre
Aluminum (Al) 0.2
Antimony (Sb) 0.005 (P)
Arsenic (As) 0.05 (P)
Barium (Ba) 0.7
Boron (B) 0.3
Cadmium (Cd) 0.01
Chloride (Cl) <250
Chromium (Cr) 0.05
Copper (Cu) 2
Toxic Inorganic mg/Litre
Cyanide (Cn) 0.05
Fluoride (F)* 1.5
Lead (Pb) 0.05
Manganese (Mn) 0.5
Mercury (Hg) 0.001
Nickel (Ni) 0.02
Nitrate (NO3)* 50
Nitrite (NO2)* 3 (P)
Selenium (Se) 0.01 (P)
Residual chlorine 0.2-0.5 at consumer end; 0.5-1.5 at source
Zinc (Zn) 5.0
Organic
Pesticides mg/l PSQCA No. 4639-2004, Page No. 4 Table No. 3
Serial No. 20- 58 may be consulted.**
Phenolic compound (as phenols) mg/l WHO standards: 0.002
Polynuclear Aromatic hydrocarbon (as PAH) g/L WHO standards: 0.01v(by GC/MS method)
Radioactive
Alpha Emitters bq/L or pCi 0.1
Beta Emitters 1
* indicates priority health related inorganic constituents which need regular monitoring.
** PSQCA: Pakistan Standards Quality Control Authority.
Source: Government of Pakistan (2010) (SRO 1063(I)/2010).
53
Table A.6: National Environmental Quality Standards for Noise 4

Limit in dB(A) Leq *
Category of Effective from 1st July 2010 Effective from 1st July 2012
Area/Zone Day time Night time Day time Night time
Residential area 65 50 55 45
Commercial area 70 60 65 55
Industrial area 80 75 75 65
Silence zone 55 45 50 45
Notes:
1. Day time hours: 6:00 a.m. to 10:00 p.m.
2. Night time hours: 10:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m.
3. Silence zone::Zones that are declared as such by the competent authority. An area comprising not less than
100 m around the hospitals, educational institutions, and courts.
4. Mixed categories of areas may be declared as one of the four above-listed categories by the competent
authority.
* dB(A) Leq: Time weighted average of the level of sound in decibels on Scale A which is relatable to human
hearing.
Source: Government of Pakistan (2010) (SRO 1064(I)/2010)
.
4
54
Annex B
Process to be followed for Purchase of Land by Government
1. The tribal agencies are administered through Political Agents who serve as intermediaries
between the Government and the people. A limited form of local self-governance is in place;
FATA has been kept excluded from the legislative regime prevailing in rest of the country. The
tribal areas are governed primarily through the Frontier Crimes Regulation 1901, a procedural law
distinct from the criminal and civil codes operative elsewhere in the country. Though some
reforms have been introduced in FATA recently, these reforms are primarily based on two
significant legal and political dispensations i.e. Frontier Crimes (Amendments) Regulation 2011
and Extension of Political Parties Order 2002 to FATA.
2. The details of these reforms are as under:

Establishment of FCR Tribunal
Frontier Crimes (Amendments) Regulation 2011
Extension of Political Parties Order 2002
Improvements in the system of Political Administration and Establishment of Levy in
FATA
Due to these developments, the Administration in FATA has synchronized their dynamics
to ensure their full impact on the tribal societies and their mainstreaming with the rest of
the country.
3. As no law/legislation exists in FATA to acquire land or lease out land or property, the current
practice for purchase of land by the Government Departments is as under:
The concerned government Directorate approaches the Political Administration (in
writing) stating that a piece of land is required for a particular purpose in a certain area.
The Political Administration finds a suitable piece of land to be purchased.
The Political Administration assesses the value of land with the help of a designated
committee comprising of local elders, keeping in view the market value.
The land owner is called and asked if he is willing to sell the land to the government. If he
is willing, a rate is negotiated with him; otherwise some other land is identified.
The land map and other documents are prepared by the concerned revenue officer
(Tehsildar).
The Department pays the amount to the land owner through the Political Administration.
An agreement is signed on a stamp paper and endorsed by the Political Administration
55
Annex C
Safeguards Procedures for Inclusion in Technical Specifications of Contracts
I. General
1. The Contractor and his employees shall adhere to the mitigation measures set down in ESMP
and take also all other measures required by the Engineer(s) to prevent social and economic harms,
and to minimize the impact of his operations on the environment.
2. The Contractor shall not be permitted to unnecessarily strip clear the right of way. The
Contractor shall only clear the minimum width for construction and diversion roads should not be
constructed alongside the existing road.
3. Remedial actions which cannot be effectively carried out during construction should be
carried out on completion of each Section of the road (earthworks, pavement and drainage) and
before issuance of the Taking Over Certificate:
(a) these sections should be landscaped and any necessary remedial works should be
undertaken without delay, including grassing and reforestation;
(b) water courses should be cleared of debris and drains and culverts checked for clear flow
paths; and
(c) borrow pits should be dressed as fish ponds, or drained and made safe, as agreed with the
land owner.
4. The Contractor shall limit construction works to between 6 am and 7 pm if it is to be carried
out in or near residential areas.
5. The Contractor shall avoid the use of heavy or noisy equipment in specified areas at night, or
in sensitive areas such as near a hospital.
6. To prevent dust pollution during dry periods, the Contractor shall carry out regular watering
of earth and gravel haul roads and shall cover material haulage trucks with tarpaulins to prevent
spillage.
II. Transport
7. The Contractor shall use selected routes to the project site, as agreed with the Engineer, and
appropriately sized vehicles suitable to the class of road, and shall restrict loads to prevent damage to
roads and bridges used for transportation purposes. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any
damage caused to the roads and bridges due to the transportation of excessive loads, and shall be
required to repair such damage to the approval of the Engineer.
8. The Contractor shall not use any vehicles, either on or off road with grossly excessive,
exhaust or noise emissions. In any built up areas, noise mufflers shall be installed and maintained in
good condition on all motorized equipment under the control of the Contractor.
9. Adequate traffic control measures shall be maintained by the Contractor throughout the
duration of the Contract and such measures shall be subject to prior approval of the Engineer.
III. Workforce
56
10. The Contractor should whenever possible locally recruit the majority of the workforce and
shall provide appropriate training as necessary.
11. The Contractor shall install and maintain a temporary septic tank system for any residential
labor camp and without causing pollution of nearby watercourses.
12. The Contractor shall establish a method and system for storing and disposing of all solid
wastes generated by the labor camp and/or base camp.
13. The Contractor shall not allow the use of fuel wood for cooking or heating in any labor camp
or base camp and provide alternate facilities using other fuels.
14. The Contractor shall ensure that site offices, depots, asphalt plants and workshops are located
in appropriate areas as approved by the Engineer and not within 500 meters of existing residential
settlements and not within 1,000 meters for asphalt plants.
15. The Contractor shall ensure that site offices, depots and particularly storage areas for diesel
fuel and bitumen and asphalt plants are not located within 500 meters of watercourses, and are
operated so that no pollutants enter watercourses, either overland or through groundwater seepage,
especially during periods of rain. This will require lubricants to be recycled and a ditch to be
constructed around the area with an approved settling pond/oil trap at the outlet.
16. The contractor shall not use fuelwood as a means of heating during the processing or
preparation of any materials forming part of the Works.
IV. Quarries and Borrow Pits
17. Operation of a new borrow area, on land, in a river, or in an existing area, shall be subject to
prior approval of the Engineer, and the operation shall cease if so instructed by the Engineer. Borrow
pits shall be prohibited where they might interfere with the natural or designed drainage patterns.
River locations shall be prohibited if they might undermine or damage the river banks, or carry too
much fine material downstream.
18. The Contractor shall ensure that all borrow pits used are left in a trim and tidy condition with
stable side slopes, and are drained ensuring that no stagnant water bodies are created which could
breed mosquitoes.
19. Rock or gravel taken from a river shall be far enough removed to limit the depth of material
removed to one-tenth of the width of the river at any one location, and not to disrupt the river flow, or
damage or undermine the river banks.
20. The location of crushing plants shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer, and not be
close to environmentally sensitive areas or to existing residential settlements, and shall be operated
with approved fitted dust control devices.
V. Earthworks
21. Earthworks shall be properly controlled, especially during the rainy season.
22. The Contractor shall maintain stable cut and fill slopes at all times and cause the least
possible disturbance to areas outside the prescribed limits of the work.
57
23. The Contractor shall complete cut and fill operations to final cross-sections at any one
location as soon as possible and preferably in one continuous operation to avoid partially completed
earthworks, especially during the rainy season.
24. In order to protect any cut or fill slopes from erosion, in accordance with the drawings, cut off
drains and toe-drains shall be provided at the top and bottom of slopes and be planted with grass or
other plant cover. Cut off drains should be provided above high cuts to minimize water runoff and
slope erosion.
25. Any excavated cut or unsuitable material shall be disposed of in designated tipping areas as
agreed to by the Engineer.
26. Tips should not be located where they can cause future slides, interfere with agricultural land
or any other properties, or cause soil from the dump to be washed into any watercourse. Drains may
need to be dug within and around the tips, as directed by the Engineer.
VII. Disposal of Construction and Vehicle Waste
28. Debris generated due to the dismantling of the existing structures shall be suitably reused, to
the extent feasible, in the proposed construction (e.g. as fill materials for embankments). The disposal
of remaining debris shall be carried out only at sites identified and approved by the project engineer.
The contractor should ensure that these sites (a) are not located within designated forest areas; (b) do
not impact natural drainage courses; and (c) do not impact endangered/rare flora. Under no
circumstances shall the contractor dispose of any material in environmentally sensitive areas.
29. In the event any debris or silt from the sites is deposited on adjacent land, the Contractor shall
immediately remove such, debris or silt and restore the affected area to its original state to the
satisfaction of the Supervisor/Engineer.
30. Bentonite slurry or similar debris generated from pile driving or other construction activities
shall be disposed of to avoid overflow into the surface water bodies or form mud puddles in the area.
31. All arrangements for transportation during construction including provision, maintenance,
dismantling and clearing debris, where necessary, will be considered incidental to the work and
should be planned and implemented by the contractor as approved and directed by the Engineer.
32. Vehicle/machinery and equipment operations, maintenance and refueling shall be carried out
to avoid spillage of fuels and lubricants and ground contamination. An 'oil interceptor" will be
provided for wash down and refueling areas. Fuel storage shall be located in proper bunded areas.
33. All spills and collected petroleum products shall be disposed of in accordance with standard
environmental procedures/guidelines. Fuel storage and refilling areas shall be located at least 300m
from all cross drainage structures and important water bodies or as directed by the Engineer.
VIII. HIV/AIDS Education
34. The Contractor shall ensure that detection screening of sexually transmitted diseases,
especially with regard to HIV/AIDS, amongst laborers is actually carried out and will submit a
certificate of compliance.
IX Local Norms and cultural Values
58
The contractor will observe local norms and cultural values of the local communities to avoid
any potential conflicts.
X Security to Employees
The contractor will be responsible for providing security to its staff and labor.
59
Annex D:
Grievance Redressal Mechanism/Complaint Handling System for FUCP
1. Any person/stakeholder especially beneficiaries have a right to seek queries or file a

complaint about the activities carried out under the project. Grievance Redressal Mechanism
(GRM) will allow a complainant to address any disagreeable decision, practice or activity arising
from and/or non-compliance of ESMP and safeguards or any other issue related to the
project/services. In order to ensure that queries/complaints/grievances are addressed in a timely
and satisfactory manner, a localized GRM has been established for newly established Municipal
Committee Khar and FATA Urban Centers Project. The Project Director, TPMU will be
responsible for the compliance of GRM under the project, through the Assistant Director,
LG&RDD who is based at MC Khar and has been designated as a focal point to receive and
provide response to queries and complaints. A Grievance Redressal Committee (GRC) has been
constituted for major grievances, headed by the Additional Political Agent Bajaur. Other
committee members include Project Director TPMU, Assistant Director LG&RDD, and Social
Safeguards Specialist TPMU, who will work as Secretary of the GRC. Detailed mechanism of
GRM has been given in Table-1.
2. All stakeholders will be fully informed of their rights to seek information, queries and
registering complaints, verbally or in-writing during the project period. Information about GRM
will be disseminated through bill-boards at entry and exit points of Khar city, advertised in
newspapers and announced on radio. Care will always be taken to prevent grievances through
careful implementation of the project, and by ensuring full consultation and participation of the
stakeholders, and establishing extensive communication and coordination between the TPMU, the
LG&RDD, Political Administration, contractor(s) and supervision consultants. Efforts will be
made to settle the complaints/issues at the AD LG&RDD; else all possible attempts will be made
to resolve the complaints at the level of Additional Political Agent and GRC to minimize
litigation. All complaints and their redressal will be properly documented by the TPMU through
the GRC Secretary, and will be available for review, monitoring and evaluation purposes. The
GRM will also be displayed on the FUCP and FATA Secretariat websites; TPMU will update the
status of actions taken on the FATA Secretariat website. Other channels will involve direct
complaint to the Focal Point; calling on toll-free hotline (0800), verbal or in writing. These
channels will also provide an opportunity to tribal women to seek information or register their
grievances as per their convenience.
3. The detail of query/complaint uptake channels is given below:

a) Direct Complaint to Focal Point
Beneficiaries and other stakeholders can directly visit the office of AD-LG&RD Khar,
Bajaur and record grievance in the register maintained by Focal Point. The complainant will
provide complete information i.e. detail of grievance with name of complaint, address, NICN
and contact number, if any.
b) Toll-free Hotline (0800)
60
Toll-free hotline number will be available for this purpose. This channel of interaction will
also provide an opportunity to tribal women to register their grievances in an easy manner.
c) Written Queries/feedback/Complaints
Any person/stakeholder can write to the Focal Point regarding any queries, suggestion,
feedback or grievance.
4. The grievances are mainly classified in two types; the one which are related to FUCP
interventions/investments and the other that are linked to other services (health, education etc) in
MC Khar. The grievance associated to FUCP will be entertained by AD-LG&RDD while the
grievances about other services, which do not come under his mandate/jurisdiction, will be
referred to Additional Political Agent.
TABLE-1: Step-by-Step Grievance Redress Mechanism /Complaint Handling System
Step-1 AD-LG&RDD will act as Focal Point for the GRM; any person/stakeholder can provide feedback
and suggestion to the Focal Point. Aggrieved persons/parties will lodge verbal or written complaints
to AD-LG&RDD. He will address them by providing simple explanation or apology within 3 days
after receipt of query/complaint.
Step-2 In case of major complaint that involve more than one party to resolve, need enquiry to be conducted
to determine its legitimacy and need consultation with project staff, contractor or supervision
consultants or any other party. The AD-LG&RDD will conduct an enquiry to confirm its legitimacy
within a period of five working days and redress it by ensuring remedial actions and will also seek
satisfaction note from the complainant. Complainant(s) will be informed in writing on the actions
taken to resolve the complaint. If AD-LG&RDD fails to do so, he will forward complaint with his
findings and recommendations to the Additional Political Agent (APA) of Bajaur Agency for
appropriate action.
Step-3 Additional Political Agent will redress it within 7 working days and may conduct enquiry through a
third party who do not have stake in it. Complainant will be informed in writing on the actions taken
to resolve the complaint. If APA fails to do so in 7 working days, he will forward this complaint to
the members of GRC. TPMU will also send a copy of project related such complaints to the Bank.
Step-4 A GRC meeting will be convened within 5 working days after receipt of complaint, GRC can ask to
Social Specialist for fact finding. APA/PD-TPMU will direct concerned person/section to take
specific actions to redress the grievance through a written letter.
Step-5 The concerned person/section will take actions to resolve the complaint and inform the complainant,
in writing, and also seek his satisfaction on the redressal. A copy of letter will also be shared with the
Bank.
Step-6 TPMU will report a summary of complaints with actions taken in quarterly progress reports of the
project.
61
Flow-Chart of GRM:
Complainant AD-LG&RDD
Compliance Additional
Report submitted Politiical Agent
Refer to
concerned GR Committee
section
Monitoring and Evaluation:
5. GRM will also be monitored and evaluated to ensure its success. Monitoring will assess the
extent to which progress made to respond to queries or resolve complaints. Evaluation will
analyze grievance data and will use to make policy and/or process changes to minimize similar
grievances in the future. TPMU will develop a database with number and nature of complaints
with actions taken. Project management will regularly review monitoring and evaluation data on
GRM.
62
Annex E
Land Acquisition and Resettlement Screening Checklist
Name of Enumerator:_____________________________ Date: _________________

Province:_________ District:___________ Project:___________ Sector:___________
Project Categorization: A B C
1 Potential Impacts Yes No Expected Remarks

Does the sub-project involve any physical construction work, i.e.
rehabilitation, reconstruction or new construction? Specify in
remarks column.
2 Will the sub-project need to acquire land? If yes, fill the following)
A Size of land to be acquired
Ownership
Government
Private
Public
B Type of land acquisition
Voluntary donation (No. of people donating and how much per
person)
Purchase from market on willing-buyer, willing-seller basis
Government or state owned land free of occupation (agriculture or
settlement)
C Type of land to be acquired
Unused/vacant
Residential
Commercial
Agriculture
Others (specify in remarks).
D Land-based assets:
Residential structures
Commercial structures (specify in remarks)
Community structures (specify in remarks)
Agriculture structures (specify in remarks)
Public utilities (specify in remarks)
Others (specify in remarks)
E Agriculture related impacts
Crops and vegetables (specify types and cropping area in
remarks).
Trees (specify number and types in remarks).
Others (specify in remarks).
F Affected Persons (DPs)
Number of DPs
Males
Females
Titled land owners
Tenants and sharecroppers
63
1 Potential Impacts Yes No Expected Remarks

Leaseholders
Agriculture wage laborers
Encroachers and squatters (specify in remarks column).
Vulnerable people (e.g. women headed households, minors
and aged, orphans, disabled persons and those below the
poverty line). Specify the number and vulnerability in
remarks.
Others (specify in remarks)
Others (specify in remarks.
Are there any indigenous or other minority groups affected by land
acquisition or project activities? If Yes check the following items
Indigenous groups (specify groups in remarks). Describe
nature of impacts
Minority groups (specify in remarks). Describe nature of
impacts
Are there are religious or culturally significant sites on land used
for the sub-project?
If yes, then describe in remarks column
64
Annex F
FUCP - Format to Document Voluntary Land Donation
The following agreement has been made on............................ day of.....................
between...............................................resident of .................................. .......................(the Owner)
and .(the Recipient).
1. That the Owner holds the transferable right of ........................hectares of

land/structure/asset in..........
2. That the Owner testifies that the land/structure is free of squatters or encroachers and not
subject to other claims.
3. That, to the best of his knowledge, there are no other lawful claimants to the property
4. That he/she does not have tenants on the property.
5. That the Owner hereby voluntarily donates to the Recipient this asset for the construction and
development of ............................................for the benefit of the villagers and the public at large.
6. That the Owner affirms that he donates the land freely and under no coercion from any party.
7. That the Owner will not claim any compensation against the grant of this asset.
8. That the Recipient shall construct and develop the...and take all possible precautions
to avoid damage to adjacent land/structure/other assets.
9. That both the parties agree that theso constructed/developed shall be public
premises.
10. That the provisions of this agreement will come into force from the date of signing of this deed.
11. That the owner gives up all claims to the land donated and the title to the land will be
transferred to the recipient through notary public.
___________________ _____________________
Signature of the Owner Signature of the Recipient
Witnesses:
1. __________________Village or Tribal Head___________
2. -------------------------------------Adjacent land owner

(Signature, name and address)
65
Annex G
FUCP - Approach to Voluntary Land Donation under the Project
1. No involuntary land acquisition and resettlement is expected to take place for this Project. Where
land is required for schemes, options for land acquisition to be considered for the project include
the following:
(i) voluntary land donation
(ii) land bought from the market on a willing buyer and willing seller basis. (This is described
in detail in Annex B)
2. Where Voluntary Land Donation (VLD) is undertaken, the Project will include measures to
ensure that VLD is:
(i) Beneficial for all and not just a few households/social groups
(ii) Truly voluntary and not a result of coercion or any other influence brought to bear on
the owners.
3. In order to ensure that VLD is beneficial to the largest number of households, the project will
ensure that a range of sites are considered for donation as schemes are identified through a
participatory process. Possible locations will be discussed with the community and a final
decision will be reached collaboratively. Where land is acquired, a screening will be done to
ensure that no involuntary acquisition and resettlement takes place (Annex E). Once land is
identified for voluntary donation, a form will be signed by the person/persons donating it.
4. VLD Procedure, Record Keeping and Verification: (i) certification of no-dispute on the land
and (ii) any form of document showing ownership of the land. Additionally, the Format to
Document Voluntary Land Donation form in will be signed by at least two people in addition to
the landowner. This will include (i) the Village or Tribe Head and (ii) one adjoining neighbor.
The PMU will maintain a detailed record of land donation under the project and register a transfer
of land within six months of scheme approval.
5. Grievance Redress Mechanism: The Project will include a Grievance Redress Mechanism
which will be widely communicated to communities during the social mobilization and scheme
identification phase. A simple system of lodging complaints will be outlined by the and the
Grievance Review Committee will make a final decision on complaints after thorough
investigation. A feedback mechanism will be outlined in the Grievance Redress Mechanism to
ensure that the complainant receives a response on the matter within the stipulated time line.
6. Monitoring: An independent entity will be tasked each year in the project to draw a random
sample of projects in which VLD has taken place and evaluate if the donation has been truly
voluntary. The findings will be presented to the Project Management together with identification
of problem areas, if any.
66
Annex H
Checklist for Scheme Siting
Dont
Issues Yes No Mitigation Measures
Know
1 Does the subproject require land acquisition?
[Note: Fill in the land acquisition form if YES]
2 Will the subproject negatively impact
livelihoods [Note: Describe separately if YES]
3 Is the sub project located on land with
contested ownership?
4 Is the sub project located in an area with
security problems
5 Is the sub projected located on land reclaimed
from floods ( the ownership here may be
contested)
6 Is the subproject located in an area with
designated natural reserves?
7 Is the subproject located in an area with unique
natural features?
endangered or conservation-worthy
ecosystems, fauna or flora?
9 Is the subproject located in an area falling
within 500 meters of national forests, protected
areas, wilderness areas, wetlands, biodiversity,
critical habitats, or sites of historical or cultural
importance?
10 Is the subproject located in an area which
would create a barrier for the movement of
conservation-worthy wildlife or livestock?
11 Is the subproject located close to groundwater
sources, surface water bodies, water courses or
wetlands?
designated cultural properties such as
archaeological, historical and/or religious
sites?
13 Is the subproject in an area with religious
monuments, structures and/or cemeteries?
14 Is the project located in an area from where

people have been displaced?
15 Is the project located in an area where IDPs are

temporarily settled?
16 Is the project in a politically sensitive area?
17 Is the subproject in a polluted or contaminated

area?
67
18 Is the subproject located in an area of high

visual and landscape quality?
19 Is the subproject located in an area susceptible

to landslides or erosion?
20 Is the subproject located in an area of seismic

faults?
21 Is the subproject located in a densely populated

area?
22 Is the subproject located on prime agricultural

land?
23 Is the subproject located in an area of tourist

importance?
24 Is the subproject located near a waste dump?
25 Does the subproject have access to potable

water?
26 Is the subproject located far (1-2 kms) from

accessible roads?
27 Is the subproject located in an area with a

wastewater network?
28 Is the subproject located in the urban plan of

the city?
29 Is the subproject located outside the land use

plan?
Checklist filled by (Name, Designation, Signature):

Date:
Checklist reviewed by (Name, Designation, Signature):

Date:
68
Annex I
Sample Reporting Format (to be customized for FUCP)
INTERNATIONAL FINANCE CORPORATION
Environmental and Social Performance
Annual Monitoring Report (amr)
Country of Investment Adjective
ClientCompany
ProjectName
CountryofInvestment
IFCProjectNumber
69
REPORTING PERIOD: (month/year) through (month/year)
AMR COMPLETION DATE: (day/month/year)
Environment and Social Development Department
2121 Pennsylvania Avenue, NW
Washington, DC 20433 USA
www.ifc.org/enviro
70
Introduction
A.1 The Annual Monitoring Report
WB Investment Agreement requires ClientCompany to prepare a comprehensive Annual Monitoring

Report (AMR) for ProjectName facilities and operations. This document comprises IFCs preferred
format for environmental and social performance reporting. The AMR informs the Environment and
Social Development Department about the environmental and social state of the investment.
Preparation Instructions
The following points should assist you in completing this form. Please be descriptive in your responses
and attach additional information as needed.
IFCs Investment Agreement requires designated ClientCompany personnel to complete and

submit annual environmental and social monitoring reports in compliance with the schedule
stipulated in the Investment agreement.
ClientCompany must report qualitative and quantitative project performance data each year of the
investment for the environmental and social monitoring parameters included in this report format.
The main purpose of completing this form is to provide the following information:
1. Environmental and Social Management

2. Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) Performance
3. Significant Environmental and Social Events
4. General Information and Feedback
5. Sustainability of Project and Associated Operations
6. Compliance with World Bank Group and local environmental requirements as specified in
the Investment Agreement
7. Compliance with World Bank Group and local social requirements as specified in the
Investment Agreement
8. Data Interpretation and Corrective Measures
9. Progress on implementing the Corrective Action Plan (CAP) agreed with IFC (if applicable)
A.1.1 Specialist Contact Information
If you have any questions regarding the AMR or wish to discuss completion of the AMR please contact the
following Investment Officer or Portfolio Manager.
71
Investment Name: Portfolio Name:

Officer Manager
Telephone Number: Telephone Number:
Facsimile Number: Facsimile Number:
Email: Email:
1 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT
1.1 AMR Preparer
To be completed by ClientCompany Name and Title:

authorized representative
Phone:
Fax:
Email:
ProjectName Information ProjectName office physical address:

ProjectName web page addresss:
I certify that the data contained in this AMR completely and accurately represents ProjectName
operations during this reporting period. I further certify that analytical data summaries5 incorporated in
Section 6 are based upon data collected and analyzed in a manner consistent with the World Bank
Groups Pollution Prevention and Abatement Handbook, Monitoring.6
ClientCompany Employee Name Signature
Name of Third Party Organization and Signature

Representative Certifying This Document
1.2 Environmental Responsibility Chart
5
Raw analytical data upon which summaries are based should not be submitted with this AMR but must be
preserved by ClientCompany and presented to IFC upon demand.
6
Pollution Prevention and Abatement Handbook
72
Please name the individuals in the company who hold responsibility for environmental and social performance (e.g.
Environment Manager, Occupational Health and Safety Manager, Community Relations Manager) and give their
contact information (Name, Address, Telephone Number, Fax Number, E-mail Address).
1.3 Summary of Current Operations
Describe company operations and level of business activity. Describe any significant changes since the last report in
the company or in day-to-day operations that may affect environmental and social performance. Describe any
management initiatives (e.g. ISO 14001, ISO 9001, OHSAS 18001, or equivalent Quality, Environmental and
Occupational Health and Safety certifications).
2 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY PERFORMANCE (OHS)
ProjectName personnel are required to monitor, record, and report occupational health and safety incidents and
workplace conditions (air quality and physical parameters, which are potentially impacted by industrial processes)
throughout the reporting period.
2.1 Countryof Investment Compliance
Please list any reports submitted to CountryofInvestment authorities, e.g. on OHS, fire and safety inspections,
compliance monitoring, emergency exercises, as well as comments received and corrective actions taken.
CountryofInvestment authority monitoring and inspections with subsequent actions taken shall also be summarized
and reported.
If any of the information requested in the AMR (Section 2.2 - Section 2.4) is contained in reports sent to
CountryofInvestment authorities, please submit the applicable section of the report.
2.2 Workplace Monitoring
Please prepare an Occupational Health and Safety Monitoring Report in the following format. Workplace
monitoring must take place while Project Name facilities are in operation. Please complete a workplace table for
each monitoring station in your operations, as defined below.
Workplace Monitoring Station Workplace Monitoring Location7

Number Description (Name)
Station 1
Station 2
Station 3
7
For each Workplace Monitoring Report provide a building or workplace drawing and define the area of influence
and affected employees.
73
Workplace Monitoring Parameter Sample WBG/IFC ProjectName CountryofIn ProjectName

Collection and Maximum8 Performance vestment Performance
Analysis Threshold in WBG/IFC Regulatory in
Frequency Limit Value units Limits and CountryofInve
(TLV-TWA)9 Units stment units
Annual
average of Annual
quarterly average of
samples quarterly
samples
Workplace Respirable Air Concentrations
Ammonium Chloride Fume Quarterly 10 mg/m3 mg/m3
Asbestos Quarterly 0.5 mg/m3 mg/m3
Carbon Monoxide Quarterly 40 mg/m3 mg/m3
Coal Dusts (<5% SiO2) Quarterly 2 mg/m3 mg/m3
Coal Dusts (>=5% SiO2) Quarterly 0.1 mg/m3 mg/m3
Calcium sulfate (gypsum) Quarterly 10 mg/m3 mg/m3
Formaldehyde Quarterly 0.4 mg/m3 mg/m3
Methylene chloride Quarterly 170 mg/m3 mg/m3
Mineral Wool Fiber Quarterly 5 mg/m3 mg/m3
Nitrogen dioxide Quarterly 6 mg/m3 mg/m3
Particulate (Inert or Nuisance Dust) Quarterly 10 mg/m3 mg/m3
Particulate (Inert or Nuisance Dust) Quarterly 5 mg/m3 mg/m3
Phenol Quarterly 19 mg/m3 mg/m3
Portland Cement Quarterly 10 mg/m3 mg/m3
Silica, crystalline (as respirable dust) Quarterly 0.1 mg/m3 mg/m3
Sodium hydroxide Quarterly 2 mg/m3 mg/m3
Sulfur dioxide Quarterly 5 mg/m3 mg/m3
8
Maximum limits from IFC Guidelines and the NIOSH Pocket Guide to Chemical Hazards
9
TLV-TWA (Threshold Limit Value-Time Weighted Average): The time-weighted average concentration for a
conventional 8-hour workday and a 40-hour workweek, to which nearly all workers may be exposed, day after day,
without adverse effect.
74
Workplace Monitoring Parameter Sample WBG/IFC ProjectName CountryofIn ProjectName

Collection and Maximum8 Performance vestment Performance
Analysis Threshold in WBG/IFC Regulatory in
Frequency Limit Value units Limits and CountryofInve
(TLV-TWA)9 Units stment units
Annual
average of Annual
quarterly average of
samples quarterly
samples
Toluene diisocyanate Quarterly 0.04 mg/m3 mg/m3
Wood Dust/ Hard and Soft Wood Quarterly 1 mg/m3 mg/m3
Workplace Noise Quarterly
Heavy industry (no demand for oral 85 dB(A) dB(A)

communication)
Light industry (decreasing demand for oral 50-65 dB(A) dB(A)

communication)
Open offices, control rooms, service counters or 45-50 dB(A) dB(A)

similar
Individual offices (no disturbing noise) 40-45 dB(A) dB(A)
Classrooms, lecture halls 35-40 dB(A) dB(A)
Hospitals 30-35 dB(A) dB(A)
Heat Exposure, Continuous Work Quarterly
Minimum to light work load 29.5 oC o

C
Moderate work load (walking, standing, use of 27.5 oC o

C
hand tools)
High work load (heavy burdens, intensive use of 26.0 oC o

C
tools)
Very high work load (high speed intensive and 25.0 oC C

heavy work)
75
2.3 Incident Statistics Monitoring
Please report on incidents during the reporting year for ProjectName. Contractor employees are required to adhere
to comparable occupational health and safety standards. If ProjectName uses contractor employees, please also
report any contractor employee incidents. Expand or shrink the tables as needed.
1. Report TOTAL numbers for each parameter: Total Amounts
This reporting period Reporting period Reporting period

1 year ago 2 years ago
Report TOTAL ProjectName Contractor ProjectName Contractor ProjectName Contractor
numbers for each employees employees employees employees employees employees
parameter
Employees
Man-hours worked
Fatalities
Non-fatal injuries10
Lost workdays11
Vehicle collisions12
Incidence13
2. Fatality Details for this Reporting Period
ProjectName Time of death Cause of fatality Corrective measures to prevent

employees or after accident (e.g. reoccurrence
contractor immediate, within
employees? a month, within a
year)
10
Incapacity to work for at least one full workday beyond the day on which the accident or illness occurred.
11
Lost workdays are the number of workdays (consecutive or not) beyond the date of injury or onset of illness that
the employee was away from work or limited to restricted work activity because of an occupational injury or illness.
12
Vehicle Collision: When a vehicle (device used to transport people or things) collides (comes together with
violent force) with another vehicle or inanimate or animate object(s) and results in injury (other than the need for
First Aid) or death.
13
Calculate incidence using the following equation: incidence= total lost workdays/ 100,000 man-hours worked.
Use the total lost workdays to calculate the incidence for this reporting period, reporting periods 1 year ago and 2
years ago, as required above.
76
ProjectName Time of death Cause of fatality Corrective measures to prevent

employees or after accident (e.g. reoccurrence
contractor immediate, within
employees? a month, within a
year)
3. Non-Fatal Injuries Details for this Reporting Period
ProjectName Total Description of Cause of accident Corrective measures to prevent

employees or workdays injury reoccurrence
contractor lost
employees?
4. Vehicle Details for this Reporting Period
ProjectName Cause of collision Corrective measures to prevent reoccurrence

employees or
contractor
employees?
5. Training14 for this Reporting Period
ProjectName Description of training Number of employees that

employees or attended
contractor
employees?
14
ProjectName personnel should be trained in environmental, health and safety matters including accident
prevention, safe lifting practices, the use of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), safe chemical handling practices,
proper control and maintenance of equipment and facilities, emergency response, personal protective equipment
(PEP), emergency response, etc.
77
ProjectName Description of training Number of employees that

employees or attended
contractor
employees?
2.4 Life and Fire Safety
Please complete the following table for ProjectNames operations.
ProjectName Fire Safety Mandatory Date(s) Observed Corrective Actions and

Verification Activities Frequency Performed Deficiencies15 Schedule For
Implementation16
Fire Drills Minimum: three
(3)/year
Inspect and certify fire detection

and suppression electrical and Minimum: one
mechanical systems. (1)/year
Inspect, refill/recharge Minimum: two

(2) inspections/
portable fire extinguisher year
2.5 Significant OHS Events
Please explain any significant Occupational Health and Safety events not covered in the above OHS
tables. The report could include proposed revision of the OHS Management System (if applicable),
revised quantitative objectives, action plans for technical improvements, and planned training activities.
3 Significant Environmental and Social Events
ProjectName personnel are required to report all environmental and social events17 that may have caused
damage; caused health problems; attracted the attention of outside parties; affected project labor or
15
Attach additional sheets as needed to fully describe observed deficiencies.
16
Attach additional sheets as needed to fully describe corrective actions and implementation.
17
Examples of significant incidents follow. Chemical and/or hydrocarbon materials spills; fire, explosion or
unplanned releases; industrial injuries; fatalities including transportation; ecological damage/destruction; local
population disruption; disruption of emissions or effluent treatment; legal/administrative notice of violation;
78
adjacent populations; affected cultural property; or created ProjectName and/or ClientCompany

liabilities.
Attach photographs, plot plans, newspaper articles and all relevant supporting information that IFC will need to
be completely familiar with the incident and associated environmental and social issues.
Please report on the following topics, expanding or collapsing the table where needed.
Date of event Event description Affected Reports sent to IFC Corrective actions
people/environment and/or local (including cost and
regulatory agencies time schedule for
implementation)
4 GENERAL INFORMATION AND FEEDBACK
Provide any additional information including the following:
1. In detail, describe print or broadcast media attention given to ProjectName during this reporting
period.
2. In detail, describe interactions with non-governmental organizations (NGOs) or public scrutiny of
ProjectName.
3. Describe ProjectName public relations efforts (e.g. establishment of a web page, hiring of community
liaison officer)
4. Suggest ways and means to improve information exchange and interactions with IFC professionals.
5 SUSTAINABILITY OF PROJECT AND ASSOCIATED OPERATIONS
IFC has developed a framework to help assess the development impacts of our investments. Many of our
projects take on initiatives, develop processes, or install equipment that exceeds IFC's environmental and
social requirements. This framework permits us to rate project performance in various areas. Over the
past year, has Project Sponsor made changes to operations or participated in any efforts that have
impacted Project Sponsors organization in the following areas?
Implemented an environmental management system (if not already established)

Published an environment/sustainability or a corporate social responsibility report (please send
copy or provide web link)
Established formal and regular consultation with local community and other stakeholders
Decreased use of resources, increased emission controls, or increased by-product recycling
penalties, fines, or increase in pollution charges; negative media attention; chance cultural finds; labor unrest or
disputes.
79
Marketing of products or services that are specifically environmentally friendly

Worked to improve local supplier relationships or provided technical assistance to suppliers
Programs to benefit the local community
Employee programs - training, health, safety
If so, please offer details so we can assess your performance beyond our compliance criteria.
6 REPORTS TO ILLUSTRATE COMPLIANCE WITH IFC/WBG ENVIRONMENTAL POLICIES AND

GUIDELINES AND HOST COUNTRY REGULATIONS
ADD MODULES OR DELETE SECTION
7 REPORTS TO ILLUSTRATE COMPLIANCE WITH IFC/WBG SOCIAL POLICIES AND GUIDELINES

AND HOST COUNTRY REGULATIONS
ADD MODULES OR DELETE SECTION
8 DATA INTERPRETATION AND CORRECTIVE MEASURES
Provide the following information for monitoring data which exceed WGB/IFC maximum levels. This
refers to data presented in Section 6, Quantitative Data Reports to Illustrate Compliance with IFC/ World
Bank Group Environmental Guidelines and CountryofInvestment Regulations. Provide the information
in the table for each parameter exceeded.
Monitoring Cause for Corrective action Completion date Cost % Complete/

parameter that monitoring plan Status
exceeds parameter
WBG/IFC exceedance
guidelines and
local regulations
9 Progress on Implementing the Corrective Action Plan
80
Annex J
World Bank Environment Health and Safety (EHS) Guidelines
1. The World Bank Environment Health and Safety (EHS) Guidelines are appended to this section.
81
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines
GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: INTRODUCTION
WORLD BANK GROUP
Environmental, Health, and Safety

General Guidelines
Introduction based on the professional opinion of qualified and experienced
persons. When host country regulations differ from the levels and
The Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines are
measures presented in the EHS Guidelines, projects are expected
technical reference documents with general and industry-specific
to achieve whichever is more stringent. If less stringent levels or
examples of Good International Industry Practice (GIIP) 1. When
measures than those provided in these EHS Guidelines are
one or more members of the World Bank Group are involved in a
appropriate, in view of specific project circumstances, a full and
project, these EHS Guidelines are applied as required by their
detailed justification for any proposed alternatives is needed as part
respective policies and standards. These General EHS Guidelines
of the site-specific environmental assessment. This justification
are designed to be used together with the relevant Industry Sector
should demonstrate that the choice for any alternate performance
EHS Guidelines which provide guidance to users on EHS issues in
levels is protective of human health and the environment.
specific industry sectors. For complex projects, use of multiple
industry-sector guidelines may be necessary. A complete list of The General EHS Guidelines are organized as follows:
industry-sector guidelines can be found at:
1. Environmental 3
www.ifc.org/ifcext/enviro.nsf/Content/EnvironmentalGuidelines 1.1 Air Emissions and Ambient Air Quality 3
1.2 Energy Conservation 17
The EHS Guidelines contain the performance levels and measures 1.3 Wastewater and Ambient Water Quality 24
1.4 Water Conservation 32
that are generally considered to be achievable in new facilities by 1.5 Hazardous Materials Management 35
1.6 Waste Management 45
existing technology at reasonable costs. Application of the EHS 1.7 Noise 51
Guidelines to existing facilities may involve the establishment of 1.8 Contaminated Land 53
2. Occupational Health and Safety 59
site-specific targets, with an appropriate timetable for achieving 2.1 General Facility Design and Operation 60
2.2 Communication and Training 62
them. The applicability of the EHS Guidelines should be tailored to 2.3 Physical Hazards 64
the hazards and risks established for each project on the basis of 2.4 Chemical Hazards 68
2.5 Biological Hazards 70
the results of an environmental assessment2 in which site-specific 2.6 Radiological Hazards 72
2.7 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) 72
variables, such as host country context, assimilative capacity of the 2.8 Special Hazard Environments 73
environment, and other project factors, are taken into account. The 2.9 Monitoring 74
3. Community Health and Safety 77
applicability of specific technical recommendations should be 3.1 Water Quality and Availability 77
3.2 Structural Safety of Project Infrastructure 78
3.3 Life and Fire Safety (L&FS) 79
3.4 Traffic Safety 82
1 Defined as the exercise of professional skill, diligence, prudence and foresight that 3.5 Transport of Hazardous Materials 82
would be reasonably expected from skilled and experienced professionals engaged 3.6 Disease Prevention 85
in the same type of undertaking under the same or similar circumstances globally. 3.7 Emergency Preparedness and Response 86
The circumstances that skilled and experienced professionals may find when
4. Construction and Decommissioning 89
evaluating the range of pollution prevention and control techniques available to a
project may include, but are not limited to, varying levels of environmental 4.1 Environment 89
degradation and environmental assimilative capacity as well as varying levels of 4.2 Occupational Health & Safety 92
financial and technical feasibility. 4.3 Community Health & Safety 94
2 For IFC, such assessment is carried out consistent with Performance Standard 1, References and Additional Sources* 96
and for the World Bank, with Operational Policy 4.01.
APRIL 30, 2007 1

Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines
GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: INTRODUCTION
WORLD BANK GROUP
General Approach to the Management people or to the environmental resources on which they
depend.
of EHS Issues at the Facility or Project
Level Prioritizing risk management strategies with the objective of
achieving an overall reduction of risk to human health and the
Effective management of environmental, health, and safety (EHS)
environment, focusing on the prevention of irreversible and / or
issues entails the inclusion of EHS considerations into corporate-
significant impacts.
and facility-level business processes in an organized, hierarchical
approach that includes the following steps: Favoring strategies that eliminate the cause of the hazard at
its source, for example, by selecting less hazardous materials
Identifying EHS project hazards3 and associated risks4 as
or processes that avoid the need for EHS controls.
early as possible in the facility development or project cycle,
including the incorporation of EHS considerations into the site When impact avoidance is not feasible, incorporating
selection process, product design process, engineering engineering and management controls to reduce or minimize
planning process for capital requests, engineering work the possibility and magnitude of undesired consequences, for
orders, facility modification authorizations, or layout and example, with the application of pollution controls to reduce
process change plans. the levels of emitted contaminants to workers or environments.
Involving EHS professionals, who have the experience, Preparing workers and nearby communities to respond to
competence, and training necessary to assess and manage accidents, including providing technical and financial
EHS impacts and risks, and carry out specialized resources to effectively and safely control such events, and
environmental management functions including the restoring workplace and community environments to a safe
preparation of project or activity-specific plans and procedures and healthy condition.
that incorporate the technical recommendations presented in
Improving EHS performance through a combination of ongoing
this document that are relevant to the project.
monitoring of facility performance and effective accountability.
Understanding the likelihood and magnitude of EHS risks,
based on:
o The nature of the project activities, such as whether the

project will generate significant quantities of emissions or
effluents, or involve hazardous materials or processes;
o The potential consequences to workers, communities, or

the environment if hazards are not adequately managed,
which may depend on the proximity of project activities to
3 Defined as threats to humans and what they value (Kates, et al., 1985).
4 Defined as quantitative measures of hazard consequences, usually expressed as
conditional probabilities of experiencing harm (Kates, et. al., 1985)
APRIL 30, 2007 2

GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL
AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY
WORLD BANK GROUP
1.0 Environmental
1.1 Air Emissions and Ambient Air Quality
the spatial characteristic of the source including point sources,
Applicability and Approach ...............................................3 fugitive sources, and mobile sources and, further, by process,
Ambient Air Quality ..........................................................4 such as combustion, materials storage, or other industry sector-
General Approach....................................................4
specific processes.
Projects Located in Degraded Airsheds or Ecologically
Sensitive Areas........................................................5
Point Sources ..................................................................5 Where possible, facilities and projects should avoid, minimize, and
Stack Height.............................................................5 control adverse impacts to human health, safety, and the
Small Combustion Facilities Emissions Guidelines ....6
Fugitive Sources ..............................................................8 environment from emissions to air. Where this is not possible, the
Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs)........................8 generation and release of emissions of any type should be
Particulate Matter (PM).............................................8 managed through a combination of:
Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) .........................9
Mobile Sources Land-based ..........................................9
Greenhouse Gases (GHGs).............................................9 Energy use efficiency
Monitoring......................................................................10 Process modification
Monitoring of Small Combustion Plants Emissions...11
Selection of fuels or other materials, the processing of which
may result in less polluting emissions
Application of emissions control techniques
Applicability and Approach
This guideline applies to facilities or projects that generate The selected prevention and control techniques may include one
emissions to air at any stage of the project life-cycle. It or more methods of treatment depending on:
complements the industry-specific emissions guidance presented
in the Industry Sector Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Regulatory requirements
Guidelines by providing information about common techniques for Significance of the source
emissions management that may be applied to a range of industry Location of the emitting facility relative to other sources
sectors. This guideline provides an approach to the management Location of sensitive receptors
of significant sources of emissions, including specific guidance for Existing ambient air quality, and potential for degradation of
assessment and monitoring of impacts. It is also intended to the airshed from a proposed project
provide additional information on approaches to emissions Technical feasibility and cost effectiveness of the available
management in projects located in areas of poor air quality, where options for prevention, control, and release of emissions
it may be necessary to establish project-specific emissions
standards.
Emissions of air pollutants can occur from a wide variety of

activities during the construction, operation, and decommissioning
phases of a project. These activities can be categorized based on
APRIL 30, 2007 3

WORLD BANK GROUP
Ambient Air Quality additional, future sustainable development in the same

airshed. 12
General Approach
At facility level, impacts should be estimated through qualitative or
Projects with significant5,6 sources of air emissions, and potential
quantitative assessments by the use of baseline air quality
for significant impacts to ambient air quality, should prevent or
assessments and atmospheric dispersion models to assess
minimize impacts by ensuring that:
potential ground level concentrations. Local atmospheric, climatic,
Emissions do not result in pollutant concentrations that reach and air quality data should be applied when modeling dispersion,
or exceed relevant ambient quality guidelines and standards9 protection against atmospheric downwash, wakes, or eddy effects
by applying national legislated standards, or in their absence, of the source, nearby13 structures, and terrain features. The
the current WHO Air Quality Guidelines10 (see Table 1.1.1), dispersion model applied should be internationally recognized, or
or other internationally recognized sources11; comparable. Examples of acceptable emission estimation and
Emissions do not contribute a significant portion to the dispersion modeling approaches for point and fugitive sources are
attainment of relevant ambient air quality guidelines or
standards. As a general rule, this Guideline suggests 25 Table 1.1.1: WHO Ambient Air Quality Guidelines 7,8
percent of the applicable air quality standards to allow
Averaging Guideline value in
Period g/m3
Sulfur dioxide (SO2) 24-hour 125 (Interim target-1)
50 (Interim target-2)
20 (guideline)
10 minute 500 (guideline)
5 Significant sources of point and fugitive emissions are considered to be general
Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) 1-year 40 (guideline)
1-hour 200 (guideline)
sources which, for example, can contribute a net emissions increase of one or
more of the following pollutants within a given airshed: PM10: 50 tons per year Particulate Matter 1-year 70 (Interim target-1)
(tpy); NOx: 500 tpy; SO2: 500 tpy; or as established through national legislation; PM10 50 (Interim target-2)
and combustion sources with an equivalent heat input of 50 MWth or greater. The 30 (Interim target-3)
significance of emissions of inorganic and organic pollutants should be established 20 (guideline)
on a project-specific basis taking into account toxic and other properties of the
pollutant. 24-hour 150 (Interim target-1)
6 United States Environmental Protection Agency, Prevention of Significant 100 (Interim target-2)
Deterioration of Air Quality, 40 CFR Ch. 1 Part 52.21. Other references for 75 (Interim target-3)
establishing significant emissions include the European Commission. 2000. 50 (guideline)
Guidance Document for EPER implementation.
Particulate Matter 1-year 35 (Interim target-1)
http://ec.europa.eu/environment/ippc/eper/index.htm ; and Australian Government.
2004. National Pollutant Inventory Guide.
PM2.5 25 (Interim target-2)
http://www.npi.gov.au/handbooks/pubs/npiguide.pdf 15 (Interim target-3)
7 World Health Organization (WHO). Air Quality Guidelines Global Update, 2005. 10 (guideline)
PM 24-hour value is the 99th percentile.
8 Interim targets are provided in recognition of the need for a staged approach to 24-hour 75 (Interim target-1)
50 (Interim target-2)
achieving the recommended guidelines.
9 Ambient air quality standards are ambient air quality levels established and
37.5 (Interim target-3)
25 (guideline)
published through national legislative and regulatory processes, and ambient
Ozone 8-hour daily 160 (Interim target-1)
quality guidelines refer to ambient quality levels primarily developed through
clinical, toxicological, and epidemiological evidence (such as those published by maximum 100 (guideline)
the World Health Organization).
10 Available at World Health Organization (WHO). http://www.who.int/en
12 US EPA Prevention of Significant Deterioration Increments Limits applicable to
11 For example the United States National Ambient Air Quality Standards
non-degraded airsheds.
(NAAQS) (http://www.epa.gov/air/criteria.html) and the relevant European Council
Directives (Council Directive 1999/30/EC of 22 April 1999 / Council Directive
2002/3/EC of February 12 2002).
APRIL 30, 2007 4

WORLD BANK GROUP
included in Annex 1.1.1. These approaches include screening Point Sources

models for single source evaluations (SCREEN3 or AIRSCREEN), Point sources are discrete, stationary, identifiable sources of
as well as more complex and refined models (AERMOD OR emissions that release pollutants to the atmosphere. They are
ADMS). Model selection is dependent on the complexity and geo- typically located in manufacturing or production plants. Within a
morphology of the project site (e.g. mountainous terrain, urban or given point source, there may be several individual emission
rural area).
points that comprise the point source.15
Projects Located in Degraded Airsheds or Point sources are characterized by the release of air pollutants
Ecologically Sensitive Areas typically associated with the combustion of fossil fuels, such as
Facilities or projects located within poor quality airsheds14, and nitrogen oxides (NOx), sulfur dioxide (SO2), carbon monoxide
within or next to areas established as ecologically sensitive (e.g. (CO), and particulate matter (PM), as well as other air pollutants
national parks), should ensure that any increase in pollution levels including certain volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and metals
is as small as feasible, and amounts to a fraction of the applicable that may also be associated with a wide range of industrial
short-term and annual average air quality guidelines or standards activities.
as established in the project-specific environmental assessment.
Emissions from point sources should be avoided and controlled
Suitable mitigation measures may also include the relocation of
according to good international industry practice (GIIP) applicable
significant sources of emissions outside the airshed in question,
to the relevant industry sector, depending on ambient conditions,
use of cleaner fuels or technologies, application of comprehensive
through the combined application of process modifications and
pollution control measures, offset activities at installations
emissions controls, examples of which are provided in Annex
controlled by the project sponsor or other facilities within the same
1.1.2. Additional recommendations regarding stack height and
airshed, and buy-down of emissions within the same airshed.
emissions from small combustion facilities are provided below.
Specific provisions for minimizing emissions and their impacts in

Stack Height
poor air quality or ecologically sensitive airsheds should be
The stack height for all point sources of emissions, whether
established on a project-by-project or industry-specific basis.
significant or not, should be designed according to GIIP (see
Offset provisions outside the immediate control of the project
Annex 1.1.3) to avoid excessive ground level concentrations due
sponsor or buy-downs should be monitored and enforced by the
to downwash, wakes, and eddy effects, and to ensure reasonable
local agency responsible for granting and monitoring emission
diffusion to minimize impacts. For projects where there are
permits. Such provisions should be in place prior to final
multiple sources of emissions, stack heights should be established
commissioning of the facility / project.
with due consideration to emissions from all other project sources,
both point and fugitive. Non-significant sources of emissions,
13 Nearby generally considers an area within a radius of up to 20 times the stack 15 Emission points refer to a specific stack, vent, or other discrete point of pollution
height. release. This term should not be confused with point source, which is a regulatory
14 An airshed should be considered as having poor air quality if nationally distinction from area and mobile sources. The characterization of point sources
into multiple emissions points is useful for allowing more detailed reporting of
legislated air quality standards or WHO Air Quality Guidelines are exceeded emissions information.
significantly.
APRIL 30, 2007 5

WORLD BANK GROUP
including small combustion sources,16 should also use GIIP in

stack design.
Small Combustion Facilities Emissions Guidelines

Small combustion processes are systems designed to deliver
electrical or mechanical power, steam, heat, or any combination of
these, regardless of the fuel type, with a total, rated heat input
capacity of between three Megawatt thermal (MWth) and 50
MWth.
The emissions guidelines in Table 1.1.2 are applicable to small

combustion process installations operating more than 500 hours
per year, and those with an annual capacity utilization of more
than 30 percent. Plants firing a mixture of fuels should compare
emissions performance with these guidelines based on the sum of
the relative contribution of each applied fuel17. Lower emission
values may apply if the proposed facility is located in an
ecologically sensitive airshed, or airshed with poor air quality, in
order to address potential cumulative impacts from the installation
of more than one small combustion plant as part of a distributed
generation project.
16 Small combustion sources are those with a total rated heat input capacity of
50MWth or less.
17 The contribution of a fuel is the percentage of heat input (LHV) provided by this
fuel multiplied by its limit value.
APRIL 30, 2007 6

AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP
Table 1.1.2 - Small Combustion Facilities Emissions Guidelines (3MWth 50MWth) (in mg/Nm3 or as indicated)
Combustion Technology / Dry Gas, Excess
Particulate Matter (PM) Sulfur Dioxide (SO2) Nitrogen Oxides (NOx)
Fuel O2 Content (%)
Engine
200 (Spark Ignition)
Gas N/A N/A 400 (Dual Fuel) 15
1,600 (Compression Ignition)
1.5 percent Sulfur or up to 3.0 percent Sulfur if
50 or up to 100 if justified by project specific If bore size diameter [mm] < 400: 1460
justified by project specific considerations (e.g.
considerations (e.g. Economic feasibility of (or up to 1,600 if justified to maintain high
Economic feasibility of using lower S content fuel,
Liquid using lower ash content fuel, or adding energy efficiency.) 15
or adding secondary treatment to meet levels of
secondary treatment to meet 50, and
using 1.5 percent Sulfur, and available
available environmental capacity of the site) If bore size diameter [mm] > or = 400: 1,850
environmental capacity of the site)
Turbine
Natural Gas 42 ppm (Electric generation)
N/A N/A 15
=3MWth to < 15MWth 100 ppm (Mechanical drive)
Natural Gas
N/A N/A 25 ppm 15
=15MWth to < 50MWth
0.5 percent Sulfur or lower percent Sulfur (e.g. 0.2

Fuels other than Natural Gas 96 ppm (Electric generation)
N/A percent Sulfur) if commercially available without 15
=3MWth to < 15MWth 150 ppm (Mechanical drive)
significant excess fuel cost
Fuels other than Natural Gas 0.5% S or lower % S (0.2%S) if commercially

N/A 74 ppm 15
=15MWth to < 50MWth available without significant excess fuel cost
Boiler
Gas N/A N/A 320 3
50 or up to 150 if justified by environmental
Liquid 2000 460 3
assessment
50 or up to 150 if justified by environmental
Solid 2000 650 6
assessment
Notes: -N/A/ - no emissions guideline; Higher performance levels than these in the Table should be applicable to facilities located in urban / industrial areas with degraded airsheds or close to ecologically sensitive areas where more
stringent emissions controls may be needed.; MWth is heat input on HHV basis; Solid fuels include biomass; Nm 3 is at one atmosphere pressure, 0C.; MWth category is to apply to the entire facility consisting of multiple units that are
reasonably considered to be emitted from a common stack except for NOx and PM limits for turbines and boilers. Guidelines values apply to facilities operating more than 500 hours per year with an annual capacity utilization factor of
more than 30 percent.
APRIL 30, 2007 7

Implementing a leak detection and repair (LDAR) program

Fugitive Sources that controls fugitive emissions by regularly monitoring to
Fugitive source air emissions refer to emissions that are detect leaks, and implementing repairs within a predefined
distributed spatially over a wide area and not confined to a specific time period.18
discharge point. They originate in operations where exhausts are
For VOC emissions associated with handling of chemicals in open
not captured and passed through a stack. Fugitive emissions have
vats and mixing processes, the recommended prevention and
the potential for much greater ground-level impacts per unit than
control techniques include:
stationary source emissions, since they are discharged and
dispersed close to the ground. The two main types of fugitive Substitution of less volatile substances, such as aqueous
emissions are Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) and solvents;
particulate matter (PM). Other contaminants (NOx, SO2 and CO) Collection of vapors through air extractors and subsequent
are mainly associated with combustion processes, as described treatment of gas stream by removing VOCs with control
above. Projects with potentially significant fugitive sources of devices such as condensers or activated carbon absorption;
emissions should establish the need for ambient quality Collection of vapors through air extractors and subsequent
assessment and monitoring practices. treatment with destructive control devices such as:
o Catalytic Incinerators: Used to reduce VOCs from
Open burning of solid wastes, whether hazardous or non- process exhaust gases exiting paint spray booths,
hazardous, is not considered good practice and should be ovens, and other process operations
avoided, as the generation of polluting emissions from this type of o Thermal Incinerators: Used to control VOC levels in a
source cannot be controlled effectively. gas stream by passing the stream through a combustion
chamber where the VOCs are burned in air at
Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs)
temperatures between 700 C to 1,300 C
The most common sources of fugitive VOC emissions are
o Enclosed Oxidizing Flares: Used to convert VOCs into
associated with industrial activities that produce, store, and use
CO2 and H2O by way of direct combustion
VOC-containing liquids or gases where the material is under
pressure, exposed to a lower vapor pressure, or displaced from an Use of floating roofs on storage tanks to reduce the
enclosed space. Typical sources include equipment leaks, open opportunity for volatilization by eliminating the headspace
vats and mixing tanks, storage tanks, unit operations in present in conventional storage tanks.
wastewater treatment systems, and accidental releases.

Particulate Matter (PM)
Equipment leaks include valves, fittings, and elbows which are
The most common pollutant involved in fugitive emissions is dust
subject to leaks under pressure. The recommended prevention
or particulate matter (PM). This is released during certain
and control techniques for VOC emissions associated with
operations, such as transport and open storage of solid materials,
equipment leaks include:
and from exposed soil surfaces, including unpaved roads.
Equipment modifications, examples of which are presented in
Annex 1.1.4; 18 For more information, see Leak Detection and Repair Program (LDAR), at:
http://www.ldar.net
APRIL 30, 2007 8

Recommended prevention and control of these emissions sources programs. In the absence of these, the following approach should
include: be considered:
Use of dust control methods, such as covers, water Regardless of the size or type of vehicle, fleet owners /
suppression, or increased moisture content for open operators should implement the manufacturer recommended
materials storage piles, or controls, including air extraction engine maintenance programs;
and treatment through a baghouse or cyclone for material Drivers should be instructed on the benefits of driving
handling sources, such as conveyors and bins; practices that reduce both the risk of accidents and fuel
Use of water suppression for control of loose materials on consumption, including measured acceleration and driving
paved or unpaved road surfaces. Oil and oil by-products is within safe speed limits;
not a recommended method to control road dust. Examples Operators with fleets of 120 or more units of heavy duty
of additional control options for unpaved roads include those vehicles (buses and trucks), or 540 or more light duty
summarized in Annex 1.1.5. vehicles21 (cars and light trucks) within an airshed should
consider additional ways to reduce potential impacts
Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) including:
Several chemicals are classified as ozone depleting substances
o Replacing older vehicles with newer, more fuel efficient
(ODSs) and are scheduled for phase-out under the Montreal
alternatives
Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer.19 No new
o Converting high-use vehicles to cleaner fuels, where
systems or processes should be installed using CFCs, halons,
feasible
1,1,1-trichloroethane, carbon tetrachloride, methyl bromide or
o Installing and maintaining emissions control devices,
HBFCs. HCFCs should only be considered as interim / bridging
such as catalytic converters
alternatives as determined by the host country commitments and o Implementing a regular vehicle maintenance and repair
regulations.20 program
Mobile Sources Land-based Greenhouse Gases (GHGs)

Similar to other combustion processes, emissions from vehicles Sectors that may have potentially significant emissions of
include CO, NOx, SO2, PM and VOCs. Emissions from on-road greenhouse gases (GHGs)22 include energy, transport, heavy
and off-road vehicles should comply with national or regional industry (e.g. cement production, iron / steel manufacturing,
aluminum smelting, petrochemical industries, petroleum refining,
fertilizer manufacturing), agriculture, forestry and waste
19 Examples include: chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs); halons; 1,1,1-trichloroethane management. GHGs may be generated from direct emissions
(methyl chloroform); carbon tetrachloride; hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs);
hydrobromofluorocarbons (HBFCs); and methyl bromide. They are currently used
in a variety of applications including: domestic, commercial, and process
refrigeration (CFCs and HCFCs); domestic, commercial, and motor vehicle air 21 The selected fleet size thresholds are assumed to represent potentially
conditioning (CFCs and HCFCs); for manufacturing foam products (CFCs); for significant sources of emissions based on individual vehicles traveling 100,000 km
solvent cleaning applications (CFCs, HCFCs, methyl chloroform, and carbon / yr using average emission factors.
tetrachloride); as aerosol propellants (CFCs); in fire protection systems (halons 22 The six greenhouse gases that form part of the Kyoto Protocol to the United
and HBFCs); and as crop fumigants (methyl bromide). Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change include carbon dioxide (C02);
20 Additional information is available through the Montreal Protocol Secretariat methane (CH4); nitrous oxide (N 2O); hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs); perfluorocarbons
web site available at: http://ozone.unep.org/ (PFCs); and sulfur hexafluoride (SF 6).
APRIL 30, 2007 9

from facilities within the physical project boundary and indirect decisions to be made based on the data and the consequences of
emissions associated with the off-site production of power used by making an incorrect decision, the time and geographic
the project. boundaries, and the quality of data needed to make a correct
decision.25 The air quality monitoring program should consider
Recommendations for reduction and control of greenhouse gases
include: the following elements:
Carbon financing;23 Monitoring parameters: The monitoring parameters selected

should reflect the pollutants of concern associated with
Enhancement of energy efficiency (see section on
project processes. For combustion processes, indicator
Energy Conservation);
parameters typically include the quality of inputs, such as the
Protection and enhancement of sinks and reservoirs of
sulfur content of fuel.
greenhouse gases;
Promotion of sustainable forms of agriculture and Baseline calculations: Before a project is developed, baseline
forestry; air quality monitoring at and in the vicinity of the site should
Promotion, development and increased use of be undertaken to assess background levels of key pollutants,
renewable forms of energy; in order to differentiate between existing ambient conditions
Carbon capture and storage technologies;24 and project-related impacts.
Limitation and / or reduction of methane emissions Monitoring type and frequency: Data on emissions and
through recovery and use in waste management, as well ambient air quality generated through the monitoring program
as in the production, transport and distribution of energy should be representative of the emissions discharged by the
(coal, oil, and gas). project over time. Examples of time-dependent variations in
the manufacturing process include batch process
Monitoring manufacturing and seasonal process variations. Emissions
Emissions and air quality monitoring programs provide information
from highly variable processes may need to be sampled
that can be used to assess the effectiveness of emissions
more frequently or through composite methods. Emissions
management strategies. A systematic planning process is
monitoring frequency and duration may also range from
recommended to ensure that the data collected are adequate for
continuous for some combustion process operating
their intended purposes (and to avoid collecting unnecessary
parameters or inputs (e.g. the quality of fuel) to less frequent,
data). This process, sometimes referred to as a data quality monthly, quarterly or yearly stack tests.
objectives process, defines the purpose of collecting the data, the
Monitoring locations: Ambient air quality monitoring may
23 Carbon financing as a carbon emissions reduction strategy may include the host
consists of off-site or fence line monitoring either by the
government-endorsed Clean Development Mechanism or Joint Implementation of project sponsor, the competent government agency, or by
the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change.
24 Carbon dioxide capture and storage (CCS) is a process consisting of the collaboration between both. The location of ambient air
separation of CO2 from industrial and energy-related sources; transport to a
storage location; and long-term isolation from the atmosphere, for example in
geological formations, in the ocean, or in mineral carbonates (reaction of CO2 with
metal oxides in silicate minerals to produce stable carbonates). It is the object of 25 See, for example, United States Environmental Protection Agency, Guidance on
intensive research worldwide (Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change Systematic Planning Using the Data Quality Objectives Process EPA QA/G-4,
(IPCC), Special Report, Carbon Dioxide Capture and Storage (2006). EPA/240/B-06/001 February 2006.
APRIL 30, 2007 10

quality monitoring stations should be established based on o If Annual Stack Emission Testing demonstrates results
the results of scientific methods and mathematical models to consistently and significantly better than the required
estimate potential impact to the receiving airshed from an levels, frequency of Annual Stack Emission Testing can
emissions source taking into consideration such aspects as be reduced from annual to every two or three years.
the location of potentially affected communities and o Emission Monitoring: None
prevailing wind directions.
Boilers with capacities between =20 MWth and < 50 MWth
Sampling and analysis methods: Monitoring programs should o Annual Stack Emission Testing: SO2, NOx and PM. For
apply national or international methods for sample collection gaseous fuel-fired boilers, only NOx. SO2 can be
and analysis, such as those published by the International calculated based on fuel quality certification (if no SO2
Organization for Standardization,26 the European Committee control equipment is used)
for Standardization,27 or the U.S. Environmental Protection o Emission Monitoring: SO2. Plants with SO2 control
Agency.28 Sampling should be conducted by, or under, the equipment: Continuous. NOx: Continuous monitoring of
supervision of trained individuals. Analysis should be either NOx emissions or indicative NOx emissions using
conducted by entities permitted or certified for this purpose. combustion parameters. PM: Continuous monitoring of
Sampling and analysis Quality Assurance / Quality Control either PM emissions, opacity, or indicative PM
(QA/QC) plans should be applied and documented to ensure emissions using combustion parameters / visual
that data quality is adequate for the intended data use (e.g., monitoring.
method detection limits are below levels of concern). Additional recommended monitoring approaches for
Monitoring reports should include QA/QC documentation. turbines:
o Annual Stack Emission Testing: NOx and SO2 (NOx
Monitoring of Small Combustion Plants Emissions only for gaseous fuel-fired turbines).
Additional recommended monitoring approaches for boilers: o If Annual Stack Emission Testing results show
Boilers with capacities between =3 MWth and < 20 MWth: constantly (3 consecutive years) and significantly (e.g.
o Annual Stack Emission Testing: SO2, NOx and PM. For less than 75 percent) better than the required levels,
gaseous fuel-fired boilers, only NOx. SO2 can be frequency of Annual Stack Emission Testing can be
calculated based on fuel quality certification if no SO2 reduced from annual to every two or three years.
control equipment is used. o Emission Monitoring: NOx: Continuous monitoring of
either NOx emissions or indicative NOx emissions using
26 An on-line catalogue of ISO standards relating to the environment, health combustion parameters.SO2: Continuous monitoring if
protection, and safety is available at: SO2 control equipment is used.
http://www.iso.org/iso/en/CatalogueListPage.CatalogueList?ICS1=13&ICS2=&ICS
3=&scopelist=
Additional recommended monitoring approaches for
27 An on-line catalogue of European Standards is available at:
http://www.cen.eu/catweb/cwen.htm . engines:
28 The National Environmental Methods Index provides a searchable o Annual Stack Emission Testing: NOx ,SO2 and PM (NOx
clearinghouse of U.S. methods and procedures for both regulatory and non-
regulatory monitoring purposes for water, sediment, air and tissues, and is only for gaseous fuel-fired diesel engines).
available at http://www.nemi.gov/.
APRIL 30, 2007 11

o If Annual Stack Emission Testing results show

constantly (3 consecutive years) and significantly (e.g.
less than 75 percent) better than the required levels,
frequency of Annual Stack Emission Testing can be
reduced from annual to every two or three years.
o Emission Monitoring: NOx: Continuous monitoring of
either NOx emissions or indicative NOx emissions using
combustion parameters. SO2: Continuous monitoring if
SO2 control equipment is used. PM: Continuous
monitoring of either PM emissions or indicative PM
emissions using operating parameters.
APRIL 30, 2007 12

Annex 1.1.1 Air Emissions Estimation and Dispersion

Modeling Methods
The following is a partial list of documents to aid in the estimation

of air emissions from various processes and air dispersion
models:
Australian Emission Estimation Technique Manuals

http://www.npi.gov.au/handbooks/
Atmospheric Emission Inventory Guidebook, UN / ECE / EMEP

and the European Environment Agency
http://www.aeat.co.uk/netcen/airqual/TFEI/unece.htm
Emission factors and emission estimation methods, US EPA

Office of Air Quality Planning & Standards
http://www.epa.gov/ttn/chief
Guidelines on Air Quality Models (Revised), US Environmental

Protection Agency (EPA), 2005
http://www.epa.gov/scram001/guidance/guide/appw_05.pdf
Frequently Asked Questions, Air Quality Modeling and

Assessment Unit (AQMAU), UK Environment Agency
http://www.environment-
agency.gov.uk/subjects/airquality/236092/?version=1&lang=_e
OECD Database on Use and Release of Industrial Chemicals

http://www.olis.oecd.org/ehs/urchem.nsf/
APRIL 30, 2007 13

Annex 1.1.2 Illustrative Point Source Air Emissions Prevention and Control Technologies
Principal Sources and Issues General Prevention / Process Reduction Gas

Control Options Comments
Modification Approach Efficiency (%) Condition
Particulate Matter (PM)
Main sources are the combustion of fossil Fuel switching (e.g. selection of lower sulfur Fabric Filters 99 - 99.7% Dry gas, temp Applicability depends on flue gas properties including temperature, chemical
fuels and numerous manufacturing processes fuels) or reducing the amount of fine <400F properties, abrasion and load. Typical air to cloth ratio range of 2.0 to 3.5 cfm/ft2
that collect PM through air extraction and particulates added to a process.
ventilation systems. Volcanoes, ocean spray, Achievable outlet concentrations of 23 mg/Nm 3
forest fires and blowing dust (most prevalent
in dry and semiarid climates) contribute to Electrostatic 97 99% Varies Precondition gas to remove large particles. Efficiency dependent on resistivity of
background levels. Precipitator (ESP) depending of particle. Achievable outlet concentration of 23 mg/Nm3
particle type
Cyclone 74 95% None Most efficient for large particles. Achievable outlet concentrations of 30 - 40
mg/Nm 3
Wet Scrubber 93 95% None Wet sludge may be a disposal problem depending on local infrastructure.
Achievable outlet concentrations of 30 - 40 mg/Nm3
Sulfur Dioxide (SO2)

Mainly produced by the combustion of fuels Control system selection is heavily Fuel Switching >90% Alternate fuels may include low sulfur coal, light diesel or natural gas with
such as oil and coal and as a by-product from dependent on the inlet concentration. For consequent reduction in particulate emissions related to sulfur in the fuel. Fuel
some chemical production or wastewater SO2 concentrations in excess of 10%, the cleaning or beneficiation of fuels prior to combustion is another viable option but
treatment processes. stream is passed through an acid plant not may have economic consequences.
only to lower the SO2 emissions but also to
generate high grade sulfur for sale. Levels Sorbent Injection 30% - 70% Calcium or lime is injected into the flue gas and the SO2 is adsorbed onto the
below 10% are not rich enough for this sorbent
process and should therefore utilize
absorption or scrubbing, where SO2 Dry Flue Gas 70%-90% Can be regenerable or throwaway.
molecules are captured into a liquid phase Desulfurization
or adsorption, where SO2 molecules are
captured on the surface of a solid Wet Flue Gas >90% Produces gypsum as a by-product
adsorbent. Desulfurization
APRIL 30, 2007 14

Annex 1.1.2: Illustrative Point Source Air Emissions Prevention and Control Technologies (continued)
Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) Percent Reduction by Fuel Type Comments
Combustion modification
Associated with combustion of fuel. Coal Oil Gas These modifications are capable of reducing NOx emissions by 50
(Illustrative of boilers)
May occur in several forms of nitrogen to 95%. The method of combustion control used depends on the
oxide; namely nitric oxide (NO), Low-excess-air firing 1030 1030 1030 type of boiler and the method of firing fuel.
nitrogen dioxide (NO2) and nitrous
oxide (N2O), which is also a Staged Combustion 2050 2050 2050
greenhouse gas. The term NOx Flue Gas Recirculation N/A 2050 2050
serves as a composite between NO
and NO2 and emissions are usually Water/Steam Injection N/A 1050 N/A.
reported as NOx. Here the NO is
multiplied by the ratio of molecular Low-NOx Burners 3040 3040 3040
weights of NO2 to NO and added to
Flue Gas Treatment Coal Oil Gas
the NO2 emissions. Flue gas treatment is more effective in reducing NOx emissions
than are combustion controls. Techniques can be classified as
Means of reducing NOx emissions are SCR, SNCR, and adsorption. SCR involves the injection of
based on the modification of operating Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) 6090 6090 6090 ammonia as a reducing agent to convert NOx to nitrogen in the
conditions such as minimizing the presence of a catalyst in a converter upstream of the air heater.
resident time at peak temperatures, Selective Non-Catalytic Reduction N/A 3070 3070 Generally, some ammonia slips through and is part of the
reducing the peak temperatures by (SNCR) emissions. SNCR also involves the injection of ammonia or urea
increasing heat transfer rates or based products without the presence of a catalyst.
minimizing the availability of oxygen.
Note: Compiled by IFC based on inputs from technical experts.
APRIL 30, 2007 15

Annex 1.1.3 - Good International Industry Practice (GIIP) Annex 1.1.4 - Examples of VOC Emissions Controls
Stack Height
(Based on United States 40 CFR, part 51.100 (ii)).
Approximate
HG = H + 1.5L; where Control
Equipment Type Modification
Efficiency
HG = GEP stack height measured from the ground level (%)
elevation at the base of the stack Seal-less design 10029
H = Height of nearby structure(s) above the base of the
stack. Closed-vent system 9030
Pumps
L = Lesser dimension, height (h) or width (w), of nearby Dual mechanical seal
with barrier fluid
structures maintained at a higher 100
Nearby structures = Structures within/touching a radius pressure than the
pumped fluid
of 5L but less than 800 m.
Closed-vent system 90
Dual mechanical seal

Compressors with barrier fluid
maintained at a higher 100
Projected width (w)
pressure than the

Stack compressed gas
Closed-vent system Variable31
Pressure Relief Devices
Rupture disk assembly 100
Valves Seal-less design 100
Connectors Weld together 100

1.5*L
HG
Blind, cap, plug, or
Open-ended Lines 100
second valve
h Sampling Connections Closed-loop sampling 100

H
Note: Examples of technologies are provided for illustrative purposes.
The availability and applicability of any particular technology will vary
Maximum 5*L depending on manufacturer specifications.
29 Seal-less equipment can be a large source of emissions in the event of

equipment failure.
30 Actual efficiency of a closed-vent system depends on percentage of vapors
collected and efficiency of control device to which the vapors are routed.
31 Control efficiency of closed vent-systems installed on a pressure relief
device may be lower than other closed-vent systems.
APRIL 30, 2007 16

Annex 1.1.5 - Fugitive PM Emissions Controls
Control
Control Type
Efficiency
Chemical Stabilization 0% - 98%

Hygroscopic salts
60% - 96%
Bitumens/adhesives
Surfactants 0% - 68%
Wet Suppression Watering 12% - 98%
Speed Reduction 0% - 80%
Traffic Reduction Not quantified
Paving (Asphalt / Concrete) 85% - 99%

Covering with Gravel, Slag, or "Road
30% - 50%
Carpet"
Vacuum Sweeping 0% - 58%
Water Flushing/Broom Sweeping 0% - 96%
APRIL 30, 2007 17

ENERGY CONSERVATION
WORLD BANK GROUP
1.2 Energy Conservation

should also evaluate energy conservation opportunities arising
Applicability and Approach .............................................18 from manufacturing process modifications.
Energy Management Programs...............................18
Energy Efficiency....................................................18
Process Heating.............................................................19 Energy Management Programs
Heating Load Reduction .........................................19 Energy management programs should include the following
Heat Distribution Systems.......................................19 elements:
Energy Conversion System Efficiency Improvements20
Process Cooling.............................................................20 Identification, and regular measurement and reporting of
Load Reduction......................................................21
principal energy flows within a facility at unit process level
Energy Conversion.................................................21
Refrigerant Compression Efficiency ........................23 Preparation of mass and energy balance;
Refrigeration System Auxiliaries..............................23 Definition and regular review of energy performance
Compressed Air Systems...............................................24
targets, which are adjusted to account for changes in major
Load reduction .......................................................24
Distribution.............................................................24 influencing factors on energy use
Regular comparison and monitoring of energy flows with
Applicability and Approach performance targets to identify where action should be

taken to reduce energy use
This guideline applies to facilities or projects that consume
energy in process heating and cooling; process and auxiliary Regular review of targets, which may include comparison
with benchmark data, to confirm that targets are set at
systems, such as motors, pumps, and fans; compressed air
appropriate levels
systems and heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems
(HVAC); and lighting systems. It complements the industry-
Energy Efficiency
specific emissions guidance presented in the Industry Sector
For any energy-using system, a systematic analysis of energy
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines by
efficiency improvements and cost reduction opportunities should
providing information about common techniques for energy
include a hierarchical examination of opportunities to:
conservation that may be applied to a range of industry sectors.
Demand/Load Side Management by reducing loads on the

Energy management at the facility level should be viewed in the
energy system
context of overall consumption patterns, including those
Supply Side Management by:
associated with production processes and supporting utilities, as
o Reduce losses in energy distribution
well as overall impacts associated with emissions from power
o Improve energy conversion efficiency
sources. The following section provides guidance on energy
o Exploit energy purchasing opportunities
management with a focus on common utility systems often
o Use lower-carbon fuels
representing technical and financially feasible opportunities for
improvement in energy conservation. However, operations
APRIL 30, 2007 18

ENERGY CONSERVATION
WORLD BANK GROUP
Common opportunities in each of these areas are summarized Review opportunities to schedule work flow to limit the
below.32 need for process reheating between stages
Operate furnaces/ovens at slight positive pressure, and
Process Heating maintain air seals to reduce air in-leakage into the heated
Process heating is vital to many manufacturing processes, system, thereby reducing the energy required to heat
including heating for fluids, calcining, drying, heat treating, metal unnecessary air to system operating temperature
heating, melting, melting agglomeration, curing, and forming33. Reduce radiant heat losses by sealing structural openings
and keep viewing ports closed when not in use
In process heating systems, a system heat and mass balance
Where possible, use the system for long runs close to or at
will show how much of the systems energy input provides true
operating capacity
process heating, and quantify fuel used to satisfy energy losses
Consider use of high emissivity coatings of high
caused by excessive parasitic loads, distribution, or conversion
temperature insulation, and consequent reduction in
losses. Examination of savings opportunities should be directed
process temperature
by the results of the heat and mass balance, though the
Near net weight and shape heat designs
following techniques are often valuable and cost-effective.
Robust Quality assurance on input material
Robust Scheduled maintenance programs
Heating Load Reduction
Ensure adequate insulation to reduce heat losses through
Heat Distribution Systems
furnace/oven etc. structure
Heat distribution in process heating applications typically takes
Recover heat from hot process or exhaust streams to
place through steam, hot water, or thermal fluid systems.
reduce system loads
Losses can be reduced through the following actions:
In intermittently-heated systems, consider use of low
thermal mass insulation to reduce energy required to heat Promptly repair distribution system leaks
the system structure to operating temperature Avoid steam leaks despite a perceived need to get steam
Control process temperature and other parameters through the turbine. Electricity purchase is usually cheaper
accurately to avoid, for example, overheating or overdrying overall, especially when the cost to treat turbine-quality
Examine opportunities to use low weight and/or low boiler feed water is included. If the heat-power ratio of the
thermal mass product carriers, such as heated shapers, distribution process is less than that of power systems,
kiln cars etc. opportunities should be considered to increase the ratio; for
example, by using low-pressure steam to drive absorption
cooling systems rather than using electrically-driven vapor-
32 Additional guidance on energy efficiency is available from sources such as
Natural Resources Canada (NRCAN compression systems.
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/commercial/financial-assistance/new-
buildings/mnecb.cfm?attr=20); the European Union (EUROPA. Regularly verify correct operation of steam traps in steam
http://europa.eu.int/scadplus/leg/en/s15004.htm ), and United States Department
of Energy (US DOE, systems, and ensure that traps are not bypassed. Since
http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/process.html).
33 US DOE. http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/process.html
APRIL 30, 2007 19

ENERGY CONSERVATION
WORLD BANK GROUP
steam traps typically last approximately 5 years, 20% Maintain clean heat transfer surfaces; in steam boilers, flue
should be replaced or repaired annually gases should be no more than 20 K above steam
Insulate distribution system vessels, such as hot wells and temperature)
de-aerators, in steam systems and thermal fluid or hot In steam boiler systems, use economizers to recover heat
water storage tanks from flue gases to pre-heat boiler feed water or combustion
Insulate all steam, condensate, hot water and thermal fluid air
distribution pipework, down to and including 1 (25 mm) Consider reverse osmosis or electrodialysis feed water
diameter pipe, in addition to insulating all hot valves and treatment to minimize the requirement for boiler blowdown
flanges Adopt automatic (continuous) boiler blowdown
In steam systems, return condensate to the boiler house Recover heat from blowdown systems through flash steam
for re-use, since condensate is expensive boiler-quality recovery or feed-water preheat
water and valuable beyond its heat content alone Do not supply excessive quantities of steam to the de-
Use flash steam recovery systems to reduce losses due to aerator
evaporation of high-pressure condensate With fired heaters, consider opportunities to recover heat to
Consider steam expansion through a back-pressure turbine combustion air through the use of recuperative or
rather than reducing valve stations regenerative burner systems
Eliminate distribution system losses by adopting point-of- For systems operating for extended periods (> 6000
use heating systems hours/year), cogeneration of electrical power, heat and /or
cooling can be cost effective
Energy Conversion System Efficiency Oxy Fuel burners
Improvements
Oxygen enrichment/injection
The following efficiency opportunities should be examined for
Use of turbolators in boilers
process furnaces or ovens, and utility systems, such as boilers
Sizing design and use of multiple boilers for different load
and fluid heaters:
configurations
Regularly monitor CO, oxygen or CO2 content of flue Fuel quality control/fuel blending
gases to verify that combustion systems are using the
minimum practical excess air volumes Process Cooling
Consider combustion automation using oxygen-trim The general methodology outlined above should be applied to
controls process cooling systems. Commonly used and cost-effective
Minimize the number of boilers or heaters used to meet measures to improve process cooling efficiency are described
loads. It is typically more efficient to run one boiler at 90% below.
of capacity than two at 45%. Minimize the number of
boilers kept at hotstandby
Use flue dampers to eliminate ventilation losses from hot
boilers held at standby
APRIL 30, 2007 20

ENERGY CONSERVATION
WORLD BANK GROUP
Load Reduction o Planting trees as thermal shields around buildings
Ensure adequate insulation to reduce heat gains through o Installing timers and/or thermostats and/or
cooling system structure and to below-ambient temperature enthalpy-based control systems
refrigerant pipes and vessels o Installing ventilation heat recovery systems34
Control process temperature accurately to avoid

overcooling
Energy Conversion
The efficiency of refrigeration service provision is normally
Operate cooling tunnels at slight positive pressure and
discussed in terms of Coefficient of Performance (COP), which
maintain air seals to reduce air in-leakage into the cooled
is the ratio of cooling duty divided by input power. COP is
system, thus reducing the energy required to cool this
maximized by effective refrigeration system design and
unnecessary air to system operating temperature
increased refrigerant compression efficiency, as well as
Examine opportunities to pre-cool using heat recovery to a
minimization of the temperature difference through which the
process stream requiring heating, or by using a higher
system works and of auxiliary loads (i.e. those in addition to
temperature cooling utility
compressor power demand) used to operate the refrigeration
In cold and chill stores, minimize heat gains to the cooled
system.
space by use of air curtains, entrance vestibules, or rapidly
opening/closing doors. Where conveyors carry products System Design
into chilled areas, minimize the area of transfer openings,
If process temperatures are above ambient for all, or part,
for example, by using strip curtains
of the year, use of ambient cooling systems, such as
Quantify and minimize incidental cooling loads, for
provided by cooling towers or dry air coolers, may be
example, those due to evaporator fans, other machinery,
appropriate, perhaps supplemented by refrigeration in
defrost systems and lighting in cooled spaces, circulation
summer conditions.
fans in cooling tunnels, or secondary refrigerant pumps
Most refrigeration systems are electric-motor driven vapor
(e.g. chilled water, brines, glycols)
compression systems using positive displacement or
Do not use refrigeration for auxiliary cooling duties, such as
centrifugal compressors. The remainder of this guideline
compressor cylinder head or oil cooling
relates primarily to vapor-compression systems. However,
While not a thermal load, ensure there is no gas bypass of
when a cheap or free heat source is available (e.g. waste
the expansion valve since this imposes compressor load
heat from an engine-driven generatorlow-pressure steam
while providing little effective cooling
In the case of air conditioning applications, energy
34 More information on HVAC energy efficiency can be found at the British
efficiency techniques include:
Columbia Building Corporation (Woolliams, 2002.
http://www.greenbuildingsbc.com/new_buildings/pdf_files/greenbuild_strategi
o Placing air intakes and air-conditioning units in cool, es_guide.pdf), NRCANs EnerGuide
(http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/equipment/english/index.cfm?PrintView=N&Text=N)
shaded locations and NRCANs Energy Star Programs
(http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/energystar/english/consumers/heating.cfm?text=N&pri
o Improving building insulation including seals, vents, ntview=N#AC ), and the US Energy Star Program
windows, and doors (http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?c=guidelines.download_guidelines).
APRIL 30, 2007 21

ENERGY CONSERVATION
WORLD BANK GROUP
that has passed through a back-pressure turbine), temperature is indicative of an appropriately sized
absorption refrigeration may be appropriate. evaporator. When cooling liquids, 2K between leaving
Exploit high cooling temperature range: precooling by liquid and evaporating temperatures can be achieved,
ambient and/or high temperature refrigeration before final though a 4K difference is generally indicative of a
cooling can reduce refrigeration capital and running costs. generously-sized evaporator.
High cooling temperature range also provides an Keep the evaporator clean. When cooling air, ensure
opportunity for countercurrent (cascade) cooling, which correct defrost operation. In liquid cooling, monitor
reduces refrigerant flow needs. refrigerant/process temperature differences and compare
Keep hot and cold fluids separate, for example, do not with design expectations to be alert to heat exchanger
mix water leaving the chiller with water returning from contamination by scale or oil.
cooling circuits. Ensure oil is regularly removed from the evaporator, and
In low-temperature systems where high temperature that oil additions and removals balance.
differences are inevitable, consider two-stage or compound Avoid the use of back-pressure valves.
compression, or economized screw compressors, rather Adjust expansion valves to minimize suction superheat
than single-stage compression. consistent with avoidance of liquid carry-over to
compressors.
Minimizing Temperature Differences
Ensure that an appropriate refrigerant charge volume is
A vapor-compression refrigeration system raises the present.
temperature of the refrigerant from somewhat below the lowest
process temperature (the evaporating temperature) to provide Reducing Condensing Temperature
process cooling, to a higher temperature (the condensing Consider whether to use air-cooled or evaporation-based
temperature), somewhat above ambient, to facilitate heat cooling (e.g. evaporative or water cooled condensers and
rejection to the air or cooling water systems. Increasing cooling towers). Air-cooled evaporators usually have
evaporating temperature typically increases compressor cooling higher condensing temperatures, hence higher compressor
capacity without greatly affecting power consumption. Reducing energy use, and auxiliary power consumption, especially in
condensing temperature increases evaporator cooling capacity low humidity climates. If a wet system is used, ensure
and substantially reduces compressor power consumption. adequate treatment to prevent growth of legionella
bacteria.
Elevating Evaporating Temperature
Whichever basic system is chosen, select a relatively large
Select a large evaporator to permit relatively low condenser to minimize differences between condensing
temperature differences between process and evaporating and the heat sink temperatures. Condensing temperatures
temperatures. Ensure that energy use of auxiliaries (e.g. with air cooled or evaporative condensers should not be
evaporator fans) does not outweigh compression savings. more than 10K above design ambient condition, and a 4K
In air-cooling applications, a design temperature difference approach in a liquid-cooled condenser is possible.
of 6-10 K between leaving air temperature and evaporating
APRIL 30, 2007 22

ENERGY CONSERVATION
WORLD BANK GROUP
Avoid accumulation of non-condensable gases in the Refrigerant Compression Efficiency

condenser system. Consider the installation of refrigerated Some refrigerant compressors and chillers are more
non-condensable purgers, particularly for systems efficient than others offered for the same duty. Before
operating below atmospheric pressure. purchase, identify the operating conditions under which the
Keep condensers clean and free from scale. Monitor compressor or chiller is likely to operate for substantial
refrigerant/ambient temperature differences and compare parts of its annual cycle. Check operating efficiency under
with design expectations to be alert to heat exchanger these conditions, and ask for estimates of annual running
contamination. cost. Note that refrigeration and HVAC systems rarely run
Avoid liquid backup, which restricts heat transfer area in for extended periods at design conditions, which are
condensers. This can be caused by installation errors such deliberately extreme. Operational efficiency under the most
as concentric reducers in horizontal liquid refrigerant pipes, commonly occurring off-design conditions is likely to be
or up and over liquid lines leading from condensers. most important.
In multiple condenser applications, refrigerant liquid lines Compressors lose efficiency when unloaded. Avoid
should be connected via drop-leg traps to the main liquid operation of multiple compressors at part-load conditions.
refrigerant line to ensure that hot gases flow to all Note that package chillers can gain coefficient of
condensers. performance (COP) when slightly unloaded, as loss of
Avoid head pressure control to the extent possible. Head compressor efficiency can be outweighed by the benefits of
pressure control maintains condensing temperature at, or reduced condensing and elevated evaporating
near, design levels. It therefore prevents reduction in temperature. However, it is unlikely to be energy efficient
compressor power consumption, which accompanies to operate a single compressor-chiller at less than 50% of
reduced condensing temperature, by restricting condenser capacity.
capacity (usually by switching off the condenser, or cooling Consider turndown efficiency when specifying chillers.
tower fans, or restricting cooling water flow) under Variable speed control or multiple compressor chillers can
conditions of less severe than design load or ambient be highly efficient at part loads.
temperature conditions. Head pressure is often kept higher Use of thermal storage systems (e.g., ice storage) can
than necessary to facilitate hot gas defrost or adequate avoid the need for close load-tracking and, hence, can
liquid refrigerant circulation. Use of electronic rather than avoid part-loaded compressor operation.
thermostatic expansion valves, and liquid refrigerant
pumps can permit effective refrigerant circulation at much Refrigeration System Auxiliaries
reduced condensing temperatures. Many refrigeration system auxiliaries (e.g. evaporator fans and
Site condensers and cooling towers with adequate spacing chilled water pumps) contribute to refrigeration system load, so
so as to prevent recirculation of hot air into the tower. reductions in their energy use have a double benefit. General
energy saving techniques for pumps and fans, listed in the next
section of these guidelines, should be applied to refrigeration
auxiliaries.
APRIL 30, 2007 23

ENERGY CONSERVATION
WORLD BANK GROUP
Additionally, auxiliary use can be reduced by avoidance of part- o Implement systems for systematic identification and
load operation and in plant selection (e.g. axial fan evaporative repair of leaks
condensers generally use less energy than equivalent o All condensate drain points should be trapped. Do not
centrifugal fan towers). leave drain valves continuously cracked open
o Train workers never to direct compressed air against
Under extreme off-design conditions, reduction in duty of cooling
their bodies or clothing to dust or cool themselves
system fans and pumps can be worthwhile, usually when the
down.
lowest possible condensing pressure has been achieved.
Distribution
Compressed Air Systems Monitor pressure losses in filters and replace as
Compressed air is the most commonly found utility service in
appropriate
industry, yet in many compressed air systems, the energy
Use adequately sized distribution pipework designed to
contained in compressed air delivered to the user is often 10%
minimize pressure losses
or less of energy used in air compression. Savings are often
possible through the following techniques:
Load reduction
Examine each true user of compressed air to identify the
air volume needed and the pressure at which this should
be delivered.
Do not mix high volume low pressure and low volume high
pressure loads. Decentralize low volume high-pressure
applications or provide dedicated low-pressure utilities, for
example, by using fans rather than compressed air.
Review air use reduction opportunities, for example:
o Use air amplifier nozzles rather than simple open-pipe

compressed air jets
o Consider whether compressed air is needed at all
o Where air jets are required intermittently (e.g. to
propel product), consider operating the jet via a
process-related solenoid valve, which opens only
when air is required
o Use manual or automatically operated valves to
isolate air supply to individual machines or zones that
are not in continuous use
APRIL 30, 2007 24

WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY
WORLD BANK GROUP
1.3 Wastewater and Ambient Water Quality

Understand the quality, quantity, frequency and sources of
Applicability and Approach......................................25 liquid effluents in its installations. This includes knowledge
General Liquid Effluent Quality.......................................26
about the locations, routes and integrity of internal drainage
Discharge to Surface Water....................................26
Discharge to Sanitary Sewer Systems.....................26 systems and discharge points
Land Application of Treated Effluent........................27 Plan and implement the segregation of liquid effluents
Septic Systems ......................................................27
principally along industrial, utility, sanitary, and stormwater
Wastewater Management...............................................27
Industrial Wastewater .............................................27 categories, in order to limit the volume of water requiring
Sanitary Wastewater ..............................................29 specialized treatment. Characteristics of individual streams
Emissions from Wastewater Treatment Operations .30
may also be used for source segregation.
Residuals from Wastewater Treatment Operations..30
Occupational Health and Safety Issues in Wastewater Identify opportunities to prevent or reduce wastewater
Treatment Operations.............................................30 pollution through such measures as recycle/reuse within their
Monitoring......................................................................30
facility, input substitution, or process modification (e.g.
change of technology or operating conditions/modes).
Applicability and Approach Assess compliance of their wastewater discharges with the
This guideline applies to projects that have either direct or indirect applicable: (i) discharge standard (if the wastewater is
discharge of process wastewater, wastewater from utility discharged to a surface water or sewer), and (ii) water quality
operations or stormwater to the environment. These guidelines standard for a specific reuse (e.g. if the wastewater is reused
are also applicable to industrial discharges to sanitary sewers that for irrigation).
discharge to the environment without any treatment. Process
wastewater may include contaminated wastewater from utility Additionally, the generation and discharge of wastewater of any
operations, stormwater, and sanitary sewage. It provides type should be managed through a combination of:
information on common techniques for wastewater management,
Water use efficiency to reduce the amount of wastewater
water conservation, and reuse that can be applied to a wide range
generation
of industry sectors. This guideline is meant to be complemented
Process modification, including waste minimization, and
by the industry-specific effluent guidelines presented in the
reducing the use of hazardous materials to reduce the load of
Industry Sector Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS)
pollutants requiring treatment
Guidelines. Projects with the potential to generate process
If needed, application of wastewater treatment techniques to
wastewater, sanitary (domestic) sewage, or stormwater should
further reduce the load of contaminants prior to discharge,
incorporate the necessary precautions to avoid, minimize, and
taking into consideration potential impacts of cross-media
control adverse impacts to human health, safety, or the
transfer of contaminants during treatment (e.g., from water to
environment.
air or land)
In the context of their overall ESHS management system, facilities
should:
APRIL 30, 2007 25

WORLD BANK GROUP
When wastewater treatment is required prior to discharge, the the receiving water into consideration, should also influence the
level of treatment should be based on: acceptable pollution loadings and effluent discharge quality.
Additional considerations that should be included in the setting of
Whether wastewater is being discharged to a sanitary sewer project-specific performance levels for wastewater effluents
system, or to surface waters include:
National and local standards as reflected in permit
requirements and sewer system capacity to convey and treat Process wastewater treatment standards consistent with
wastewater if discharge is to sanitary sewer applicable Industry Sector EHS Guidelines. Projects for
Assimilative capacity of the receiving water for the load of which there are no industry-specific guidelines should
contaminant being discharged wastewater if discharge is to reference the effluent quality guidelines of an industry sector
surface water with suitably analogous processes and effluents;
Intended use of the receiving water body (e.g. as a source of Compliance with national or local standards for sanitary
drinking water, recreation, irrigation, navigation, or other) wastewater discharges or, in their absence, the indicative
Presence of sensitive receptors (e.g., endangered species) guideline values applicable to sanitary wastewater
or habitats discharges shown in Table 1.3.1 below ;
Good International Industry Practice (GIIP) for the relevant Temperature of wastewater prior to discharge does not result
industry sector in an increase greater than 3C of ambient temperature at
the edge of a scientifically established mixing zone which
General Liquid Effluent Quality takes into account ambient water quality, receiving water use
and assimilative capacity among other considerations.
Discharge to Surface Water
Discharges of process wastewater, sanitary wastewater, Discharge to Sanitary Sewer Systems
wastewater from utility operations or stormwater to surface water Discharges of industrial wastewater, sanitary wastewater,
should not result in contaminant concentrations in excess of local wastewater from utility operations or stormwater into public or
ambient water quality criteria or, in the absence of local criteria, private wastewater treatment systems should:
other sources of ambient water quality.35 Receiving water use36
and assimilative capacity37, taking other sources of discharges to Meet the pretreatment and monitoring requirements of the
sewer treatment system into which it discharges.
35 An example is the US EPA National Recommended Water Quality Criteria

Not interfere, directly or indirectly, with the operation and
http://www.epa.gov/waterscience/criteria/wqcriteria.html maintenance of the collection and treatment systems, or
36 Examples of receiving water uses as may be designated by local authorities pose a risk to worker health and safety, or adversely impact
include: drinking water (with some level of treatment), recreation, aquaculture,
irrigation, general aquatic life, ornamental, and navigation. Examples of health-
based guideline values for receiving waters include World Health Organization
(WHO) guidelines for recreational use
(http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/guidelines/en/index.html) the area or region. A seasonally representative baseline assessment of ambient
37 The assimilative capacity of the receiving water body depends on numerous water quality may be required for use with established scientific methods and
mathematical models to estimate potential impact to the receiving water from an
factors including, but not limited to, the total volume of water, flow rate, flushing effluent source.
rate of the water body and the loading of pollutants from other effluent sources in
APRIL 30, 2007 26

WORLD BANK GROUP
characteristics of residuals from wastewater treatment Properly designed and installed in accordance with local
operations. regulations and guidance to prevent any hazard to public
Be discharged into municipal or centralized wastewater health or contamination of land, surface or groundwater.
treatment systems that have adequate capacity to meet local Well maintained to allow effective operation.
regulatory requirements for treatment of wastewater Installed in areas with sufficient soil percolation for the design
generated from the project. Pretreatment of wastewater to wastewater loading rate.
meet regulatory requirements before discharge from the Installed in areas of stable soils that are nearly level, well
project site is required if the municipal or centralized drained, and permeable, with enough separation between the
wastewater treatment system receiving wastewater from the drain field and the groundwater table or other receiving
project does not have adequate capacity to maintain waters.
regulatory compliance.
Wastewater Management
Land Application of Treated Effluent Wastewater management includes water conservation,
The quality of treated process wastewater, wastewater from utility wastewater treatment, stormwater management, and wastewater
operations or stormwater discharged on land, including wetlands, and water quality monitoring.
should be established based on local regulatory requirements. .
Where land is used as part of the treatment system and the Industrial Wastewater
ultimate receptor is surface water, water quality guidelines for Industrial wastewater generated from industrial operations
surface water discharges specific to the industry sector process includes process wastewater, wastewater from utility operations,,
should apply.38 Potential impact on soil, groundwater, and surface runoff from process and materials staging areas, and
water, in the context of protection, conservation and long term miscellaneous activities including wastewater from laboratories,
sustainability of water and land resources should be assessed equipment maintenance shops, etc.. The pollutants in an industrial
when land is used as part of any wastewater treatment system. wastewater may include acids or bases (exhibited as low or high
pH), soluble organic chemicals causing depletion of dissolved
Septic Systems oxygen, suspended solids, nutrients (phosphorus, nitrogen),
Septic systems are commonly used for treatment and disposal of heavy metals (e.g. cadmium, chromium, copper, lead, mercury,
domestic sanitary sewage in areas with no sewerage collection nickel, zinc), cyanide, toxic organic chemicals, oily materials, and
networks, Septic systems should only be used for treatment of volatile materials. , as well as from thermal characteristics of the
sanitary sewage, and unsuitable for industrial wastewater discharge (e.g., elevated temperature). Transfer of pollutants to
treatment. When septic systems are the selected form of another phase, such as air, soil, or the sub-surface, should be
wastewater disposal and treatment, they should be: minimized through process and engineering controls.
38 Additional guidance on water quality considerations for land application is Process Wastewater Examples of treatment approaches
available in the WHO Guidelines for the Safe Use of Wastewater, Excreta and
Greywater. Volume 2: Wastewater Use in Agriculture
typically used in the treatment of industrial wastewater are
http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/wastewater/gsuweg2/en/index.html summarized in Annex 1.3.1. While the choice of treatment
APRIL 30, 2007 27

WORLD BANK GROUP
technology is driven by wastewater characteristics, the actual account ambient water quality, receiving water use, potential
performance of this technology depends largely on the adequacy receptors and assimilative capacity among other
of its design, equipment selection, as well as operation and considerations;
maintenance of its installed facilities. Adequate resources are Minimizing use of antifouling and corrosion inhibiting
required for proper operation and maintenance of a treatment chemicals by ensuring appropriate depth of water intake and
facility, and performance is strongly dependent on the technical use of screens. Least hazardous alternatives should be used
ability and training of its operational staff. One or more treatment with regards to toxicity, biodegradability, bioavailability, and
technologies may be used to achieve the desired discharge bioaccumulation potential. Dose applied should accord with
quality and to maintain consistent compliance with regulatory local regulatory requirements and manufacturer
requirements. The design and operation of the selected recommendations;
wastewater treatment technologies should avoid uncontrolled air Testing for residual biocides and other pollutants of concern
emissions of volatile chemicals from wastewaters. Residuals from should be conducted to determine the need for dose
industrial wastewater treatment operations should be disposed in adjustments or treatment of cooling water prior to discharge.
compliance with local regulatory requirements, in the absence of
which disposal has to be consistent with protection of public health Stormwater Management - Stormwater includes any surface
and safety, and conservation and long term sustainability of water runoff and flows resulting from precipitation, drainage or other
and land resources. sources. Typically stormwater runoff contains suspended

sediments, metals, petroleum hydrocarbons, Polycyclic Aromatic
Wastewater from Utilities Operations - Utility operations such Hydrocarbons (PAHs), coliform, etc. Rapid runoff, even of
as cooling towers and demineralization systems may result in high uncontaminated stormwater, also degrades the quality of the
rates of water consumption, as well as the potential release of receiving water by eroding stream beds and banks. In order to
high temperature water containing high dissolved solids, residues reduce the need for stormwater treatment, the following principles
of biocides, residues of other cooling system anti-fouling agents, should be applied:
etc. Recommended water management strategies for utility
operations include: Stormwater should be separated from process and sanitary
wastewater streams in order to reduce the volume of
Adoption of water conservation opportunities for facility wastewater to be treated prior to discharge
cooling systems as provided in the Water Conservation Surface runoff from process areas or potential sources of
section below; contamination should be prevented
Use of heat recovery methods (also energy efficiency Where this approach is not practical, runoff from process and
improvements) or other cooling methods to reduce the storage areas should be segregated from potentially less
temperature of heated water prior to discharge to ensure the contaminated runoff
discharge water temperature does not result in an increase Runoff from areas without potential sources of contamination
greater than 3C of ambient temperature at the edge of a should be minimized (e.g. by minimizing the area of
scientifically established mixing zone which takes into impermeable surfaces) and the peak discharge rate should
APRIL 30, 2007 28

WORLD BANK GROUP
be reduced (e.g. by using vegetated swales and retention medical infirmaries, water softening etc. may also be discharged
ponds); to the sanitary wastewater treatment system. Recommended
Where stormwater treatment is deemed necessary to protect sanitary wastewater management strategies include:
the quality of receiving water bodies, priority should be given
to managing and treating the first flush of stormwater runoff Segregation of wastewater streams to ensure compatibility
with selected treatment option (e.g. septic system which can
where the majority of potential contaminants tend to be
only accept domestic sewage);
present;
Segregation and pretreatment of oil and grease containing
When water quality criteria allow, stormwater should be
effluents (e.g. use of a grease trap) prior to discharge into
managed as a resource, either for groundwater recharge or
sewer systems;
for meeting water needs at the facility;
If sewage from the industrial facility is to be discharged to
Oil water separators and grease traps should be installed
surface water, treatment to meet national or local standards
and maintained as appropriate at refueling facilities,
for sanitary wastewater discharges or, in their absence, the
workshops, parking areas, fuel storage and containment
indicative guideline values applicable to sanitary wastewater
areas.
discharges shown in Table 1.3.1;
Sludge from stormwater catchments or collection and
If sewage from the industrial facility is to be discharged to
treatment systems may contain elevated levels of pollutants
either a septic system, or where land is used as part of the
and should be disposed in compliance with local regulatory
requirements, in the absence of which disposal has to be treatment system, treatment to meet applicable national or
local standards for sanitary wastewater discharges is
consistent with protection of public health and safety, and
required.
conservation and long term sustainability of water and land
resources. Sludge from sanitary wastewater treatment systems should
be disposed in compliance with local regulatory
Sanitary Wastewater requirements, in the absence of which disposal has to be
Sanitary wastewater from industrial facilities may include effluents consistent with protection of public health and safety, and
from domestic sewage, food service, and laundry facilities serving conservation and long term sustainability of water and land
site employees. Miscellaneous wastewater from laboratories, resources.
APRIL 30, 2007 29

WORLD BANK GROUP
or a non-hazardous waste and managed accordingly as described

Table 1.3.1 Indicative Values for Treated in the Waste Management section of this document.
Sanitary Sewage Discharges a
Pollutants Units Guideline Value Occupational Health and Safety Issues in
pH pH 6 9 Wastewater Treatment Operations
Wastewater treatment facility operators may be exposed to
BOD mg/l 30
physical, chemical, and biological hazards depending on the
COD mg/l 125
design of the facilities and the types of wastewater effluents
Total nitrogen mg/l 10 managed. Examples of these hazards include the potential for
Total phosphorus mg/l 2 trips and falls into tanks, confined space entries for maintenance
Oil and grease mg/l 10 operations, and inhalation of VOCs, bioaerosols, and methane,
contact with pathogens and vectors, and use of potentially
Total suspended solids mg/l 50
hazardous chemicals, including chlorine, sodium and calcium
Total coliform bacteria MPN b / 100 ml 400a
hypochlorite, and ammonia. Detailed recommendations for the
Notes:
a Not applicable to centralized, municipal, wastewater treatment systems management of occupational health and safety issues are
which are included in EHS Guidelines for Water and Sanitation.
b MPN = Most Probable Number presented in the relevant section of this document. Additional
guidance specifically applicable to wastewater treatment systems
Emissions from Wastewater Treatment Operations is provided in the EHS Guidelines for Water and Sanitation.
Air emissions from wastewater treatment operations may include
hydrogen sulfide, methane, ozone (in the case of ozone Monitoring
disinfection), volatile organic compounds (e.g., chloroform A wastewater and water quality monitoring program with adequate
generated from chlorination activities and other volatile organic resources and management oversight should be developed and
compounds (VOCs) from industrial wastewater), gaseous or implemented to meet the objective(s) of the monitoring program.
volatile chemicals used for disinfection processes (e.g., chlorine The wastewater and water quality monitoring program should
and ammonia), and bioaerosols. Odors from treatment facilities consider the following elements:
can also be a nuisance to workers and the surrounding
community. Recommendations for the management of emissions Monitoring parameters: The parameters selected for
are presented in the Air Emissions and Ambient Air Quality monitoring should be indicative of the pollutants of concern
section of this document and in the EHS Guidelines for Water and from the process, and should include parameters that are
Sanitation. regulated under compliance requirements;
Residuals from Wastewater Treatment Operations Monitoring type and frequency: Wastewater monitoring
Sludge from a waste treatment plant needs to be evaluated on a should take into consideration the discharge characteristics
case-by-case basis to establish whether it constitutes a hazardous from the process over time. Monitoring of discharges from
processes with batch manufacturing or seasonal process
variations should take into consideration of time-dependent
APRIL 30, 2007 30

WORLD BANK GROUP
variations in discharges and, therefore, is more complex than

monitoring of continuous discharges. Effluents from highly
variable processes may need to be sampled more frequently
or through composite methods. Grab samples or, if
automated equipment permits, composite samples may offer
more insight on average concentrations of pollutants over a
24-hour period. Composite samplers may not be appropriate
where analytes of concern are short-lived (e.g., quickly
degraded or volatile).
Monitoring locations: The monitoring location should be

selected with the objective of providing representative
monitoring data. Effluent sampling stations may be located
at the final discharge, as well as at strategic upstream points
prior to merging of different discharges. Process discharges
should not be diluted prior or after treatment with the
objective of meeting the discharge or ambient water quality
standards.
Data quality: Monitoring programs should apply

internationally approved methods for sample collection,
preservation and analysis. Sampling should be conducted by
or under the supervision of trained individuals. Analysis
should be conducted by entities permitted or certified for this
purpose. Sampling and Analysis Quality Assurance/Quality
Control (QA/QC) plans should be prepared and,
implemented. QA/QC documentation should be included in
monitoring reports.
APRIL 30, 2007 31

WORLD BANK GROUP
Annex 1.3.1 - Examples of Industrial Wastewater Treatment Approaches
Pollutant/Parameter Control Options / Principle Common End of Pipe Control Technology

pH Chemical, Equalization Acid/Base addition, Flow equalization
Oil and Grease / TPH Phase separation Dissolved Air Floatation, oil water separator, grease trap
TSS - Settleable Settling, Size Exclusion Sedimentation basin, clarifier, centrifuge, screens
Floatation, Filtration - traditional and Dissolved air floatation, Multimedia filter, sand filter, fabric filter,
TSS - Non-Settleable
tangential ultrafiltration, microfiltration
Hi - BOD (> 2 Kg/m3) Biological - Anaerobic Suspended growth, attached growth, hybrid
Lo - BOD (< 2 Kg/m3) Biological - Aerobic, Facultative Suspended growth, attached growth, hybrid
Oxidation, Adsorption, Size
COD - Non-Biodegradable Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon, Membranes
Exclusion
Metals - Particulate and Coagulation, flocculation,
Flash mix with settling, filtration - traditional and tangential
Soluble precipitation, size exclusion
Coagulation, flocculation, Flash mix with settling, filtration - traditional and tangential, Chemical
Inorganics / Non-metals precipitation, size exclusion, oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon, Reverse Osmosis,
Oxidation, Adsorption Evaporation
Biological - Aerobic, Anaerobic, Biological : Suspended growth, attached growth, hybrid; Chemical
Organics - VOCs and SVOCs
Facultative; Adsorption, Oxidation oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon
Emissions Odors and Capture Active or Passive; Biological : Attached growth; Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation,
VOCs Biological; Adsorption, Oxidation Activated Carbon
Biological Nutrient Removal, Aerobic/Anoxic biological treatment, chemical hydrolysis and air
Nutrients
Chemical, Physical, Adsorption stripping, chlorination, ion exchange
Biological - Aerobic, Anaerobic,
Color Biological Aerobic, Chemical oxidation, Activated Carbon
Facultative; Adsorption, Oxidation
Temperature Evaporative Cooling Surface Aerators, Flow Equalization
TDS Concentration, Size Exclusion Evaporation, crystallization, Reverse Osmosis
Active Ingredients/Emerging Adsorption, Oxidation, Size Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon, Ion
Contaminants Exclusion, Concentration Exchange, Reverse Osmosis, Evaporation, Crystallization
Adsorption,Size Exclusion,
Radionuclides Ion Exchange, Reverse Osmosis, Evaporation, Crystallization
Concentration
Pathogens Disinfection, Sterilization Chlorine, Ozone, Peroxide, UV, Thermal
Adsorption, Oxidation, Size Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon, Evaporation,
Toxicity
Exclusion, Concentration crystallization, Reverse Osmosis
APRIL 30, 2007 32

WATER CONSERVATION
WORLD BANK GROUP
1.4 Water Conservation
Applicability and Approach .............................................33 Water Monitoring and Management

Water Monitoring and Management................................33
Process Water Reuse and Recycling..............................33 The essential elements of a water management program
Building Facility Operations ............................................34 involve:
Cooling Systems............................................................34
Heating Systems............................................................34
Identification, regular measurement, and recording of
principal flows within a facility;
Applicability and Approach Definition and regular review of performance targets, which
Water conservation programs should be implemented are adjusted to account for changes in major factors
commensurate with the magnitude and cost of water use. affecting water use (e.g. industrial production rate);
These programs should promote the continuous reduction in
Regular comparison of water flows with performance
water consumption and achieve savings in the water
targets to identify where action should be taken to reduce
pumping, treatment and disposal costs. Water conservation
water use.
measures may include water monitoring/management
Water measurement (metering) should emphasize areas of
techniques; process and cooling/heating water recycling, greatest water use. Based on review of metering data,
reuse, and other techniques; and sanitary water conservation unaccounted useindicating major leaks at industrial facilities
techniques. could be identified.
General recommendations include:

Process Water Reuse and Recycling
Storm/Rainwater harvesting and use Opportunities for water savings in industrial processes are
Zero discharge design/Use of treated waste water to be highly industry-specific. However, the following techniques have
included in project design processes all been used successfully, and should be considered in
Use of localized recirculation systems in conjunction with the development of the metering system
plant/facility/shops (as opposed to centralized described above.
recirculation system), with provision only for makeup

Washing Machines: Many washing machines use large
water
quantities of hot water. Use can increase as nozzles
Use of dry process technologies e.g. dry quenching
become enlarged due to repeated cleaning and /or wear.
Process water system pressure management
Monitor machine water use, compare with specification,
Project design to have measures for adequate water
and replace nozzles when water and heat use reaches
collection, spill control and leakage control system
levels warranting such work.
Water reuse: Common water reuse applications include

countercurrent rinsing, for example in multi-stage washing
APRIL 30, 2007 33

WATER CONSERVATION
WORLD BANK GROUP
and rinsing processes, or reusing waste water from one the facility, whether sanitary or including other activities
process for another with less exacting water such as showering or catering
requirements. For example, using bleaching rinse water Regularly maintain plumbing, and identify and repair leaks
for textile washing, or bottle-washer rinse water for Shut off water to unused areas
bottle crate washing, or even washing the floor. More Install self-closing taps, automatic shut-off valves, spray
sophisticated reuse projects requiring treatment of water nozzles, pressure reducing valves, and water conserving
before reuse are also sometimes practical. fixtures (e.g. low flow shower heads, faucets, toilets,
Water jets/sprays: If processes use water jets or sprays urinals; and spring loaded or sensored faucets)
(e.g. to keep conveyors clean or to cool product) review Operate dishwashers and laundries on full loads, and only
the accuracy of the spray pattern to prevent when needed
unnecessary water loss. Install water-saving equipment in lavatories, such as low-

flow toilets
Flow control optimization: Industrial processes
sometimes require the use of tanks, which are refilled to Cooling Systems
control losses. It is often possible to reduce the rate of
Water conservation opportunities in cooling systems include:
water supply to such tanks, and sometimes to reduce
tank levels to reduce spillage. If the process uses water Use of closed circuit cooling systems with cooling
cooling sprays, it may be possible to reduce flow while towers rather than once-through cooling systems
maintaining cooling performance. Testing can Limiting condenser or cooling tower blowdown to the
determine the optimum balance. minimum required to prevent unacceptable

accumulation of dissolved solids
o If hoses are used in cleaning, use flow controls to
Use of air cooling rather than evaporative cooling,
restrict wasteful water flow
although this may increase electricity use in the
o Consider the use of high pressure, low volume
cooling system
cleaning systems rather than using large volumes
Use of treated waste water for cooling towers
of water sprayed from hosepipes
Reusing/recycling cooling tower blowdown
o Using flow timers and limit switches to control
water use
Heating Systems
o Using clean-up practices rather than hosing down
Heating systems based on the circulation of low or medium
pressure hot water (which do not consume water) should be
Building Facility Operations
closed. If they do consume water, regular maintenance should
Consumption of building and sanitary water is typically less
be conducted to check for leaks. However, large quantities of
than that used in industrial processes. However, savings can
water may be used by steam systems, and this can be reduced
readily be identified, as outlined below:
by the following measures:
Compare daily water use per employee to existing
benchmarks taking into consideration the primary use at
APRIL 30, 2007 34

WATER CONSERVATION
WORLD BANK GROUP
Repair of steam and condensate leaks, and repair

of all failed steam traps
Return of condensate to the boilerhouse, and use
of heat exchangers (with condensate return) rather
than direct steam injection where process permits
Flash steam recovery
Minimizing boiler blowdown consistent with
maintaining acceptably low dissolved solids in
boiler water. Use of reverse osmosis boiler feed
water treatment substantially reduces the need for
boiler blowdown
Minimizing deaerator heating
APRIL 30, 2007 35

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT
WORLD BANK GROUP
1.5 Hazardous Materials Management

When a hazardous material is no longer usable for its original
Applicability and Approach .............................................36 purpose and is intended for disposal, but still has hazardous
General Hazardous Materials Management....................37 properties, it is considered a hazardous waste (see Section 1.4).
Hazard Assessment ...............................................37
Management Actions..............................................37 This guidance is intended to be applied in conjunction with
Release Prevention and Control Planning ............38
Occupational Health and Safety ...........................38 traditional occupational health and safety and emergency
Process Knowledge and Documentation ..............39
preparedness programs which are included in Section 2.0 on
Preventive Measures..............................................39
Hazardous Materials Transfer..............................39 Occupational Health and Safety Management, and Section 3.7 on
Overfill Protection................................................39 Emergency Preparedness and Response. Guidance on the
Reaction, Fire, and Explosion Prevention.............40
Control Measures...................................................40 Transport of Hazardous Materials is provided in Section 3.5.
Secondary Containment (Liquids) ........................40
Storage Tank and Piping Leak Detection..............41 This section is divided into two main subsections:
Underground Storage Tanks (USTs) ....................41
Management of Major Hazards.......................................42
General Hazardous Materials Management: Guidance applicable
Management Actions..............................................42
Preventive Measures..............................................43 to all projects or facilities that handle or store any quantity of
Emergency Preparedness and Response ...............44 hazardous materials.
Community Involvement and Awareness.................44
Management of Major Hazards: Additional guidance for projects or
facilities that store or handle hazardous materials at, or above,
Applicability and Approach threshold quantities39, and thus require special treatment to
These guidelines apply to projects that use, store, or handle any
prevent accidents such as fire, explosions, leaks or spills, and to
quantity of hazardous materials (Hazmats), defined as materials
prepare and respond to emergencies.
that represent a risk to human health, property, or the environment
due to their physical or chemical characteristics. Hazmats can be The overall objective of hazardous materials management is to
classified according to the hazard as explosives; compressed avoid or, when avoidance is not feasible, minimize uncontrolled
gases, including toxic or flammable gases; flammable liquids; releases of hazardous materials or accidents (including explosion
flammable solids; oxidizing substances; toxic materials; and fire) during their production, handling, storage and use. This
radioactive material; and corrosive substances. Guidance on the objective can be achieved by:
transport of hazardous materials is covered in Section 3 of this
document.
39 For examples, threshold quantities should be those established for emergency

planning purposes such as provided in the US Environmental Protection Agency.
Protection of Environment (Title Threshold quantities are provided in the US
Environmental Protection Agency. Protection of Environment (Title 40 CFR Parts
68, 112, and 355).
APRIL 30, 2007 36

WORLD BANK GROUP
Establishing hazardous materials management priorities The types and amounts of hazardous materials present in the
based on hazard analysis of risky operations identified project. This information should be recorded and should
through Social and Environmental Assessment; include a summary table with the following information:
Where practicable, avoiding or minimizing the use of
o Name and description (e.g. composition of a mixture) of
hazardous materials. For example, non-hazardous materials
the Hazmat
have been found to substitute asbestos in building materials,
o Classification (e.g. code, class or division) of the
PCBs in electrical equipment, persistent organic pollutants
Hazmat
(POPs) in pesticides formulations, and ozone depleting
o Internationally accepted regulatory reporting threshold
substances in refrigeration systems;
quantity or national equivalent40 of the Hazmat
Preventing uncontrolled releases of hazardous materials to
o Quantity of Hazmat used per month
the environment or uncontrolled reactions that might result in
o Characteristic(s) that make(s) the Hazmat hazardous
fire or explosion;
(e.g. flammability, toxicity)
Using engineering controls (containment, automatic alarms,
Analysis of potential spill and release scenarios using
and shut-off systems) commensurate with the nature of
available industry statistics on spills and accidents where
hazard;
available
Implementing management controls (procedures,
Analysis of the potential for uncontrolled reactions such as
inspections, communications, training, and drills) to address
fire and explosions
residual risks that have not been prevented or controlled
Analysis of potential consequences based on the physical-
through engineering measures.
geographical characteristics of the project site, including
aspects such as its distance to settlements, water resources,
General Hazardous Materials Management
and other environmentally sensitive areas
Projects which manufacture, handle, use, or store hazardous
materials should establish management programs that are Hazard assessment should be performed by specialized
commensurate with the potential risks present. The main professionals using internationally-accepted methodologies such
objectives of projects involving hazardous materials should be the as Hazardous Operations Analysis (HAZOP), Failure Mode and
protection of the workforce and the prevention and control of Effects Analysis (FMEA), and Hazard Identification (HAZID).
releases and accidents. These objectives should be addressed
by integrating prevention and control measures, management
actions, and procedures into day-to-day business activities. Management Actions
Potentially applicable elements of a management program include
The management actions to be included in a Hazardous Materials
the following: Management Plan should be commensurate with the level of
Hazard Assessment
The level of risk should be established through an on-going 40 Threshold quantities are provided in the US Environmental Protection Agency.
assessment process based on: Protection of Environment (Title 40 CFR Parts 68, 112, and 355).
APRIL 30, 2007 37

WORLD BANK GROUP
potential risks associated with the production, handling, storage, external resources for equipment and personnel, if
and use of hazardous materials. necessary, to supplement internal resources
Description of response activities in the event of a spill,
Release Prevention and Control Planning release, or other chemical emergency including:
Where there is risk of a spill of uncontrolled hazardous materials, o Internal and external notification procedures
facilities should prepare a spill control, prevention, and o Specific responsibilities of individuals or groups
countermeasure plan as a specific component of their Emergency o Decision process for assessing severity of the release,
Preparedness and Response Plan (described in more detail in and determining appropriate actions
Section 3.7). The plan should be tailored to the hazards o Facility evacuation routes
associated with the project, and include: o Post-event activities such as clean-up and disposal,
incident investigation, employee re-entry, and
Training of operators on release prevention, including drills
restoration of spill response equipment.
specific to hazardous materials as part of emergency
preparedness response training
Occupational Health and Safety
Implementation of inspection programs to maintain the
The Hazardous Materials Management Plan should address
mechanical integrity and operability of pressure vessels,
applicable, essential elements of occupational health and safety
tanks, piping systems, relief and vent valve systems,
management as described in Section 2.0 on Occupational Health
containment infrastructure, emergency shutdown systems,
and Safety, including:
controls and pumps, and associated process equipment
Preparation of written Standard Operating Procedures Job safety analysis to identify specific potential occupational
(SOPs) for filling USTs, ASTs or other containers or hazards and industrial hygiene surveys, as appropriate, to
equipment as well as for transfer operations by personnel monitor and verify chemical exposure levels, and compare
trained in the safe transfer and filling of the hazardous with applicable occupational exposure standards41
material, and in spill prevention and response
Hazard communication and training programs to prepare
SOPs for the management of secondary containment workers to recognize and respond to workplace chemical
structures, specifically the removal of any accumulated fluid, hazards. Programs should include aspects of hazard
such as rainfall, to ensure that the intent of the system is not identification, safe operating and materials handling
accidentally or willfully defeated procedures, safe work practices, basic emergency
Identification of locations of hazardous materials and procedures, and special hazards unique to their jobs.
associated activities on an emergency plan site map
Documentation of availability of specific personal protective 41 Including: Threshold Limit Value (TLV) occupational exposure guidelines and
Biological Exposure Indices (BEIs), American Conference of Governmental
equipment and training needed to respond to an emergency Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH), http://www.acgih.org/TLV/; U.S. National Institute
for Occupational Health and Safety (NIOSH), http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/npg/;
Documentation of availability of spill response equipment Permissible Exposure Limits (PELs), U.S. Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA),
sufficient to handle at least initial stages of a spill and a list of http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owadisp.show_document?p_table=STANDARD
S&p_id=9992; Indicative Occupational Exposure Limit Values, European Union,
http://europe.osha.eu.int/good_practice/risks/ds/oel/; and other similar sources.
APRIL 30, 2007 38

WORLD BANK GROUP
Training should incorporate information from Material Safety Preventive Measures

Data Sheets42 (MSDSs) for hazardous materials being Hazardous Materials Transfer
handled. MSDSs should be readily accessible to employees
Uncontrolled releases of hazardous materials may result from
in their local language.
small cumulative events, or from more significant equipment
Definition and implementation of permitted maintenance failure associated with events such as manual or mechanical
activities, such as hot work or confined space entries transfer between storage systems or process equipment.
Provision of suitable personal protection equipment (PPE) Recommended practices to prevent hazardous material releases
(footwear, masks, protective clothing and goggles in from processes include:
appropriate areas), emergency eyewash and shower
Use of dedicated fittings, pipes, and hoses specific to
stations, ventilation systems, and sanitary facilities
materials in tanks (e.g., all acids use one type of connection,
Monitoring and record-keeping activities, including audit
all caustics use another), and maintaining procedures to
procedures designed to verify and record the effectiveness of
prevent addition of hazardous materials to incorrect tanks
prevention and control of exposure to occupational hazards,
Use of transfer equipment that is compatible and suitable for
and maintaining accident and incident investigation reports
the characteristics of the materials transferred and designed
on file for a period of at least five years
to ensure safe transfer
Process Knowledge and Documentation Regular inspection, maintenance and repair of fittings, pipes
The Hazardous Materials Management Plan should be and hoses
incorporated into, and consistent with, the other elements of the Provision of secondary containment, drip trays or other
facility ES/OHS MS and include: overflow and drip containment measures, for hazardous
materials containers at connection points or other possible
Written process safety parameters (i.e., hazards of the
overflow points.
chemical substances, safety equipment specifications, safe
operation ranges for temperature, pressure, and other Overfill Protection
applicable parameters, evaluation of the consequences of
Overfills of vessels and tanks should be prevented as they are
deviations, etc.) among the most common causes of spills resulting in soil and
Written operating procedures water contamination, and among the easiest to prevent.
Compliance audit procedures Recommended overfill protection measures include:
Prepare written procedures for transfer operations that

includes a checklist of measures to follow during filling
operations and the use of filling operators trained in these
procedures
Installation of gauges on tanks to measure volume inside
42 MSDSs are produced by the manufacturer, but might not be prepared for
Use of dripless hose connections for vehicle tank and fixed
chemical intermediates that are not distributed in commerce. In these cases,
employers still need to provide workers with equivalent information. connections with storage tanks
APRIL 30, 2007 39

WORLD BANK GROUP
Provision of automatic fill shutoff valves on storage tanks to Prohibition of all sources of ignition from areas near
prevent overfilling flammable storage tanks
Use of a catch basin around the fill pipe to collect spills
Use of piping connections with automatic overfill protection Control Measures
(float valve) Secondary Containment (Liquids)
Pumping less volume than available capacity into the tank or A critical aspect for controlling accidental releases of liquid
vessel by ordering less material than its available capacity hazardous materials during storage and transfer is the provision of
Provision of overfill or over pressure vents that allow secondary containment. It is not necessary for secondary
controlled release to a capture point containment methods to meet long term material compatibility as
with primary storage and piping, but their design and construction
Reaction, Fire, and Explosion Prevention should hold released materials effectively until they can be
Reactive, flammable, and explosive materials should also be detected and safely recovered. Appropriate secondary
managed to avoid uncontrolled reactions or conditions resulting in containment structures consist of berms, dikes, or walls capable of
fire or explosion. Recommended prevention practices include: containing the larger of 110 percent of the largest tank or 25%
percent of the combined tank volumes in areas with above-ground
Storage of incompatible materials (acids, bases, flammables,
tanks with a total storage volume equal or greater than 1,000 liters
oxidizers, reactive chemicals) in separate areas, and with
and will be made of impervious, chemically resistant material.
containment facilities separating material storage areas
Secondary containment design should also consider means to
Provision of material-specific storage for extremely
prevent contact between incompatible materials in the event of a
hazardous or reactive materials
release.
Use of flame arresting devices on vents from flammable
storage containers Other secondary containment measures that should be applied
Provision of grounding and lightning protection for tank depending on site-specific conditions include:
farms, transfer stations, and other equipment that handles
Transfer of hazardous materials from vehicle tanks to storage
flammable materials
in areas with surfaces sufficiently impervious to avoid loss to
Selection of materials of construction compatible with
the environment and sloped to a collection or a containment
products stored for all parts of storage and delivery systems,
structure not connected to municipal wastewater/stormwater
and avoiding reuse of tanks for different products without
collection system
checking material compatibility
Where it is not practical to provide permanent, dedicated
Storage of hazardous materials in an area of the facility
containment structures for transfer operations, one or more
separated from the main production works. Where proximity
alternative forms of spill containment should be provided,
is unavoidable, physical separation should be provided using
such as portable drain covers (which can be deployed for the
structures designed to prevent fire, explosion, spill, and other
duration of the operations), automatic shut-off valves on
emergency situations from affecting facility operations
storm water basins, or shut off valves in drainage or sewer
facilities, combined with oil-water separators
APRIL 30, 2007 40

WORLD BANK GROUP
Storage of drummed hazardous materials with a total volume Underground Storage Tanks (USTs)45
equal or greater than 1,000 liters in areas with impervious Although there are many environmental and safety advantages of
surfaces that are sloped or bermed to contain a minimum of underground storage of hazardous materials, including reduced
25 percent of the total storage volume risk of fire or explosion, and lower vapor losses into the
Provision of secondary containment for components (tanks, atmosphere, leaks of hazardous materials can go undetected for
pipes) of the hazardous material storage system, to the long periods of time with potential for soil and groundwater
extent feasible contamination. Examples of techniques to manage these risks
Conducting periodic (e.g. daily or weekly) reconciliation of include:
tank contents, and inspection of visible portions of tanks and
Avoiding use of USTs for storage of highly soluble organic
piping for leaks;
materials
Use of double-walled, composite, or specially coated storage
Assessing local soil corrosion potential, and installing and
and piping systems particularly in the use of underground
maintaining cathodic protection (or equivalent rust protection)
storage tanks (USTs) and underground piping. If double-
for steel tanks
walled systems are used, they should provide a means of
For new installations, installing impermeable liners or
detecting leaks between the two walls.
structures (e.g., concrete vaults) under and around tanks and
lines that direct any leaked product to monitoring ports at the
Storage Tank and Piping Leak Detection
lowest point of the liner or structure
Leak detection may be used in conjunction with secondary
Monitoring the surface above any tank for indications of soil
containment, particularly in high-risk locations43. Leak detection is
movement
especially important in situations where secondary containment is
Reconciling tank contents by measuring the volume in store
not feasible or practicable, such as in long pipe runs. Acceptable
with the expected volume, given the stored quantity at last
leak detection methods include:
stocking, and deliveries to and withdrawals from the store
Use of automatic pressure loss detectors on pressurized or Testing integrity by volumetric, vacuum, acoustic, tracers, or
long distance piping other means on all tanks at regular intervals
Use of approved or certified integrity testing methods on Considering the monitoring groundwater of quality down
piping or tank systems, at regular intervals gradient of locations where multiple USTs are in use
Considering the use of SCADA 44 if financially feasible Evaluating the risk of existing UST in newly acquired facilities
to determine if upgrades are required for USTs that will be
continued to be used, including replacement with new
systems or permanent closure of abandoned USTs.
43 High-risk locations are places where the release of product from the storage
system could result in the contamination of drinking water source or those located Ensuring that new USTs are sited away from wells,
in water resource protection areas as designated by local authorities.
44 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
45 Additional details on the management of USTs is provided in the EHS

Guidelines for Retail Petroleum Stations.
APRIL 30, 2007 41

WORLD BANK GROUP
reservoirs and other source water protection areas and the prevention measures (see below) should be conducted at
floodplains, and maintained so as to prevent corrosion. least every three years and should include:
o Preparation of a report of the findings
Management of Major Hazards o Determination and documentation of the appropriate
In addition to the application of the above-referenced guidance on response to each finding
prevention and control of releases of hazardous materials, o Documentation that any deficiency has been corrected
projects involving production, handling, and storage of hazardous
Incident Investigation: Incidents can provide valuable
materials at or above threshold limits46 should prepare a
information about site hazards and the steps needed to
Hazardous Materials Risk Management Plan, in the context of its
prevent accidental releases. An incident investigation
overall ES/OHS MS, containing all of the elements presented
mechanism should include procedures for:
below.47 The objective of this guidance is the prevention and
o Initiation of the investigation promptly
control of catastrophic releases of toxic, reactive, flammable, or
o Summarizing the investigation in a report
explosive chemicals that may result in toxic, fire, or explosion
o Addressing the report findings and recommendations
hazards.48
o A review of the report with staff and contractors
Management Actions Employee Participation: A written plan of action should

Management of Change: These procedures should address: describe an active employee participation program for the
o The technical basis for changes in processes and prevention of accidents.
operations Contractors: There should be a mechanism for contractor

o The impact of changes on health and safety control which should include a requirement for them to
o Modification to operating procedures develop hazard materials management procedures that meet
o Authorization requirements the requirements of the hazardous materials management
o Employees affected plan. Their procedures should be consistent with those of
o Training needs the contracting company and the contractor workforce should
Compliance Audit: A compliance audit is a way to evaluate undergo the same training. Additionally, procedures should
compliance with the prevention program requirements for require that contractors are:
each process. A compliance audit covering each element of o Provided with safety performance procedures and safety
and hazard information
o Observe safety practices
46 Threshold quantities should be those established for emergency planning
purposes such as provided in the US Environmental Protection Agency. Protection o Act responsibly
of Environment (Title 40 CFR Parts 300-399 and 700 to 789).
o Have access to appropriate training for their employees
47 For further information and guidance, please refer to International Finance
Corporation (IFC) Hazardous Materials Risk Management Manual. Washington, o Ensure that their employees know process hazards and
D.C. December 2000.
48 The approach to the management of major hazards is largely based on an
applicable emergency actions
approach to Process Safety Management developed by the American Institute of
Chemical Engineers.
APRIL 30, 2007 42

WORLD BANK GROUP
o Prepare and submit training records for their employees initial startup, normal operations, temporary operations,
to the contracting company emergency shutdown, emergency operations, normal
o Inform their employees about the hazards presented by shutdown, and start-up following a normal or emergency
their work shutdown or major change). These SOPs should include
o Assess trends of repeated similar incidents special considerations for Mazmats used in the process or
o Develop and implement procedures to manage repeated operations (e.g. temperature control to prevent emissions of
similar incidents a volatile hazardous chemical; diversion of gaseous
discharges of hazardous pollutants from the process to a
Training: Project employees should be provided training on
temporary storage tank in case of emergency).
Hazmat management. The training program should include:
o A list of employees to be trained Other procedures to be developed include impacts of
o Specific training objectives deviations, steps to avoid deviations, prevention of chemical
o Mechanisms to achieve the objectives (i.e., hands-on exposure, exposure control measures, and equipment
workshops, videos, etc.) inspections.
o The means to determine whether the training program is
Mechanical Integrity of process equipment, piping and
effective
instrumentation: Inspection and maintenance procedures
o Training procedures for new hires and refresher courses
should be developed and documented to ensure mechanical
for existing employees
integrity of equipment, piping, and instrumentation and
prevent uncontrolled releases of hazardous materials from
Preventive Measures
the project. These procedures should be included as part of
The purpose of preventive measures is to ensure that safety-
the project SOPs. The specific process components of major
related aspects of the process and equipment are considered,
interest include pressure vessels and storage tanks, piping
limits to be placed on the operations are well known, and
systems, relief and vent systems and devices, emergency
accepted standards and codes are adopted, where they apply.
shutdown systems, controls, and pumps. Recommended
Process Safety Information: Procedures should be prepared aspects of the inspection and maintenance program include:
for each hazardous materials and include: o Developing inspection and maintenance procedures
o Compilation of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) o Establishing a quality assurance plan for equipment,
o Identification of maximum intended inventories and safe maintenance materials, and spare parts
upper/lower parameters o Conducting employee training on the inspection and
o Documentation of equipment specifications and of maintenance procedures
codes and standards used to design, build and operate o Conducting equipment, piping, and instrumentation
the process inspections and maintenance
o Identifying and correcting identified deficiencies
Operating Procedures: SOPs should be prepared for each
step of all processes or operations within the project (e.g.
APRIL 30, 2007 43

WORLD BANK GROUP
o Evaluating the inspection and maintenance results and, incorporated into and consistent with, the facilitys overall ES/OHS
if necessary, updating the inspection and maintenance MS, should be prepared to cover the following:49
procedures
Planning Coordination: Procedures should be prepared for:
o Reporting the results to management.
o Informing the public and emergency response agencies
o Documenting first aid and emergency medical treatment
Hot Work Permit: Hot work operations such as brazing,
o Taking emergency response actions
torch-cutting, grinding, soldering, and welding are
o Reviewing and updating the emergency response plan
associated with potential health, safety, and property hazards
to reflect changes, and ensuring that employees are
resulting from the fumes, gases, sparks, and hot metal and
informed of such changes
radiant energy produced during hot work. Hot work permit is
required for any operation involving open flames or producing Emergency Equipment: Procedures should be prepared for
heat and/or sparks. The section of SOPs on hot work should using, inspecting, testing, and maintaining the emergency
include the responsibility for hot work permitting, personal response equipment.
protection equipment (PPE), hot work procedures, personnel
Training: Employees and contractors should be trained on
training, and recordkeeping.
emergency response procedures.
Pre-Start Review: Procedures should be prepared to carry
out pre-start reviews when a modification is significant Community Involvement and Awareness
enough to require a change in safety information under the When hazardous materials are in use above threshold quantities,
management of change procedure. The procedures should: the management plan should include a system for community
o Confirm that the new or modified construction and/or awareness, notification and involvement that should be
equipment meet design specifications commensurate with the potential risks identified for the project
o Ensure that procedures for safety, operation, during the hazard assessment studies. This should include
maintenance, and emergency are adequate mechanisms for sharing the results of hazard and risk assessment
o Include a process hazard assessment, and resolve or studies in a timely, understandable and culturally sensitive manner
implement recommendations for new process with potentially affected communities that provides a means for
o Ensure that training for all affected employees is being public feedback. Community involvement activities should include:
conducted
Availability of general information to the potentially affected
community on the nature and extent of project operations,
Emergency Preparedness and Response
and the prevention and control measures in place to ensure
When handling hazardous materials, procedures and practices
no effects to human health
should be developed allowing for quick and efficient responses to
accidents that could result in human injury or damage to the
49 For a comprehensive treatment of the development of emergency response
environment. An Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan,
plans in conjunction with communities refer to the Awareness and Preparedness
for Emergencies at Local Level (APELL) Guidelines available at:
http://www.uneptie.org/pc/apell/publications/handbooks.html
APRIL 30, 2007 44

WORLD BANK GROUP
The potential for off-site effects to human health or the

environment following an accident at planned or existing
hazardous installations
Specific and timely information on appropriate behavior and
safety measures to be adopted in the event of an accident
including practice drills in locations with higher risks
Access to information necessary to understand the nature of
the possible effect of an accident and an opportunity to
contribute effectively, as appropriate, to decisions concerning
hazardous installations and the development of community
emergency preparedness plans.
APRIL 30, 2007 45

WASTE MANAGEMENT
WORLD BANK GROUP
residual waste from industrial operations, such as boiler slag,

1.6 Waste Management clinker, and fly ash.
Applicability and Approach .............................................46
General Waste Management..........................................47 Hazardous waste shares the properties of a hazardous
Waste Management Planning .................................47 material (e.g. ignitability, corrosivity, reactivity, or toxicity), or
Waste Prevention...................................................47
other physical, chemical, or biological characteristics that
Recycling and Reuse..............................................48
Treatment and Disposal..........................................48 may pose a potential risk to human health or the environment
Hazardous Waste Management......................................48 if improperly managed. Wastes may also be defined as
Waste Storage .......................................................48
hazardous by local regulations or international conventions,
Transportation........................................................49
Treatment and Disposal..........................................49 based on the origin of the waste and its inclusion on
Commercial or Government Waste Contractors....49 hazardous waste lists, or based on its characteristics.
Small Quantities of Hazardous Waste ..................50
Monitoring..............................................................50
Sludge from a waste treatment plant, water supply treatment
plant, or air pollution control facility, and other discarded
material, including solid, liquid, semisolid, or contained
gaseous material resulting from industrial operations needs
These guidelines apply to projects that generate, store, or
to be evaluated on a case-by-case basis to establish whether
handle any quantity of waste across a range of industry
it constitutes a hazardous or a non-hazardous waste.
sectors. It is not intended to apply to projects or facilities
where the primary business is the collection, transportation, Facilities that generate and store wastes should practice the
treatment, or disposal of wastes. Specific guidance for these following:
types of facilities is presented in the Environmental Health
Establishing waste management priorities at the outset
and Safety (EHS) Guidelines for Waste Management
of activities based on an understanding of potential
Facilities.
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) risks and
A waste is any solid, liquid, or contained gaseous material impacts and considering waste generation and its
that is being discarded by disposal, recycling, burning or consequences
incineration. It can be byproduct of a manufacturing process Establishing a waste management hierarchy that
or an obsolete commercial product that can no longer be considers prevention, reduction, reuse, recovery,
used for intended purpose and requires disposal. recycling, removal and finally disposal of wastes.
Avoiding or minimizing the generation waste materials,
Solid (non-hazardous) wastes generally include any garbage, as far as practicable
refuse. Examples of such waste include domestic trash and Where waste generation cannot be avoided but has
garbage; inert construction / demolition materials; refuse, been minimized, recovering and reusing waste
such as metal scrap and empty containers (except those
previously used to contain hazardous materials which should,
in principle, be managed as a hazardous waste); and
APRIL 30, 2007 46

WASTE MANAGEMENT
WORLD BANK GROUP
Where waste can not be recovered or reused, treating, Definition of procedures and operational controls for on-
destroying, and disposing of it in an environmentally site storage
sound manner Definition of options / procedures / operational controls
for treatment and final disposal
General Waste Management
The following guidance applies to the management of non- Waste Prevention
hazardous and hazardous waste. Additional guidance Processes should be designed and operated to prevent, or
specifically applicable to hazardous wastes is presented minimize, the quantities of wastes generated and hazards
below. Waste management should be addressed through a associated with the wastes generated in accordance with the
Waste management system that addresses issues linked to following strategy:
waste minimization, generation, transport, disposal, and
Substituting raw materials or inputs with less hazardous
monitoring.
or toxic materials, or with those where processing
generates lower waste volumes
Waste Management Planning
Applying manufacturing process that convert materials
Facilities that generate waste should characterize their waste
efficiently, providing higher product output yields,
according to composition, source, types of wastes produced,
including modification of design of the production
generation rates, or according to local regulatory
process, operating conditions, and process controls50
requirements. Effective planning and implementation of
Instituting good housekeeping and operating practices,
waste management strategies should include:
including inventory control to reduce the amount of
Review of new waste sources during planning, siting, waste resulting from materials that are out-of-date, off-
and design activities, including during equipment specification, contaminated, damaged, or excess to
modifications and process alterations, to identify plant needs
expected waste generation, pollution prevention Instituting procurement measures that recognize
opportunities, and necessary treatment, storage, and opportunities to return usable materials such as
disposal infrastructure containers and which prevents the over ordering of
Collection of data and information about the process materials
and waste streams in existing facilities, including
Minimizing hazardous waste generation by
characterization of waste streams by type, quantities, implementing stringent waste segregation to prevent the
and potential use/disposition commingling of non-hazardous and hazardous waste to
Establishment of priorities based on a risk analysis that be managed
takes into account the potential EHS risks during the
waste cycle and the availability of infrastructure to
manage the waste in an environmentally sound manner
50 Examples of waste prevention strategies include the concept of Lean
Definition of opportunities for source reduction, as well Manufacturing found at
as reuse and recycling http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/minimize/lean.htm
APRIL 30, 2007 47

WASTE MANAGEMENT
WORLD BANK GROUP
Recycling and Reuse wastes; properly designed, permitted and operated
In addition to the implementation of waste prevention landfills or incinerators designed for the respective type
strategies, the total amount of waste may be significantly of waste; or other methods known to be effective in the
reduced through the implementation of recycling plans, which safe, final disposal of waste materials such as
should consider the following elements: bioremediation.
Evaluation of waste production processes and Hazardous Waste Management

identification of potentially recyclable materials
Hazardous wastes should always be segregated from non-
Identification and recycling of products that can be hazardous wastes. If generation of hazardous waste can not
reintroduced into the manufacturing process or industry
be prevented through the implementation of the above
activity at the site
general waste management practices, its management
Investigation of external markets for recycling by other should focus on the prevention of harm to health, safety, and
industrial processing operations located in the the environment, according to the following additional
neighborhood or region of the facility (e.g., waste principles:
exchange)
Understanding potential impacts and risks associated
Establishing recycling objectives and formal tracking of
with the management of any generated hazardous
waste generation and recycling rates
waste during its complete life cycle
Providing training and incentives to employees in order
Ensuring that contractors handling, treating, and
to meet objectives
disposing of hazardous waste are reputable and
Treatment and Disposal legitimate enterprises, licensed by the relevant
If waste materials are still generated after the implementation regulatory agencies and following good international
of feasible waste prevention, reduction, reuse, recovery and industry practice for the waste being handled
recycling measures, waste materials should be treated and Ensuring compliance with applicable local and
disposed of and all measures should be taken to avoid international regulations51
potential impacts to human health and the environment.

Selected management approaches should be consistent with
Waste Storage
the characteristics of the waste and local regulations, and Hazardous waste should be stored so as to prevent or
may include one or more of the following: control accidental releases to air, soil, and water resources in
area location where:
On-site or off-site biological, chemical, or physical
treatment of the waste material to render it non-
hazardous prior to final disposal 51 International requirements may include host-country commitments
under the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of
Treatment or disposal at permitted facilities specially Hazardous Waste and their disposal (http://www.basel.int/) and Rotterdam
Convention on the prior Inform Consent Procedure for Certain Hazardous
designed to receive the waste. Examples include: Chemicals and Pesticides in International Trade (http://www.pic.int/)
composting operations for organic non-hazardous
APRIL 30, 2007 48

WASTE MANAGEMENT
WORLD BANK GROUP
Waste is stored in a manner that prevents the Preparing and implementing spill response and
commingling or contact between incompatible wastes, emergency plans to address their accidental release
and allows for inspection between containers to monitor (additional information on Emergency Plans in provided
leaks or spills. Examples include sufficient space in Section 3 of this document)
between incompatibles or physical separation such as Avoiding underground storage tanks and underground
walls or containment curbs piping of hazardous waste
Store in closed containers away from direct sunlight,
wind and rain Transportation
Secondary containment systems should be constructed On-site and Off-site transportation of waste should be
with materials appropriate for the wastes being conducted so as to prevent or minimize spills, releases, and
contained and adequate to prevent loss to the exposures to employees and the public. All waste
environment containers designated for off-site shipment should be
Secondary containment is included wherever liquid secured and labeled with the contents and associated
wastes are stored in volumes greater than 220 liters. hazards, be properly loaded on the transport vehicles before
The available volume of secondary containment should leaving the site, and be accompanied by a shipping paper
be at least 110 percent of the largest storage container, (i.e., manifest) that describes the load and its associated
or 25 percent of the total storage capacity (whichever is hazards, consistent with the guidance provided in Section 3.4
greater), in that specific location on the Transport of Hazardous Materials.
Provide adequate ventilation where volatile wastes are

stored.
Treatment and Disposal
In addition to the recommendations for treatment and
Hazardous waste storage activities should also be subject to
disposal applicable to general wastes, the following issues
special management actions, conducted by employees who
specific to hazardous wastes should be considered:
have received specific training in handling and storage of
hazardous wastes: Commercial or Government Waste Contractors
In the absence of qualified commercial or government-owned
Provision of readily available information on chemical
waste vendors (taking into consideration proximity and
compatibility to employees, including labeling each
transportation requirements), facilities generating waste
container to identify its contents
should consider using:
Limiting access to hazardous waste storage areas to
employees who have received proper training Have the technical capability to manage the waste in a
Clearly identifying (label) and demarcating the area, manner that reduces immediate and future impact to the
including documentation of its location on a facility map environment
or site plan Have all required permits, certifications, and approvals,
Conducting periodic inspections of waste storage areas of applicable government authorities
and documenting the findings
APRIL 30, 2007 49

WASTE MANAGEMENT
WORLD BANK GROUP
Have been secured through the use of formal are generated and stored on site, monitoring activities
procurement agreements should include:
In the absence of qualified commercial or government-owned o Inspection of vessels for leaks, drips or other
waste disposal operators (taking into consideration proximity indications of loss
and transportation requirements), project sponsors should o Identification of cracks, corrosion, or damage to
consider using: tanks, protective equipment, or floors

o Verification of locks, emergency valves, and other
Installing on-site waste treatment or recycling
safety devices for easy operation (lubricating if
processes
required and employing the practice of keeping
As a final option, constructing facilities that will provide
locks and safety equipment in standby position
for the environmental sound long-term storage of
when the area is not occupied)
wastes on-site (as described elsewhere in the General
o Checking the operability of emergency systems
EHS Guidelines) or at an alternative appropriate
o Documenting results of testing for integrity,
location up until external commercial options become
emissions, or monitoring stations (air, soil vapor, or
available
groundwater)
o Documenting any changes to the storage facility,
Small Quantities of Hazardous Waste
and any significant changes in the quantity of
Hazardous waste materials are frequently generated in small
materials in storage
quantities by many projects through a variety of activities
such as equipment and building maintenance activities. Regular audits of waste segregation and collection
Examples of these types of wastes include: spent solvents practices
and oily rags, empty paint cans, chemical containers; used Tracking of waste generation trends by type and amount
lubricating oil; used batteries (such as nickel-cadmium or of waste generated, preferably by facility departments
lead acid); and lighting equipment, such as lamps or lamp Characterizing waste at the beginning of generation of a
ballasts. These wastes should be managed following the new waste stream, and periodically documenting the
guidance provided in the above sections. characteristics and proper management of the waste,
especially hazardous wastes
Monitoring Keeping manifests or other records that document the
Monitoring activities associated with the management of amount of waste generated and its destination
hazardous and non-hazardous waste should include: Periodic auditing of third party treatment, and disposal
services including re-use and recycling facilities when
Regular visual inspection of all waste storage collection
significant quantities of hazardous wastes are managed
and storage areas for evidence of accidental releases
by third parties. Whenever possible, audits should
and to verify that wastes are properly labeled and
include site visits to the treatment storage and disposal
stored. When significant quantities of hazardous wastes
location
APRIL 30, 2007 50

WASTE MANAGEMENT
WORLD BANK GROUP
Regular monitoring of groundwater quality in cases of

Hazardous Waste on site storage and/or pretreatment
and disposal
Monitoring records for hazardous waste collected,
stored, or shipped should include:
o Name and identification number of the material(s)
composing the hazardous waste
o Physical state (i.e., solid, liquid, gaseous or a
combination of one, or more, of these)
o Quantity (e.g., kilograms or liters, number of
containers)
o Waste shipment tracking documentation to include,
quantity and type, date dispatched, date
transported and date received, record of the
originator, the receiver and the transporter
o Method and date of storing, repacking, treating, or
disposing at the facility, cross-referenced to
specific manifest document numbers applicable to
the hazardous waste
o Location of each hazardous waste within the
facility, and the quantity at each location
APRIL 30, 2007 51

NOISE MANAGEMENT
WORLD BANK GROUP
1.7 Noise barrier. Barriers should be located as close to the

source or to the receptor location to be effective
Applicability Installing vibration isolation for mechanical equipment
This section addresses impacts of noise beyond the property Limiting the hours of operation for specific pieces of
boundary of the facilities. Worker exposure to noise is equipment or operations, especially mobile sources
covered in Section 2.0 on Occupational Health and Safety. operating through community areas
Re-locating noise sources to less sensitive areas to take
Prevention and Control advantage of distance and shielding
Noise prevention and mitigation measures should be applied Siting permanent facilities away from community areas if
where predicted or measured noise impacts from a project possible
facility or operations exceed the applicable noise level Taking advantage of the natural topography as a noise
guideline at the most sensitive point of reception.52 The buffer during facility design
preferred method for controlling noise from stationary Reducing project traffic routing through community
sources is to implement noise control measures at source.53 areas wherever possible
Methods for prevention and control of sources of noise Planning flight routes, timing and altitude for aircraft
emissions depend on the source and proximity of receptors. (airplane and helicopter) flying over community areas
Noise reduction options that should be considered include: Developing a mechanism to record and respond to
Selecting equipment with lower sound power levels complaints
Installing silencers for fans

Installing suitable mufflers on engine exhausts and
Noise Level Guidelines
Noise impacts should not exceed the levels presented in
compressor components
Table 1.7.1, or result in a maximum increase in background
Installing acoustic enclosures for equipment casing
levels of 3 dB at the nearest receptor location off-site.
radiating noise
Improving the acoustic performance of constructed
buildings, apply sound insulation
Installing acoustic barriers without gaps and with a
continuous minimum surface density of 10 kg/m2 in
order to minimize the transmission of sound through the
52 A point of reception or receptor may be defined as any point on the

premises occupied by persons where extraneous noise and/or vibration are
received. Examples of receptor locations may include: permanent or
seasonal residences; hotels / motels; schools and daycares; hospitals and
nursing homes; places of worship; and parks and campgrounds.
53 At the design stage of a project, equipment manufacturers should provide
design or construction specifications in the form of Insertion Loss
Performance for silencers and mufflers, and Transmission Loss
Performance for acoustic enclosures and upgraded building construction.
APRIL 30, 2007 52

NOISE MANAGEMENT
WORLD BANK GROUP
m to any reflecting surface (e.g., wall). In general, the noise

Table 1.7.1- Noise Level Guidelines 54 level limit is represented by the background or ambient noise
One Hour L Aeq (dBA) levels that would be present in the absence of the facility or
Receptor Daytime Nighttime noise source(s) under investigation.
07:00 - 22:00 22:00 - 07:00
Residential; institutional; 55 45
educational55
Industrial; commercial 70 70
Highly intrusive noises, such as noise from aircraft flyovers

and passing trains, should not be included when establishing
background noise levels.
Monitoring
Noise monitoring56 may be carried out for the purposes of
establishing the existing ambient noise levels in the area of
the proposed or existing facility, or for verifying operational
phase noise levels.
Noise monitoring programs should be designed and

conducted by trained specialists. Typical monitoring periods
should be sufficient for statistical analysis and may last 48
hours with the use of noise monitors that should be capable
of logging data continuously over this time period, or hourly,
or more frequently, as appropriate (or else cover differing
time periods within several days, including weekday and
weekend workdays). The type of acoustic indices recorded
depends on the type of noise being monitored, as
established by a noise expert. Monitors should be located
approximately 1.5 m above the ground and no closer than 3
54 Guidelines values are for noise levels measured out of doors. Source:
Guidelines for Community Noise, World Health Organization (WHO), 1999.
55 For acceptable indoor noise levels for residential, institutional, and
educational settings refer to WHO (1999).
56 Noise monitoring should be carried out using a Type 1 or 2 sound level
meter meeting all appropriate IEC standards.
APRIL 30, 2007 53

CONTAMINATED LAND
WORLD BANK GROUP
1.8 Contaminated Land

The liability that it may pose to the polluter/business
Applicability and Approach .............................................54 owners (e.g., cost of remediation, damage of business
Risk Screening ..............................................................55 reputation and/or business-community relations) or
Interim Risk Management ..............................................56
Detailed Risk Assessment..............................................56 affected parties (e.g. workers at the site, nearby property
Permanent Risk Reduction Measures.............................57 owners).
Occupational Health and Safety Considerations..............59
Contamination of land should be avoided by preventing or
controlling the release of hazardous materials, hazardous
wastes, or oil to the environment. When contamination of land is
This section provides a summary of management
suspected or confirmed during any project phase, the cause of
approaches for land contamination due to anthropogenic
the uncontrolled release should be identified and corrected to
releases of hazardous materials, wastes, or oil, including
avoid further releases and associated adverse impacts.
naturally occurring substances. Releases of these materials
may be the result of historic or current site activities, Contaminated lands should be managed to avoid the risk to
including, but not limited to, accidents during their handling human health and ecological receptors. The preferred strategy
and storage, or due to their poor management or disposal. for land decontamination is to reduce the level of contamination
at the site while preventing the human exposure to
Land is considered contaminated when it contains hazardous
contamination.
materials or oil concentrations above background or naturally
occurring levels. To determine whether risk management actions are warranted,
the following assessment approach should be applied to
Contaminated lands may involve surficial soils or subsurface
establish whether the three risk factors of Contaminants,
soils that, through leaching and transport, may affect
Receptors, and Exposure Pathways co-exist, or are likely to
groundwater, surface water, and adjacent sites. Where
co-exist, at the project site under current or possible future land
subsurface contaminant sources include volatile substances,
use:
soil vapor may also become a transport and exposure
medium, and create potential for contaminant infiltration of Contaminant(s): Presence of hazardous materials, waste,
indoor air spaces of buildings. or oil in any environmental media at potentially hazardous
concentrations
Contaminated land is a concern because of: Receptor(s): Actual or likely contact of humans, wildlife,
plants, and other living organisms with the contaminants of
The potential risks to human health and ecology (e.g.
concern
risk of cancer or other human health effects, loss of
Exposure pathway(s): A combination of the route of
ecology);
migration of the contaminant from its point of release (e.g.,
leaching into potable groundwater) and exposure routes
APRIL 30, 2007 54

CONTAMINATED LAND
WORLD BANK GROUP
(e.g., ingestion, transdermal absorption), which would Identification of the location of suspected highest level of
allow receptor(s) to come into actual contact with contamination through a combination of visual and
contaminants historical operational information;
Sampling and testing of the contaminated media (soils or
water) according to established technical methods
applicable to suspected type of contaminant57,58;
Evaluation of the analytical results against the local and
national contaminated sites regulations. In the absence of
such regulations or environmental standards, other sources
of risk-based standards or guidelines should be consulted
to obtain comprehensive criteria for screening soil
concentrations of pollutants.59
Verification of the potential human and/or ecological
receptors and exposure pathways relevant to the site in
question
FIGURE 1.8.1: Inter-Relationship of Contaminant The outcome of risk-screening may reveal that there is no
Risk Factors overlap between the three risk-factors as the contaminant levels
identified are below those considered to pose a risk to human
When the three risk factors are considered to be present (in health or the environment. Alternatively, interim or permanent
spite of limited data) under current or foreseeable future
conditions, the following steps should be followed (as
described in the remaining parts of this section):
57 BC MOE. http://www.env.gov.bc.ca/epd/epdpa/contam_sites/guidance
1) Risk screening; 58 Massachusetts Department of Environment.

http://www.mass.gov/dep/cleanup
2) Interim risk management;
59 These may include the USEPA Region 3 Risk-Based Concentrations (RBCs).
3) Detailed quantitative risk assessment; and http://www.epa.gov/reg3hwmd/risk/human/index.htm. These RBCs are
considered acceptable for specific land use and contaminant exposure
4) Permanent risk reduction measures. scenarios as they have been developed by governments using risk assessment
techniques for use as general targets in the site remediation. Separate PRGs
have been developed or adopted for soil, sediment or groundwater, and often a
Risk Screening distinction is made between land uses (as noted earlier) because of the need for
more stringent guidelines for residential and agricultural versus
This step is also known as problem formulation for commercial/industrial landuse. The RBC Tables contains Reference Doses
(RfDs) and Cancer Slope Factors (CSFs) for about 400 chemicals. These
environmental risk assessment. Where there is potential toxicity factors have been combined with standard exposure scenarios to
calculate RBCs--chemical concentrations corresponding to fixed levels of risk
evidence of contamination at a site, the following steps are (i.e., a Hazard Quotient (HQ) of 1, or lifetime cancer risk of 1E-6, whichever
occurs at a lower concentration) in water, air, fish tissue, and soil for individual
recommended: chemical substances. The primary use of RBCs is for chemical screening during
baseline risk assessment (see EPA Regional Guidance EPA/903/R-93-001,
Selecting Exposure Routes and Contaminants of Concern by Risk-Based
Screening). Additional useful soil quality guidelines can also be obtained from
Lijzen et al. 2001.
APRIL 30, 2007 55

CONTAMINATED LAND
WORLD BANK GROUP
risk reduction measures may need to be taken with, or strategies that yield acceptable health risks, while achieving low
without, more detailed risk assessment activities, as level contamination on-site. An assessment of contaminant
described below. risks needs to be considered in the context of current and future
land use, and development scenarios (e.g., residential,
commercial, industrial, and urban parkland or wilderness use).
Interim Risk Management
Interim risk management actions should be implemented at A detailed quantitative risk assessment builds on risk screening
any phase of the project life cycle if the presence of land (problem formulation). It involves first, a detailed site
contamination poses an imminent hazard, i.e., representing investigation to identify the scope of contamination.61 Site
an immediate risk to human health and the environment if investigation programs should apply quality assurance/quality
contamination were allowed to continue, even a short period control (QA/QC) measures to ensure that data quality is
of time. Examples of situations considered to involve adequate for the intended data use (e.g., method detection
imminent hazards include, but are not restricted to: limits are below levels of concern). The site investigation in turn
Presence of an explosive atmosphere caused by should be used to develop a conceptual site model of how and
contaminated land where contaminants exist, how they are transported, and where
Accessible and excessive contamination for which short- routes of exposure occur to organisms and humans. The risk
term exposure and potency of contaminants could result factors and conceptual site model provide a framework for
in acute toxicity, irreversible long term effects, assessing contaminant risks.

sensitization, or accumulation of persistent
Human or ecological risk assessments facilitate risk
biocumulative and toxic substances
management decisions at contaminated sites. Specific risk
Concentrations of pollutants at concentrations above the
assessment objectives include:
Risk Based Concentrations (RBCs60) or drinking water
standards in potable water at the point of abstraction Identifying relevant human and ecological receptors
(e.g., children, adults, fish, wildlife)
Appropriate risk reduction should be implemented as soon as
Determining if contaminants are present at levels that pose
practicable to remove the condition posing the imminent
potential human health and/or ecological concerns (e.g.,
hazard.
levels above applicable regulatory criteria based on health
or environmental risk considerations)
Detailed Risk Assessment
Determining how human or ecological receptors are
As an alternative to complying with numerical standards or
exposed to the contaminants (e.g., ingestions of soil,
preliminary remediation goals, and depending on local
dermal contact, inhalation of dust)
regulatory requirements, a detailed site-specific,
environmental risk assessment may be used to develop
61 Examples include processes defined by the American Society of Testing and
Materials (ASTM) Phase II ESA Process; the British Columbia Ministry of
Environment Canada (BC MOE)
60 For example, USEPA Region 3 Risk-Based Concentrations (RBCs). http://www.env.gov.bc.ca/epd/epdpa/contam_sites/guidance); and the
http://www.epa.gov/reg3hwmd/risk/human/index.htm. Massachusetts Department of Environment http://www.mass.gov/dep/cleanup.
APRIL 30, 2007 56

CONTAMINATED LAND
WORLD BANK GROUP
Identifying the types of adverse effects that might result Identifying the preferred technologies (including
from exposure to the contaminants (e.g., effect on target engineering controls) needed to implement the conceptual
organ, cancer, impaired growth or reproduction) in the risk reduction measures
absence of regulatory standards Developing a monitoring plan to ascertain whether risk
Quantifying the magnitude of health risks to human and reduction measures are effective
ecological receptors based on a quantitative analysis of Considering the need and appropriateness for institutional
contaminant exposure and toxicity (e.g. calculate controls (e.g. deed restriction, land use restrictions) as part
lifetime cancer risk or ratios of estimated exposure rates of a comprehensive approach
compared to safe exposure rates)
Determining how current and proposed future land use Permanent Risk Reduction Measures
influence the predicted risks (e.g. change of land use The risk factors and conceptual site model within the
from industrial to residential with more sensitive contaminant risk approach described also provide a basis to
receptors such as children) manage and mitigate environmental contaminant health risks.
Quantifying the potential environmental and/or human The underlying principle is to reduce, eliminate, or control any or
health risks from off-site contaminant migration (e.g., all of the three risk factors illustrated in Figure 1.8.1. A short list
consider if leaching and groundwater transport, or of examples of risk mitigation strategies is provided below,
surface water transport results in exposure at adjacent although actual strategies should be developed based on site-
lands/receptors) specific conditions, and the practicality of prevailing factors and
Determining if the risk is likely to remain stable, site constraints. Regardless of the management options
increase, or decrease with time in the absence of any selected, the action plan should include, whenever possible,
remediation (e.g., consider if the contaminant is contaminant source reduction (i.e., net improvement of the site)
reasonably degradable and likely to remain in place, or as part of the overall strategy towards managing health risks at
be transported to other media)62 contaminated sites, as this alone provides for improved
environmental quality.
Addressing these objectives provides a basis to develop and
implement risk reduction measures (e.g., clean-up, on-site Figure 1.8.2 presents a schematic of the inter-relationship of risk
controls) at the site. If such a need exists, the following factors and example strategies to mitigate contaminant health
additional objectives become relevant: risk by modifying the conditions of one or more risk factors to
Determining where, and in what conceptual manner, risk ultimately reduce contaminant exposure to the receptor. The
reduction measures should be implemented selected approach should take into consideration the technical
and financial feasibility (e.g. operability of a selected technology
given the local availability of technical expertise and equipment
and its associated costs).
62 An example of a simplified quantitative risk assessment method is the
ASTM E1739-95(2002) Standard Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action Example risk mitigation strategies for contaminant source and
Applied at Petroleum Release Sites and the ASTM E2081-00(2004)e1
Standard Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action (at chemical release sites). exposure concentrations include:
APRIL 30, 2007 57

CONTAMINATED LAND
WORLD BANK GROUP
Soil, sediment, and sludge: o Installation (during building construction) of an
o In situ biological treatment (aerobic or anaerobic) impermeable barrier below the building and/or an
o In situ physical/chemical treatment (e.g., soil vapor alternative flow pathway for soil vapor beneath
extraction with off-gas treatment, chemical building foundations (e.g., porous media and
oxidation) ventilation to shunt vapors away from building)
o In situ thermal treatment (e.g., steam injection, 6- Example risk mitigation strategies for receptors include:
phase heating) Limiting or preventing access to contaminant by receptors
o Ex situ biological treatment (e.g., excavation and (actions targeted at the receptor may include signage with
composting) instructions, fencing, or site security)
o Ex situ physical/chemical treatment (e.g., Imposing health advisory or prohibiting certain practices
excavation and stabilization) leading to exposure such as fishing, crab trapping, shellfish
o Ex situ thermal treatment (e.g., excavation and collection
thermal desorption or incineration) Educating receptors (people) to modify behavior in order to
o Containment (e.g. landfill) reduce exposure (e.g., improved work practices, and use of
o Natural attenuation protective clothing and equipment)
o Other treatment processes
Example risk mitigation strategies for exposure pathways
Groundwater, surface water, and leachate: include:
o In situ biological treatment (aerobic and/or aerobic) Providing an alternative water supply to replace, for
o In situ physical/chemical treatment (e.g., air example, a contaminated groundwater supply well
sparging, zero-valent iron permeable reactive
Capping contaminated soil with at least 1m of clean soil to
barrier)
prevent human contact, as well as plant root or small
o Ex situ biological, physical, and or chemical
mammal penetration into contaminated soils
treatment (i.e., groundwater extraction and
Paving over contaminated soil as an interim measure to
treatment)
negate the pathway of direct contact or dust generation
o Containment (e.g., slurry wall or sheet pile barrier)
and inhalation
o Natural attenuation
Using an interception trench and pump, and treat
o Other treatment processes technologies to prevent contaminated groundwater from
Soil vapor intrusion: discharging into fish streams
o Soil vapor extraction to reduce VOC contaminant The above-reference containment measures should also be
source in soil considered for immediate implementation in situations where
o Installation of a sub-slab depressurization system source reduction measures are expected to take time.
to prevent migration of soil vapor into the building
o Creating a positive pressure condition in buildings
APRIL 30, 2007 58

CONTAMINATED LAND
WORLD BANK GROUP
Occupational Health and Safety

Considerations
Investigation and remediation of contaminated lands requires
that workers be mindful of the occupational exposures that
could arise from working in close contact with contaminated
soil or other environmental media (e.g., groundwater,
wastewater, sediments, and soil vapor). Occupational health
and safety precautions should be exercised to minimize
exposure, as described in Section 2 on Occupational Health
and Safety. In addition, workers on contaminated sites
should receive special health and safety training specific to
contaminated site investigation and remediation activities.63
FIGURE 1.8.2: Inter-Relationship of Risk Factors

and Management Options
63 For example, US Occupational Safety and Health Agency (OSHA)

regulations found at 40 CFR 1910.120.
http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owadisp.show_document?p_table=STAN
DARDS&p_id=9765
APRIL 30, 2007 59

GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
2.0 Occupational Health and Safety

Applicability and Approach......................................60
2.1 General Facility Design and Operation......................61 Applicability and Approach
Integrity of Workplace Structures..........................61 Employers and supervisors are obliged to implement all
Severe Weather and Facility Shutdown ................61
Workspace and Exit.............................................61 reasonable precautions to protect the health and safety of
Fire Precautions ..................................................62 workers. This section provides guidance and examples of
Lavatories and Showers.......................................62
Potable Water Supply ..........................................62 reasonable precautions to implement in managing principal risks
Clean Eating Area ...............................................62 to occupational health and safety. Although the focus is placed on
Lighting...............................................................62
Safe Access........................................................62 the operational phase of projects, much of the guidance also
First Aid...............................................................63 applies to construction and decommissioning activities.
Air Supply............................................................63
Work Environment Temperature...........................63 Companies should hire contractors that have the technical
2.2 Communication and Training....................................63 capability to manage the occupational health and safety issues of
OHS Training ......................................................63
Visitor Orientation................................................63 their employees, extending the application of the hazard
New Task Employee and Contractor Training.......63 management activities through formal procurement agreements.
Basic OHS Training .............................................64
Area Signage ......................................................64
Labeling of Equipment.........................................64 Preventive and protective measures should be introduced
Communicate Hazard Codes ...............................64 according to the following order of priority:
2.3 Physical Hazards .....................................................64
Rotating and Moving Equipment...........................65
Noise ..................................................................65 Eliminating the hazard by removing the activity from the work
Vibration..............................................................65
process. Examples include substitution with less hazardous
Electrical .............................................................66
Eye Hazards........................................................67 chemicals, using different manufacturing processes, etc;
Welding / Hot Work..............................................67
Industrial Vehicle Driving and Site Traffic..............67 Controlling the hazard at its source through use of
Working Environment Temperature......................68
engineering controls. Examples include local exhaust
Ergonomics, Repetitive Motion, Manual Handling.68
Working at Heights ..............................................68 ventilation, isolation rooms, machine guarding, acoustic
Illumination..........................................................69
2.4 Chemical Hazards....................................................69 insulating, etc;
Air Quality ...........................................................70
Fire and Explosions .............................................70 Minimizing the hazard through design of safe work systems
Corrosive, oxidizing, and reactive chemicals.........71 and administrative or institutional control measures.
Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM)..................71
2.5 Biological Hazards....................................................71 Examples include job rotation, training safe work procedures,
2.6 Radiological Hazards................................................73 lock-out and tag-out, workplace monitoring, limiting exposure
2.7 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).......................73
2.8 Special Hazard Environments...................................74 or work duration, etc.
Confined Space...................................................74
Lone and Isolated Workers ..................................75 Providing appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) in
2.9 Monitoring................................................................75 conjunction with training, use, and maintenance of the PPE.
Accidents and Diseases monitoring......................76
The application of prevention and control measures to
occupational hazards should be based on comprehensive job
APRIL 30, 2007 60

WORLD BANK GROUP
safety or job hazard analyses. The results of these analyses

should be prioritized as part of an action plan based on the Table 2.1.1. Risk Ranking Table to Classify Worker
likelihood and severity of the consequence of exposure to the Scenarios Based on Likelihood and Consequence
identified hazards. An example of a qualitative risk ranking or
Consequences
analysis matrix to help identify priorities is described in Table
2.1.1.
Catas-
Insignificant Minor Moderate Major trophic
Likelihood
2.1 General Facility Design and 1 2 3 4 5
Operation
A. Almost
certain L M E E E
Integrity of Workplace Structures
Permanent and recurrent places of work should be designed and B. Likely
L M H E E
equipped to protect OHS:
C.
L M H E E
Surfaces, structures and installations should be easy to clean Moderate
and maintain, and not allow for accumulation of hazardous
D. Unlikely
L L M H E
compounds.
Buildings should be structurally safe, provide appropriate E. Rare
L L M H H
protection against the climate, and have acceptable light and
noise conditions.
Legend
Fire resistant, noise-absorbing materials should, to the extent E: extreme risk; immediate action required
feasible, be used for cladding on ceilings and walls. H: high risk; senior management attention needed
Floors should be level, even, and non-skid. M: moderate risk; management responsibility should be specified
Heavy oscillating, rotating or alternating equipment should be L: low risk; manage by routine procedures
located in dedicated buildings or structurally isolated
sections. Workspace and Exit
The space provided for each worker, and in total, should be
Severe Weather and Facility Shutdown
adequate for safe execution of all activities, including
Work place structures should be designed and constructed to
transport and interim storage of materials and products.
withstand the expected elements for the region and have an
Passages to emergency exits should be unobstructed at all
area designated for safe refuge, if appropriate.
times. Exits should be clearly marked to be visible in total
Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) should be developed
darkness. The number and capacity of emergency exits
for project or process shut-down, including an evacuation
should be sufficient for safe and orderly evacuation of the
plan. Drills to practice the procedure and plan should also be
greatest number of people present at any time, and there
undertaken annually.
should be a minimum two exits from any work area.
APRIL 30, 2007 61

WORLD BANK GROUP
Facilities also should be designed and built taking into Potable Water Supply
account the needs of disabled persons. Adequate supplies of potable drinking water should be
provided from a fountain with an upward jet or with a sanitary
Fire Precautions means of collecting the water for the purposes of drinking
The workplace should be designed to prevent the start of fires
Water supplied to areas of food preparation or for the
through the implementation of fire codes applicable to industrial
purpose of personal hygiene (washing or bathing) should
settings. Other essential measures include:
meet drinking water quality standards
Equipping facilities with fire detectors, alarm systems, and
fire-fighting equipment. The equipment should be maintained Clean Eating Area
in good working order and be readily accessible. It should be Where there is potential for exposure to substances
adequate for the dimensions and use of the premises, poisonous by ingestion, suitable arrangements are to be
equipment installed, physical and chemical properties of made for provision of clean eating areas where workers are
substances present, and the maximum number of people not exposed to the hazardous or noxious substances
present.
Provision of manual firefighting equipment that is easily Lighting
accessible and simple to use Workplaces should, to the degree feasible, receive natural
Fire and emergency alarm systems that are both audible and light and be supplemented with sufficient artificial illumination
visible to promote workers safety and health, and enable safe

equipment operation. Supplemental task lighting may be
The IFC Life and Fire Safety Guideline should apply to buildings
required where specific visual acuity requirements should be
accessible to the public (See Section 3.3).
met.
Emergency lighting of adequate intensity should be installed
Lavatories and Showers
and automatically activated upon failure of the principal
Adequate lavatory facilities (toilets and washing areas)
artificial light source to ensure safe shut-down, evacuation,
should be provided for the number of people expected to
etc.
work in the facility and allowances made for segregated
facilities, or for indicating whether the toilet facility is In Use
Safe Access
or Vacant. Toilet facilities should also be provided with
Passageways for pedestrians and vehicles within and outside
adequate supplies of hot and cold running water, soap, and
buildings should be segregated and provide for easy, safe,
hand drying devices.
and appropriate access
Where workers may be exposed to substances poisonous by
Equipment and installations requiring servicing, inspection,
ingestion and skin contamination may occur, facilities for
and/or cleaning should have unobstructed, unrestricted, and
showering and changing into and out of street and work
ready access
clothes should be provided.
Hand, knee and foot railings should be installed on stairs,
fixed ladders, platforms, permanent and interim floor
openings, loading bays, ramps, etc.
APRIL 30, 2007 62

WORLD BANK GROUP
Openings should be sealed by gates or removable chains microorganisms. Heating, ventilation and air conditioning
Covers should, if feasible, be installed to protect against (HVAC) and industrial evaporative cooling systems should be
falling items equipped, maintained and operated so as to prevent growth
Measures to prevent unauthorized access to dangerous and spreading of disease agents (e.g. Legionnella
areas should be in place pneumophilia) or breeding of vectors (e.g. mosquitoes and
flies) of public health concern.
First Aid
The employer should ensure that qualified first-aid can be Work Environment Temperature
provided at all times. Appropriately equipped first-aid stations The temperature in work, rest room and other welfare
should be easily accessible throughout the place of work facilities should, during service hours, be maintained at a
Eye-wash stations and/or emergency showers should be level appropriate for the purpose of the facility.
provided close to all workstations where immediate flushing
with water is the recommended first-aid response 2.2 Communication and Training
Where the scale of work or the type of activity being carried
OHS Training
out so requires, dedicated and appropriately equipped first-
Provisions should be made to provide OHS orientation
aid room(s) should be provided. First aid stations and rooms
training to all new employees to ensure they are apprised of
should be equipped with gloves, gowns, and masks for
the basic site rules of work at / on the site and of personal
protection against direct contact with blood and other body
protection and preventing injury to fellow employees.
fluids
Training should consist of basic hazard awareness, site-
Remote sites should have written emergency procedures in
specific hazards, safe work practices, and emergency
place for dealing with cases of trauma or serious illness up to
procedures for fire, evacuation, and natural disaster, as
the point at which patient care can be transferred to an
appropriate. Any site-specific hazard or color coding in use
appropriate medical facility.
should be thoroughly reviewed as part of orientation training.
Air Supply
Visitor Orientation
Sufficient fresh air should be supplied for indoor and confined
If visitors to the site can gain access to areas where
work spaces. Factors to be considered in ventilation design
hazardous conditions or substances may be present, a visitor
include physical activity, substances in use, and process-
orientation and control program should be established to
related emissions. Air distribution systems should be
ensure visitors do not enter hazard areas unescorted.
designed so as not to expose workers to draughts
Mechanical ventilation systems should be maintained in good
New Task Employee and Contractor Training
working order. Point-source exhaust systems required for
The employer should ensure that workers and contractors,
maintaining a safe ambient environment should have local
prior to commencement of new assignments, have received
indicators of correct functioning.
adequate training and information enabling them to
Re-circulation of contaminated air is not acceptable. Air inlet
filters should be kept clean and free of dust and
APRIL 30, 2007 63

WORLD BANK GROUP
understand work hazards and to protect their health from Signage should be in accordance with international
hazardous ambient factors that may be present. standards and be well known to, and easily understood by
The training should adequately cover: workers, visitors and the general public as appropriate.
o Knowledge of materials, equipment, and tools

Labeling of Equipment
o Known hazards in the operations and how they are
controlled All vessels that may contain substances that are hazardous
o Potential risks to health as a result of chemical or toxicological properties, or
o Precautions to prevent exposure temperature or pressure, should be labeled as to the
o Hygiene requirements contents and hazard, or appropriately color coded.
o Wearing and use of protective equipment and clothing Similarly, piping systems that contain hazardous substances
o Appropriate response to operation extremes, incidents should be labeled with the direction of flow and contents of
and accidents the pipe, or color coded whenever the pipe passing through a
wall or floor is interrupted by a valve or junction device.
Basic OHS Training
A basic occupational training program and specialty courses Communicate Hazard Codes
should be provided, as needed, to ensure that workers are Copies of the hazard coding system should be posted
oriented to the specific hazards of individual work outside the facility at emergency entrance doors and fire
assignments. Training should generally be provided to emergency connection systems where they are likely to
management, supervisors, workers, and occasional visitors come to the attention of emergency services personnel.
to areas of risks and hazards. Information regarding the types of hazardous materials
Workers with rescue and first-aid duties should receive stored, handled or used at the facility, including typical
dedicated training so as not to inadvertently aggravate maximum inventories and storage locations, should be
exposures and health hazards to themselves or their co- shared proactively with emergency services and security
workers. Training would include the risks of becoming personnel to expedite emergency response when needed.
infected with bloodborne pathogens through contact with Representatives of local emergency and security services
bodily fluids and tissue. should be invited to participate in periodic (annual)
Through appropriate contract specifications and monitoring, orientation tours and site inspections to ensure familiarity
the employer should ensure that service providers, as well as with potential hazards present.
contracted and subcontracted labor, are trained adequately
before assignments begin. 2.3 Physical Hazards
Physical hazards represent potential for accident or injury or
Area Signage illness due to repetitive exposure to mechanical action or work
Hazardous areas (electrical rooms, compressor rooms, etc), activity. Single exposure to physical hazards may result in a wide
installations, materials, safety measures, and emergency range of injuries, from minor and medical aid only, to disabling,
exits, etc. should be marked appropriately. catastrophic, and/or fatal. Multiple exposures over prolonged
APRIL 30, 2007 64

WORLD BANK GROUP
periods can result in disabling injuries of comparable significance Noise

and consequence. Noise limits for different working environments are provided in
Table 2.3.1.
Rotating and Moving Equipment
Injury or death can occur from being trapped, entangled, or struck No employee should be exposed to a noise level greater than
85 dB(A) for a duration of more than 8 hours per day without
by machinery parts due to unexpected starting of equipment or
hearing protection. In addition, no unprotected ear should be
unobvious movement during operations. Recommended
exposed to a peak sound pressure level (instantaneous) of
protective measures include:
more than 140 dB(C).
Designing machines to eliminate trap hazards and ensuring
The use of hearing protection should be enforced actively
that extremities are kept out of harms way under normal
when the equivalent sound level over 8 hours reaches 85
operating conditions. Examples of proper design
dB(A), the peak sound levels reach 140 dB(C), or the
considerations include two-hand operated machines to
average maximum sound level reaches 110dB(A). Hearing
prevent amputations or the availability of emergency stops
protective devices provided should be capable of reducing
dedicated to the machine and placed in strategic locations.
sound levels at the ear to at least 85 dB(A).
Where a machine or equipment has an exposed moving part
Although hearing protection is preferred for any period of
or exposed pinch point that may endanger the safety of any
noise exposure in excess of 85 dB(A), an equivalent level of
worker, the machine or equipment should be equipped with,
protection can be obtained, but less easily managed, by
and protected by, a guard or other device that prevents
limiting the duration of noise exposure. For every 3 dB(A)
access to the moving part or pinch point. Guards should be
increase in sound levels, the allowed exposure period or
designed and installed in conformance with appropriate
duration should be reduced by 50 percent.65
machine safety standards.64
Prior to the issuance of hearing protective devices as the
Turning off, disconnecting, isolating, and de-energizing
final control mechanism, use of acoustic insulating materials,
(Locked Out and Tagged Out) machinery with exposed or
isolation of the noise source, and other engineering controls
guarded moving parts, or in which energy can be stored (e.g.
should be investigated and implemented, where feasible
compressed air, electrical components) during servicing or
Periodic medical hearing checks should be performed on
maintenance, in conformance with a standard such as CSA
workers exposed to high noise levels
Z460 Lockout or equivalent ISO or ANSI standard
Designing and installing equipment, where feasible, to enable Vibration
routine service, such as lubrication, without removal of the Exposure to hand-arm vibration from equipment such as hand and
guarding devices or mechanisms power tools, or whole-body vibrations from surfaces on which the
worker stands or sits, should be controlled through choice of
equipment, installation of vibration dampening pads or devices,
and limiting the duration of exposure. Limits for vibration and
64 For example: CSA Z432.04 Safe Guarding of Machinery, CSA Z434 Robot
Safety, ISO 11161 Safety of Machinery Integrated Manufacturing Systems or
ISO 14121 Safety of Machinery Principals of Risk Management or equivalent
ANSI standard. 65 The American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH), 2006
APRIL 30, 2007 65

WORLD BANK GROUP
action values, (i.e. the level of exposure at which remediation Marking all energized electrical devices and lines with
should be initiated) are provided by the ACGIH 66. Exposure levels warning signs
should be checked on the basis of daily exposure time and data Locking out (de-charging and leaving open with a controlled
provided by equipment manufacturers. locking device) and tagging-out (warning sign placed on the
lock) devices during service or maintenance
Electrical Checking all electrical cords, cables, and hand power tools
Exposed or faulty electrical devices, such as circuit breakers, for frayed or exposed cords and following manufacturer
recommendations for maximum permitted operating voltage
Table 2.3.1. Noise Limits for Various Working of the portable hand tools
Environments Double insulating / grounding all electrical equipment used in
environments that are, or may become, wet; using equipment
Location Equivalent level Maximum
with ground fault interrupter (GFI) protected circuits
/activity LAeq,8h LAmax,fast
Protecting power cords and extension cords against damage
Heavy Industry (no from traffic by shielding or suspending above traffic areas
demand for oral 85 dB(A) 110 dB(A)
communication) Appropriate labeling of service rooms housing high voltage
Light industry equipment (electrical hazard) and where entry is controlled
(decreasing
demand for oral 50-65 dB(A) 110 dB(A) or prohibited (see also Section 3 on Planning, Siting, and
communication)
Design);
Open offices, Establishing No Approach zones around or under high
control rooms,
45-50 dB(A) -
service counters or voltage power lines in conformance with Table 2.3.2
similar
Rubber tired construction or other vehicles that come into
Individual offices
(no disturbing 40-45 dB(A) - direct contact with, or arcing between, high voltage wires
noise)
may need to be taken out of service for periods of 48 hours
Classrooms, and have the tires replaced to prevent catastrophic tire and
lecture halls 35-40 dB(A) -
wheel assembly failure, potentially causing serious injury or
Hospitals 30-35 dB(A) 40 dB(A) death;
panels, cables, cords and hand tools, can pose a serious risk to Conducting detailed identification and marking of all buried
workers. Overhead wires can be struck by metal devices, such as electrical wiring prior to any excavation work
poles or ladders, and by vehicles with metal booms. Vehicles or
grounded metal objects brought into close proximity with overhead
wires can result in arcing between the wires and the object,
without actual contact. Recommended actions include:
66 ACGIH, 2005
APRIL 30, 2007 66

WORLD BANK GROUP
Provisions should be made for persons who have to wear

Table 2.3.2. No Approach Zones for
prescription glasses either through the use overglasses or
High Voltage Power Lines
prescription hardened glasses.
Minimum
Nominal phase-to-phase voltage rating distance
Welding / Hot Work
750 or more volts, but no more than 150,000 volts 3 meters
Welding creates an extremely bright and intense light that may
More than 150,000 volts, but no more than 250,000 4.5 meters seriously injur a workers eyesight. In extreme cases, blindness
volts
may result. Additionally, welding may produce noxious fumes to
More than 250,000 volts 6 meters which prolonged exposure can cause serious chronic diseases.
Recommended measures include:
Eye Hazards Provision of proper eye protection such as welder goggles

Solid particles from a wide variety of industrial operations, and / or and/or a full-face eye shield for all personnel involved in, or
a liquid chemical spray may strike a worker in the eye causing an assisting, welding operations. Additional methods may
eye injury or permanent blindness. Recommended measures include the use of welding barrier screens around the specific
include: work station (a solid piece of light metal, canvas, or plywood
designed to block welding light from others). Devices to
Use of machine guards or splash shields and/or face and eye
extract and remove noxious fumes at the source may also be
protection devices, such as safety glasses with side shields,
required.
goggles, and/or a full face shield. Specific Safe Operating
Special hot work and fire prevention precautions and
Procedures (SOPs) may be required for use of sanding and
Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) should be
grinding tools and/or when working around liquid chemicals.
implemented if welding or hot cutting is undertaken outside
Frequent checks of these types of equipment prior to use to
established welding work stations, including Hot Work
ensure mechanical integrity is also good practice. Machine
Permits, stand-by fire extinguishers, stand-by fire watch, and
and equipment guarding should conform to standards
maintaining the fire watch for up to one hour after welding or
published by organizations such as CSA, ANSI and ISO (see
hot cutting has terminated. Special procedures are required
also Section 2.3 on Rotating and Moving Equipment and 2.7
for hotwork on tanks or vessels that have contained
on Personal Protective Equipment).
flammable materials.
Moving areas where the discharge of solid fragments, liquid,
or gaseous emissions can reasonably be predicted (e.g.
Industrial Vehicle Driving and Site Traffic
discharge of sparks from a metal cutting station, pressure
Poorly trained or inexperienced industrial vehicle drivers have
relief valve discharge) away from places expected to be
increased risk of accident with other vehicles, pedestrians, and
occupied or transited by workers or visitors. Where machine
equipment. Industrial vehicles and delivery vehicles, as well as
or work fragments could present a hazard to transient
private vehicles on-site, also represent potential collision
workers or passers-by, extra area guarding or proximity
scenarios. Industrial vehicle driving and site traffic safety
restricting systems should be implemented, or PPE required
practices include:
for transients and visitors.
APRIL 30, 2007 67

WORLD BANK GROUP
Training and licensing industrial vehicle operators in the safe Use of protective clothing
operation of specialized vehicles such as forklifts, including Providing easy access to adequate hydration such as
safe loading/unloading, load limits drinking water or electrolyte drinks, and avoiding
Ensuring drivers undergo medical surveillance consumption of alcoholic beverages
Ensuring moving equipment with restricted rear visibility is
outfitted with audible back-up alarms Ergonomics, Repetitive Motion, Manual Handling
Establishing rights-of-way, site speed limits, vehicle Injuries due to ergonomic factors, such as repetitive motion, over-
inspection requirements, operating rules and procedures exertion, and manual handling, take prolonged and repeated
(e.g. prohibiting operation of forklifts with forks in down exposures to develop, and typically require periods of weeks to
position), and control of traffic patterns or direction months for recovery. These OHS problems should be minimized
Restricting the circulation of delivery and private vehicles to or eliminated to maintain a productive workplace. Controls may
defined routes and areas, giving preference to one-way include:
circulation, where appropriate Facility and workstation design with 5th to 95th percentile
operational and maintenance workers in mind
Working Environment Temperature
Use of mechanical assists to eliminate or reduce exertions
Exposure to hot or cold working conditions in indoor or outdoor
required to lift materials, hold tools and work objects, and
environments can result temperature stress-related injury or
requiring multi-person lifts if weights exceed thresholds
death. Use of personal protective equipment (PPE) to protect
Selecting and designing tools that reduce force requirements
against other occupational hazards can accentuate and aggravate
and holding times, and improve postures
heat-related illnesses. Extreme temperatures in permanent work
Providing user adjustable work stations
environments should be avoided through implementation of
Incorporating rest and stretch breaks into work processes,
engineering controls and ventilation. Where this is not possible,
and conducting job rotation
such as during short-term outdoor work, temperature-related
Implementing quality control and maintenance programs that
stress management procedures should be implemented which
reduce unnecessary forces and exertions
include:
Taking into consideration additional special conditions such
Monitoring weather forecasts for outdoor work to provide as left handed persons
advance warning of extreme weather and scheduling work
accordingly Working at Heights
Adjustment of work and rest periods according to Fall prevention and protection measures should be implemented
temperature stress management procedures provided by whenever a worker is exposed to the hazard of falling more than
ACGIH 67, depending on the temperature and workloads two meters; into operating machinery; into water or other liquid;
Providing temporary shelters to protect against the elements into hazardous substances; or through an opening in a work
during working activities or for use as rest areas surface. Fall prevention / protection measures may also be
warranted on a case-specific basis when there are risks of falling
from lesser heights. Fall prevention may include:
67 ACGIH, 2005
APRIL 30, 2007 68

WORLD BANK GROUP
Installation of guardrails with mid-rails and toe boards at the supplemented with dedicated work station illumination, as needed.
edge of any fall hazard area The minimum limits for illumination intensity for a range of
Proper use of ladders and scaffolds by trained employees locations/activities appear in Table 2.3.3.
Use of fall prevention devices, including safety belt and Controls should include:
lanyard travel limiting devices to prevent access to fall hazard
Use of energy efficient light sources with minimum heat
area, or fall protection devices such as full body harnesses
emission
used in conjunction with shock absorbing lanyards or self-
Undertaking measures to eliminate glare / reflections and
retracting inertial fall arrest devices attached to fixed anchor
flickering of lights
point or horizontal life-lines
Taking precautions to minimize and control optical radiation
Appropriate training in use, serviceability, and integrity of the
including direct sunlight. Exposure to high intensity UV and
necessary PPE
IR radiation and high intensity visible light should also be
Inclusion of rescue and/or recovery plans, and equipment to
controlled
respond to workers after an arrested fall
Controlling laser hazards in accordance with equipment
Illumination specifications, certifications, and recognized safety
Work area light intensity should be adequate for the general standards. The lowest feasible class Laser should be applied
purpose of the location and type of activity, and should be to minimize risks.
2.4 Chemical Hazards

Table 2.3.3. Minimum Limits For Workplace Chemical hazards represent potential for illness or injury due to
Illumination Intensity
single acute exposure or chronic repetitive exposure to toxic,
Location / Activity Light Intensity corrosive, sensitizing or oxidative substances. They also
Emergency light 10 lux represent a risk of uncontrolled reaction, including the risk of fire
and explosion, if incompatible chemicals are inadvertently mixed.
Outdoor non working areas 20 lux
Chemical hazards can most effectively be prevented through a
Simple orientation and temporary visits (machine 50 lux hierarchical approach that includes:
storage, garage, warehouse)
Replacement of the hazardous substance with a less
Workspace with occasional visual tasks only 100 lux
(corridors, stairways, lobby, elevator, auditorium, etc.) hazardous substitute
Implementation of engineering and administrative control
Medium precision work (simple assembly, rough 200 lux
machine works, welding, packing, etc.) measures to avoid or minimize the release of hazardous
substances into the work environment keeping the level of
Precision work (reading, moderately difficult 500 lux
assembly, sorting, checking, medium bench and exposure below internationally established or recognized
machine works, etc.), offices. limits
High precision work (difficult assembly, sewing, color 1,000 3,000 Keeping the number of employees exposed, or likely to
inspection, fine sorting etc.) lux become exposed, to a minimum
APRIL 30, 2007 69

WORLD BANK GROUP
Communicating chemical hazards to workers through Where ambient air contains several materials that have
labeling and marking according to national and internationally similar effects on the same body organs (additive effects),
recognized requirements and standards, including the taking into account combined exposures using calculations
International Chemical Safety Cards (ICSC), Materials Safety recommended by the ACGIH 69
Data Sheets (MSDS), or equivalent. Any means of written Where work shifts extend beyond eight (8) hours, calculating
communication should be in an easily understood language adjusted workplace exposure criteria recommended by the
and be readily available to exposed workers and first-aid ACGIH 70
personnel
Training workers in the use of the available information (such Fire and Explosions
as MSDSs), safe work practices, and appropriate use of PPE Fires and or explosions resulting from ignition of flammable
materials or gases can lead to loss of property as well as possible
Air Quality injury or fatalities to project workers. Prevention and control
Poor air quality due to the release of contaminants into the work strategies include:
place can result in possible respiratory irritation, discomfort, or
Storing flammables away from ignition sources and oxidizing
illness to workers. Employers should take appropriate measures
materials. Further, flammables storage area should be:
to maintain air quality in the work area. These include:
o Remote from entry and exit points into buildings
Maintaining levels of contaminant dusts, vapors and gases in o Away from facility ventilation intakes or vents
the work environment at concentrations below those
o Have natural or passive floor and ceiling level ventilation
recommended by the ACGIH 68 as TWA-TLVs (threshold limit and explosion venting
value)concentrations to which most workers can be o Use spark-proof fixtures
exposed repeatedly (8 hours/day, 40 hrs/week, week-after- o Be equipped with fire extinguishing devices and self-
week), without sustaining adverse health effects. closing doors, and constructed of materials made to
Developing and implementing work practices to minimize withstand flame impingement for a moderate period of
release of contaminants into the work environment including: time
o Direct piping of liquid and gaseous materials Providing bonding and grounding of, and between,
o Minimized handling of dry powdered materials; containers and additional mechanical floor level ventilation if
o Enclosed operations materials are being, or could be, dispensed in the storage
o Local exhaust ventilation at emission / release points area
o Vacuum transfer of dry material rather than mechanical Where the flammable material is mainly comprised of dust,
or pneumatic conveyance
providing electrical grounding, spark detection, and, if
o Indoor secure storage, and sealed containers rather needed, quenching systems
than loose storage
69 ACGIH, 2005.
68 ACGIH, 2005 70 ACGIH, 2005.
APRIL 30, 2007 70

WORLD BANK GROUP
Defining and labeling fire hazards areas to warn of special Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM)
rules (e.g. prohibition in use of smoking materials, cellular The use of asbestos containing materials (ACM) should be
phones, or other potential spark generating equipment) avoided in new buildings or as a new material in remodeling or
Providing specific worker training in handling of flammable renovation activities. Existing facilities with ACM should develop
materials, and in fire prevention or suppression an asbestos management plan which clearly identifies the
locations where the ACM is present, its condition (e.g. whether it
Corrosive, oxidizing, and reactive chemicals is in friable form with the potential to release fibers), procedures
Corrosive, oxidizing, and reactive chemicals present similar for monitoring its condition, procedures to access the locations
hazards and require similar control measures as flammable where ACM is present to avoid damage, and training of staff who
materials. However, the added hazard of these chemicals is that can potentially come into contact with the material to avoid
inadvertent mixing or intermixing may cause serious adverse damage and prevent exposure. The plan should be made
reactions. This can lead to the release of flammable or toxic available to all persons involved in operations and maintenance
materials and gases, and may lead directly to fires and activities. Repair or removal and disposal of existing ACM in
explosions. These types of substances have the additional hazard buildings should only be performed by specially trained
of causing significant personal injury upon direct contact, personnel71 following host country requirements, or in their
regardless of any intermixing issues. The following controls
absence, internationally recognized procedures.72
should be observed in the work environment when handling such
chemicals:
2.5 Biological Hazards
Corrosive, oxidizing and reactive chemicals should be Biological agents represent potential for illness or injury due to
segregated from flammable materials and from other single acute exposure or chronic repetitive exposure. Biological
chemicals of incompatible class (acids vs. bases, oxidizers hazards can be prevented most effectively by implementing the
vs. reducers, water sensitive vs. water based, etc.), stored in following measures:
ventilated areas and in containers with appropriate
If the nature of the activity permits, use of any harmful
secondary containment to minimize intermixing during spills
biological agents should be avoided and replaced with an
Workers who are required to handle corrosive, oxidizing, or
agent that, under normal conditions of use, is not dangerous
reactive chemicals should be provided with specialized
or less dangerous to workers. If use of harmful agents can
training and provided with, and wear, appropriate PPE
not be avoided, precautions should be taken to keep the risk
(gloves, apron, splash suits, face shield or goggles, etc).
of exposure as low as possible and maintained below
Where corrosive, oxidizing, or reactive chemicals are used,
internationally established and recognized exposure limits.
handled, or stored, qualified first-aid should be ensured at all
times. Appropriately equipped first-aid stations should be
71 Training of specialized personnel and the maintenance and removal methods
easily accessible throughout the place of work, and eye-wash applied should be equivalent to those required under applicable regulations in the
stations and/or emergency showers should be provided close United States and Europe (examples of North American training standards are
available at: http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/asbestos/training.html)
72 Examples include the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E
to all workstations where the recommended first-aid
1368 - Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos Abatement Projects; E
response is immediate flushing with water 2356 - Standard Practice for Comprehensive Building Asbestos Surveys; and E
2394 - Standard Practice for Maintenance, Renovation and Repair of Installed
Asbestos Cement Products.
APRIL 30, 2007 71

WORLD BANK GROUP
Work processes, engineering, and administrative controls The employer should at all times encourage and enforce the
should be designed, maintained, and operated to avoid or highest level of hygiene and personal protection, especially for
minimize release of biological agents into the working activities employing biological agents of Groups 3 and 4 above.
environment. The number of employees exposed or likely to Work involving agents in Groups 3 and 4 should be restricted only
become exposed should be kept at a minimum. to those persons who have received specific verifiable training in
The employer should review and assess known and working with and controlling such materials.
suspected presence of biological agents at the place of work
and implement appropriate safety measures, monitoring, Areas used for the handling of Groups 3 and 4 biological agents
training, and training verification programs. should be designed to enable their full segregation and isolation in
Measures to eliminate and control hazards from known and emergency circumstances, include independent ventilation
suspected biological agents at the place of work should be systems, and be subject to SOPs requiring routine disinfection
designed, implemented and maintained in close co-operation and sterilization of the work surfaces.
with the local health authorities and according to recognized
international standards. HVAC systems serving areas handling Groups 3 and 4 biological
agents should be equipped with High Efficiency Particulate Air
Biological agents should be classified into four groups73: (HEPA) filtration systems. Equipment should readily enable their
Group 1: Biological agents unlikely to cause human disease, disinfection and sterilization, and maintained and operated so as
and consequently only require controls similar to those to prevent growth and spreading of disease agents, amplification
required for hazardous or reactive chemical substances; of the biological agents, or breeding of vectors e.g. mosquitoes
and flies of public health concern.
Group 2: Biological agents that can cause human disease
and are thereby likely to require additional controls, but are
unlikely to spread to the community;
Group 3: Biological agents that can cause severe human

disease, present a serious hazard to workers, and may
present a risk of spreading to the community, for which there
usually is effective prophylaxis or treatment available and are
thereby likely to require extensive additional controls;
Group 4: Biological agents that can cause severe human

disease, are a serious hazard to workers, and present a high
risk of spreading to the community, for which there is usually
no effective prophylaxis or treatment available and are
thereby likely to require very extensive additional controls.
73 World Health Organization (WHO) Classification of Infective Microorganisms by

Risk Group (2004).
APRIL 30, 2007 72

WORLD BANK GROUP
2.6 Radiological Hazards In the case of both ionizing and non-ionizing radiation, the
preferred method for controlling exposure is shielding and
Radiation exposure can lead to potential discomfort, injury or
limiting the radiation source. Personal protective equipment
serious illness to workers. Prevention and control strategies
is supplemental only or for emergency use. Personal
include:
protective equipment for near-infrared, visible and ultraviolet
Places of work involving occupational and/or natural range radiation can include appropriate sun block creams,
exposure to ionizing radiation should be established and with or without appropriate screening clothing.
operated in accordance with recognized international safety
standards and guidelines.74 The acceptable effective dose 2.7 Personal Protective Equipment
limits appear Table 2.6.1. (PPE)
Exposure to non-ionizing radiation (including static magnetic Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) provides additional
fields; sub-radio frequency magnetic fields; static electric
protection to workers exposed to workplace hazards in
fields; radio frequency and microwave radiation; light and
conjunction with other facility controls and safety systems.
near-infrared radiation; and ultraviolet radiation) should be
controlled to internationally recommended limits75. PPE is considered to be a last resort that is above and beyond the
other facility controls and provides the worker with an extra level
of personal protection. Table 2.7.1 presents general examples of
Table 2.6.1. Acceptable Effective Dose Limits for occupational hazards and types of PPE available for different
Workplace Radiological Hazards
purposes. Recommended measures for use of PPE in the
workplace include:
Apprentices
and
Workers students Active use of PPE if alternative technologies, work plans or
(min.19 years of (16-18 years procedures cannot eliminate, or sufficiently reduce, a hazard
Exposure age) of age)
or exposure
Five consecutive year average
effective dose
20 mSv/year Identification and provision of appropriate PPE that offers
adequate protection to the worker, co-workers, and
Single year exposure
50 mSv/year 6 mSv/year occasional visitors, without incurring unnecessary
effective dose
inconvenience to the individual
Equivalent dose to the lens of
150 mSv/year 50 mSv/year
the eye Proper maintenance of PPE, including cleaning when dirty
and replacement when damaged or worn out. Proper use of
Equivalent dose to the
150
extremities (hands, feet) or the 500 mSv/year PPE should be part of the recurrent training programs for
mSv/year
skin
employees
74 International Basic Safety Standard for protection against Ionizing Radiation and
for the Safety of Radiation Sources and its three interrelated Safety Guides.
IAEA. http://www-ns.iaea.org/standards/documents/default.asp?sub=160
75 For example ACGIH (2005) and International Commission for Non-Ionizing
Radiation (ICNIRP).
APRIL 30, 2007 73

WORLD BANK GROUP
Selection of PPE should be based on the hazard and risk by recognized organizations76.
ranking described earlier in this section, and selected
according to criteria on performance and testing established 2.8 Special Hazard Environments
Special hazard environments are work situations where all of the
previously described hazards may exist under unique or especially
Table 2.7.1. Summary of Recommended Personal
hazardous circumstances. Accordingly, extra precautions or rigor
Protective Equipment
According to Hazard in application of precautions is required.
Objective Workplace Hazards Suggested PPE Confined Space

A confined space is defined as a wholly or partially enclosed
Eye and Flying particles, molten Safety Glasses with side-shields,
face metal, liquid chemicals, protective shades, etc. space not designed or intended for human occupancy and in
protection gases or vapors, light
radiation. which a hazardous atmosphere could develop as a result of the
contents, location or construction of the confined space or due to
Head Falling objects, inadequate Plastic Helmets with top and side
protection height clearance, and impact protection. work done in or around the confined space. A permit-required
overhead power cords.
confined space is one that also contains physical or atmospheric
Hearing Noise, ultra-sound. Hearing protectors (ear plugs or hazards that could trap or engulf the person.77
protection ear muffs).
Foot Falling or rolling objects, Safety shoes and boots for Confined spaces can occur in enclosed or open structures or
protection pointed objects. Corrosive protection against moving &
or hot liquids. falling objects, liquids and locations. Serious injury or fatality can result from inadequate
chemicals.
preparation to enter a confined space or in attempting a rescue
Hand Hazardous materials, cuts Gloves made of rubber or from a confined space. Recommended management approaches
protection or lacerations, vibrations, synthetic materials (Neoprene),
extreme temperatures. leather, steel, insulating include:
materials, etc.
Respiratory Dust, fogs, fumes, mists, Facemasks with appropriate Engineering measures should be implemented to eliminate,
protection gases, smokes, vapors. filters for dust removal and air to the degree feasible, the existence and adverse character
purification (chemicals, mists,
vapors and gases). Single or of confined spaces.
multi-gas personal monitors, if
available. Permit-required confined spaces should be provided with
Oxygen deficiency Portable or supplied air (fixed

permanent safety measures for venting, monitoring, and
lines). rescue operations, to the extent possible. The area adjoining
On-site rescue equipment.
an access to a confined space should provide ample room
Body/leg Extreme temperatures, Insulating clothing, body suits, for emergency and rescue operations.
protection hazardous materials, aprons etc. of appropriate
biological agents, cutting materials.
and laceration.
76 Examples include the American National Standards Institute (ANSI),
http://www.ansi.org/; National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health76
(NIOSH), http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/homepage.html; Canadian Standards
Association76 (CSA), http://www.csa.ca/Default.asp?language=english; Mine
Safety and Health Administration76 (MSHA), http://www.msha.gov.
77 US OSHA CFR 1910.146
APRIL 30, 2007 74

WORLD BANK GROUP
Access hatches should accommodate 90% of the worker persons capable of providing aid and assistance, for continuous
population with adjustments for tools and protective clothing. periods exceeding one hour. The worker is therefore at increased
The most current ISO and EN standards should be consulted risk should an accident or injury occur.
for design specifications;
Where workers may be required to perform work under lone
Prior to entry into a permit-required confined space: or isolated circumstances, Standard Operating Procedures
o Process or feed lines into the space should be (SOPs) should be developed and implemented to ensure all
disconnected or drained, and blanked and locked-out. PPE and safety measures are in place before the worker
o Mechanical equipment in the space should be starts work. SOPs should establish, at a minimum, verbal
disconnected, de-energized, locked-out, and braced, as contact with the worker at least once every hour, and ensure
appropriate. the worker has a capability for summoning emergency aid.
o The atmosphere within the confined space should be If the worker is potentially exposed to highly toxic or corrosive
tested to assure the oxygen content is between 19.5 chemicals, emergency eye-wash and shower facilities should
percent and 23 percent, and that the presence of any be equipped with audible and visible alarms to summon aid
flammable gas or vapor does not exceed 25 percent of whenever the eye-wash or shower is activated by the worker
its respective Lower Explosive Limit (LEL). and without intervention by the worker.
o If the atmospheric conditions are not met, the confined
space should be ventilated until the target safe
2.9 Monitoring
atmosphere is achieved, or entry is only to be Occupational health and safety monitoring programs should verify
undertaken with appropriate and additional PPE. the effectiveness of prevention and control strategies. The
selected indicators should be representative of the most
Safety precautions should include Self Contained Breathing
significant occupational, health, and safety hazards, and the
Apparatus (SCBA), life lines, and safety watch workers
implementation of prevention and control strategies. The
stationed outside the confined space, with rescue and first
occupational health and safety monitoring program should include:
aid equipment readily available.
Safety inspection, testing and calibration: This should include
Before workers are required to enter a permit-required
confined space, adequate and appropriate training in regular inspection and testing of all safety features and
hazard control measures focusing on engineering and
confined space hazard control, atmospheric testing, use of
personal protective features, work procedures, places of
the necessary PPE, as well as the serviceability and integrity
work, installations, equipment, and tools used. The
of the PPE should be verified. Further, adequate and
inspection should verify that issued PPE continues to provide
appropriate rescue and / or recovery plans and equipment
should be in place before the worker enters the confined adequate protection and is being worn as required. All
space. instruments installed or used for monitoring and recording of

working environment parameters should be regularly tested
Lone and Isolated Workers and calibrated, and the respective records maintained.
A lone and isolated worker is a worker out of verbal and line of Surveillance of the working environment: Employers should
sight communication with a supervisor, other workers, or other document compliance using an appropriate combination of
APRIL 30, 2007 75

WORLD BANK GROUP
portable and stationary sampling and monitoring instruments. The systems and the employer should further enable and
Monitoring and analyses should be conducted according to encourage workers to report to management all:
internationally recognized methods and standards. o Occupational injuries and near misses
Monitoring methodology, locations, frequencies, and o Suspected cases of occupational disease
parameters should be established individually for each o Dangerous occurrences and incidents
project following a review of the hazards. Generally,
All reported occupational accidents, occupational diseases,
monitoring should be performed during commissioning of
dangerous occurrences, and incidents together with near
facilities or equipment and at the end of the defect and
misses should be investigated with the assistance of a
liability period, and otherwise repeated according to the
person knowledgeable/competent in occupational safety. The
monitoring plan.
investigation should:
Surveillance of workers health: When extraordinary
o Establish what happened
protective measures are required (for example, against
o Determine the cause of what happened
biological agents Groups 3 and 4, and/or hazardous
o Identify measures necessary to prevent a recurrence
compounds), workers should be provided appropriate and
relevant health surveillance prior to first exposure, and at Occupational accidents and diseases should, at a minimum,
regular intervals thereafter. The surveillance should, if be classified according to Table 2.10.1. Distinction is made
deemed necessary, be continued after termination of the between fatal and non-fatal injuries. The two main categories
employment. are divided into three sub-categories according to time of
Training: Training activities for employees and visitors should death or duration of the incapacity to work. The total work
be adequately monitored and documented (curriculum, hours during the specified reporting period should be
duration, and participants). Emergency exercises, including reported to the appropriate regulatory agency.
fire drills, should be documented adequately. Service Table 2.9.1. Occupational Accident Reporting
providers and contractors should be contractually required to
submit to the employer adequate training documentation a. Fatalities b. Non-fatal c. Total time lost
before start of their assignment. (number) injuries non-fatal injuries
(number) 78 (days)
b.1 Less than one
a.1 Immediate
Accidents and Diseases monitoring day
The employer should establish procedures and systems for a.2 Within a month b.2 Up to 3 days c.1 Category b.2
reporting and recording: b.3 More than 3

a.3 Within a year c.2 Category b.3
days
o Occupational accidents and diseases
o Dangerous occurrences and incidents
These systems should enable workers to report immediately
to their immediate supervisor any situation they believe
presents a serious danger to life or health.
78 The day on which an incident occurs is not included in b.2 and b.3.
APRIL 30, 2007 76

GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
3.0 Community Health and Safety

3.1 Water Quality and Availability ...................................77 impoundment should prevent adverse impacts to the quality and
Water Quality.........................................................77 availability of groundwater and surface water resources.
Water Availability....................................................77
3.2 Structural Safety of Project Infrastructure ..................78
3.3 Life and Fire Safety (L&FS) ......................................79 Water Quality
Applicability and Approach......................................79 Drinking water sources, whether public or private, should at all
Specific Requirements for New Buildings................79
times be protected so that they meet or exceed applicable national
L&FS Master Plan Review and Approval.................80
Specific Requirements for Existing Buildings ...........81 acceptability standards or in their absence the current edition of
Other Hazards........................................................81 WHO Guidelines for Drinking-Water Quality. Air emissions,
3.4 Traffic Safety............................................................81
3.5 Transport of Hazardous Materials .............................82 wastewater effluents, oil and hazardous materials, and wastes
General Hazardous Materials Transport..................82 should be managed according to the guidance provided in the
Major Transportation Hazards.................................83 respective sections of the General EHS Guidelines with the
3.6 Disease Prevention..................................................85
Communicable Diseases........................................85 objective of protecting soil and water resources.
Vector-Borne Diseases...........................................85
Where the project includes the delivery of water to the community
3.7 Emergency Preparedness and Response .................86
Communication Systems ........................................86 or to users of facility infrastructure (such as hotel hosts and
Emergency Resources ...........................................87 hospital patients), where water may be used for drinking, cooking,
Training and Updating ............................................87 washing, and bathing, water quality should comply with national
Business Continuity and Contingency .....................88
Applicability and Approach......................................89 acceptability standards or in their absence the current edition of
with WHO Drinking Water Guidelines. Water quality for more
sensitive well-being-related demands such as water used in health
This section complements the guidance provided in the preceding
care facilities or food production may require more stringent,
environmental and occupational health and safety sections,
industry-specific guidelines or standards, as applicable. Any
specifically addressing some aspects of project activities taking
dependency factors associated with the deliver of water to the
place outside of the traditional project boundaries, but nonetheless
local community should be planned for and managed to ensure
related to the project operations, as may be applicable on a
the sustainability of the water supply by involving the community in
project basis. These issues may arise at any stage of a project life
its management to minimize the dependency in the long-term.
cycle and can have an impact beyond the life of the project.
Water Availability
3.1 Water Quality and Availability The potential effect of groundwater or surface water abstraction
Groundwater and surface water represent essential sources of
for project activities should be properly assessed through a
drinking and irrigation water in developing countries, particularly in
combination of field testing and modeling techniques, accounting
rural areas where piped water supply may be limited or
for seasonal variability and projected changes in demand in the
unavailable and where available resources are collected by the
project area.
consumer with little or no treatment. Project activities involving
wastewater discharges, water extraction, diversion or
APRIL 30, 2007 77

WORLD BANK GROUP
Project activities should not compromise the availability of water project structures should be designed in accordance with
for personal hygiene needs and should take account of potential engineering and design criteria mandated by site-specific
future increases in demand. The overall target should be the risks, including but not limited to seismic activity, slope
availability of 100 liters per person per day although lower levels stability, wind loading, and other dynamic loads
may be used to meet basic health requirements.79 Water volume Application of locally regulated or internationally recognized
requirements for well-being-related demands such as water use in building codes80 to ensure structures are designed and
health care facilities may need to be higher. constructed in accordance with sound architectural and
engineering practice, including aspects of fire prevention and
3.2 Structural Safety of Project response
Infrastructure Engineers and architects responsible for designing and
Hazards posed to the public while accessing project facilities may constructing facilities, building, plants and other structures
include: should certify the applicability and appropriateness of the
Physical trauma associated with failure of building structures structural criteria employed.
Burns and smoke inhalation from fires International codes, such as those compiled by the International
Injuries suffered as a consequence of falls or contact with Code Council (ICC) 81, are intended to regulate the design,
heavy equipment construction, and maintenance of a built environment and contain
Respiratory distress from dust, fumes, or noxious odors detailed guidance on all aspects of building safety, encompassing
Exposure to hazardous materials methodology, best practices, and documenting compliance.
Reduction of potential hazards is best accomplished during the Depending on the nature of a project, guidance provided in the
design phase when the structural design, layout and site ICC or comparable codes should be followed, as appropriate, with
modifications can be adapted more easily. The following issues respect to:
should be considered and incorporated as appropriate into the
Existing structures
planning, siting, and design phases of a project:
Soils and foundations
Inclusion of buffer strips or other methods of physical Site grading

separation around project sites to protect the public from Structural design
major hazards associated with hazardous materials incidents Specific requirements based on intended use and occupancy
or process failure, as well as nuisance issues related to Accessibility and means of egress
noise, odors, or other emissions Types of construction
Incorporation of siting and safety engineering criteria to Roof design and construction
prevent failures due to natural risks posed by earthquakes, Fire-resistant construction
tsunamis, wind, flooding, landslides and fire. To this end, all Flood-resistant construction
79 World Health Organization (WHO) defines 100 liters/capita/day as the amount

80 ILO-OSH, 2001. http://www.ilo.org/public/english/protection/
required to meet all consumption and hygiene needs. Additional information on
lower service levels and potential impacts on health are described in Domestic safework/cops/english/download/e000013.pdf
Water Quantity, Service Level and Health 2003. 81 ICC, 2006.
http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/diseases/wsh0302/en/index.html
APRIL 30, 2007 78

WORLD BANK GROUP
Construction materials codes, local fire department regulations, local legal/insurance

Interior environment requirements, and in accordance with an internationally accepted
Mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems life and fire safety (L&FS) standard. The Life Safety Code82, which
Elevators and conveying systems provides extensive documentation on life and fire safety
Fire safety systems provisions, is one example of an internationally accepted standard
Safeguards during construction and may be used to document compliance with the Life and Fire
Encroachments into public right-of-way Safety objectives outlined in these guidelines. With regard to
these objectives:
Although major design changes may not be feasible during the
operation phase of a project, hazard analysis can be undertaken Project sponsors architects and professional consulting
to identify opportunities to reduce the consequences of a failure or engineers should demonstrate that affected buildings meet
accident. Illustrative management actions, applicable to these life and fire safety objectives.
hazardous materials storage and use, include: Life and fire safety systems and equipment should be
Reducing inventories of hazardous materials through designed and installed using appropriate prescriptive
inventory management and process changes to greatly standards and/or performance based design, and sound
reduce or eliminate the potential off-site consequences of a engineering practices.
release Life and fire safety design criteria for all existing buildings
Modifying process or storage conditions to reduce the should incorporate all local building codes and fire
potential consequences of an accidental off-site release department regulations.
Improving shut-down and secondary containment to reduce
These guidelines apply to buildings that are accessible to the
the amount of material escaping from containment and to
public. Examples of such buildings include:
reduce the release duration
Reducing the probability that releases will occur through Health and education facilities
improved site operations and control, and through Hotels, convention centers, and leisure facilities
improvements in maintenance and inspection Retail and commercial facilities
Reducing off-site impacts of releases through measures Airports, other public transport terminals, transfer facilities
intended to contain explosions and fires, alert the public,
provide for evacuation of surrounding areas, establish safety Specific Requirements for New Buildings
zones around a site, and ensure the provision of emergency The nature and extent of life and fire safety systems required will
medical services to the public depend on the building type, structure, construction, occupancy,
and exposures. Sponsors should prepare a Life and Fire Safety
3.3 Life and Fire Safety (L&FS) Master Plan identifying major fire risks, applicable codes,
standards and regulations, and mitigation measures. The Master
82 US NFPA.
All new buildings accessible to the public should be designed, http://www.nfpa.org/catalog/product.asp?category%5Fname=&pid=10106&target%
constructed, and operated in full compliance with local building 5Fpid=10106&src%5Fpid=&link%5Ftype=search
APRIL 30, 2007 79

WORLD BANK GROUP
Plan should be prepared by a suitably qualified professional, and Compartmentation

adequately cover, but not be limited to, the issues addressed Compartmentation involves all measures to prevent or slow the
briefly in the following points. The suitably qualified professional spread of fire and smoke, including:
selected to prepare the Master Plan is responsible for a detailed
Separations
treatment of the following illustrative, and all other required,
Fire walls
issues.
Floors
Fire Prevention Doors
Fire prevention addresses the identification of fire risks and Dampers

ignition sources, and measures needed to limit fast fire and smoke Smoke control systems
development. These issues include:
Fire Suppression and Control
Fuel load and control of combustibles
Fire suppression and control includes all automatic and manual
Ignition sources
fire protection installations, such as:
Interior finish flame spread characteristics
Automatic sprinkler systems
Interior finish smoke production characteristics
Manual portable extinguishers
Human acts, and housekeeping and maintenance
Fire hose reels
Means of Egress
Means of Egress includes all design measures that facilitate a
Emergency Response Plan
safe evacuation by residents and/or occupants in case of fire or An Emergency Response Plan is a set of scenariobased
other emergency, such as: procedures to assist staff and emergency response teams during
real life emergency and training exercises. This chapter of the Fire
Clear, unimpeded escape routes
and Life Safety Master Plan should include an assessment of local
Accessibility to the impaired/handicapped fire prevention and suppression capabilities.
Marking and signing
Emergency lighting Operation and Maintenance
Operation and Maintenance involves preparing schedules for
Detection and Alarm Systems mandatory regular maintenance and testing of life and fire safety
These systems encompass all measures, including features to ensure that mechanical, electrical, and civil structures
communication and public address systems needed to detect a and systems are at all times in conformance with life and fire
fire and alert: safety design criteria and required operational readiness.
Building staff
Emergency response teams
L&FS Master Plan Review and Approval
Occupants A suitably qualified professional prepares and submits a Life
Civil defense and Fire Safety (L&FS) Master Plan, including preliminary
drawings and specifications, and certifies that the design
APRIL 30, 2007 80

WORLD BANK GROUP
meets the requirements of these L&FS guidelines. The earthquakes, tsunamis, floods, windstorms, and fires from
findings and recommendations of the review are then used to surrounding areas).
establish the conditions of a Corrective Action Plan and a All such structures should be designed in accordance with
time frame for implementing the changes. the criteria mandated by situation-, climatic-, and geology-
The suitably qualified professional conducts a review as part specific location risks (e.g. seismic activity, wind loading, and
of the project completion test at the time of life and fire safety other dynamic loads).
systems testing and commissioning, and certifies that Structural engineers and architects responsible for facilities,
construction of these systems has been carried out in buildings, plants and structures should certify the applicability
accordance with the accepted design. The findings and and appropriateness of the design criteria employed.
recommendations of the review are used as the basis for National or regional building regulations typically contain fire
establishing project completion or to establish the conditions safety codes and standards83 or these standards are found in
of a Pre-Completion Corrective Action Plan and a time frame separate Fire Codes.84,85 Generally, such codes and
for implementing the changes. regulations incorporate further compliance requirements with
respect to methodology, practice, testing, and other codes
Specific Requirements for Existing
and standards86. Such nationally referenced material
Buildings
constitutes the acceptable fire life safety code.
All life and fire safety guideline requirements for new
buildings apply to existing buildings programmed for
3.4 Traffic Safety
renovation. A suitably qualified professional conducts a
Traffic accidents have become one of the most significant causes
complete life and fire safety review of existing buildings
of injuries and fatalities among members of the public worldwide.
slated for renovation. The findings and recommendations of
Traffic safety should be promoted by all project personnel during
the review are used as the basis to establish the scope of
displacement to and from the workplace, and during operation of
work of a Corrective Action Plan and a time frame for
project equipment on private or public roads. Prevention and
implementing the changes.
control of traffic related injuries and fatalities should include the
If it becomes apparent that life and fire safety conditions are
adoption of safety measures that are protective of project workers
deficient in an existing building that is not part of the project
and of road users, including those who are most vulnerable to
or that has not been programmed for renovation, a life and
road traffic accidents87. Road safety initiatives proportional to the
fire safety review of the building may be conducted by a
scope and nature of project activities should include:
suitably qualified professional. The findings and
recommendations of the review are used as the basis to
establish the scope of work of a Corrective Action Plan and a 83 For example, Australia, Canada, South Africa, United Kingdom
84 Rglementation Incendie [des ERP]
time frame for implementing the changes.
85 USA NFPA, 2006.
86 Prepared by National Institutes and Authorities such as American Society for
Other Hazards Testing and Materials (ASTM), British Standards (BS), German Institute of
Standardization (DIN), and French Standards (NF)
Facilities, buildings, plants, and structures should be situated 87 Additional information on vulnerable users of public roads in developing
countries is provided by Peden et al., 2004.
to minimize potential risks from forces of nature (e.g.
APRIL 30, 2007 81

WORLD BANK GROUP
Adoption of best transport safety practices across all aspects Employing safe traffic control measures, including road signs
of project operations with the goal of preventing traffic and flag persons to warn of dangerous conditions
accidents and minimizing injuries suffered by project
personnel and the public. Measures should include: 3.5 Transport of Hazardous Materials
o Emphasizing safety aspects among drivers
General Hazardous Materials Transport
o Improving driving skills and requiring licensing of drivers
Projects should have procedures in place that ensure
o Adopting limits for trip duration and arranging driver
compliance with local laws and international requirements
rosters to avoid overtiredness
applicable to the transport of hazardous materials, including:
o Avoiding dangerous routes and times of day to reduce
the risk of accidents o IATA requirements89 for air transport
o Use of speed control devices (governors) on trucks, and o IMDG Code90 sea transport
remote monitoring of driver actions o UN Model Regulations91 of other international standards
as well as local requirements for land transport
Regular maintenance of vehicles and use of manufacturer
o Host-country commitments under the Basel Convention
approved parts to minimize potentially serious accidents
on the Control of Transboundary Movements of
caused by equipment malfunction or premature failure.
Hazardous Waste and their disposal and Rotterdam
Where the project may contribute to a significant increase in traffic Convention on the prior Inform Consent Procedure for
along existing roads, or where road transport is a significant Certain Hazardous Chemicals and Pesticides in
component of a project, recommended measures include: International Trade, if applicable to the project activities
Minimizing pedestrian interaction with construction vehicles The procedures for transportation of hazardous materials
Collaboration with local communities and responsible (Hazmats) should include:
authorities to improve signage, visibility and overall safety of o Proper labeling of containers, including the identify and
roads, particularly along stretches located near schools or quantity of the contents, hazards, and shipper contact
other locations where children may be present. Collaborating information
with local communities on education about traffic and o Providing a shipping document (e.g. shipping manifest)
pedestrian safety (e.g. school education campaigns)88 that describes the contents of the load and its
Coordination with emergency responders to ensure that associated hazards in addition to the labeling of the
appropriate first aid is provided in the event of accidents containers. The shipping document should establish a
Using locally sourced materials, whenever possible, to chain-of-custody using multiple signed copies to show
minimize transport distances. Locating associated facilities that the waste was properly shipped, transported and
such as worker camps close to project sites and arranging received by the recycling or treatment/disposal facility
worker bus transport to minimizing external traffic
89 IATA, 2005. www.iata.org
90 IMO. www.imo.org/safety
88Additional sources of information for implementation of road safety measures is 91 United Nations. Transport of Dangerous Goods - Model Regulations. 14th
available at WHO, 1989, Ross et al., 1991, Tsunokawa and Hoban, 1997, and Revised Edition. Geneva 2005.
OECD, 1999 http://www.unece.org/trans/danger/publi/unrec/rev14/14files_e.html
APRIL 30, 2007 82

WORLD BANK GROUP
o Ensuring that the volume, nature, integrity and The existing criteria for the safe transportation of hazardous
protection of packaging and containers used for materials, including environmental management systems
transport are appropriate for the type and quantity of used by the company and its contractors
hazardous material and modes of transport involved
This review should cover the management actions, preventive
o Ensuring adequate transport vehicle specifications
measures and emergency response procedures described below.
o Training employees involved in the transportation of
The hazard assessment helps to determine what additional
hazardous materials regarding proper shipping
measures may be required to complete the plan.
procedures and emergency procedures
o Using labeling and placarding (external signs on Management Actions
transport vehicles), as required
Management of Change: These procedures should address:
o Providing the necessary means for emergency response
o The technical basis for changes in hazardous materials
on call 24 hours/day
offered for transportation, routes and/or procedures
Major Transportation Hazards o The potential impact of changes on health and safety
Guidance related to major transportation hazards should be o Modification required to operating procedures
implemented in addition to measures presented in the preceding o Authorization requirements
section for preventing or minimizing the consequences of o Employees affected
catastrophic releases of hazardous materials, which may result in o Training needs
toxic, fire, explosion, or other hazards during transportation. Compliance Audit: A compliance audit evaluates compliance
with prevention requirements for each transportation route or
In addition to these aforementioned procedures, projects which
for each hazardous material, as appropriate. A compliance
transport hazardous materials at or above the threshold
audit covering each element of the prevention measures (see
quantities92 should prepare a Hazardous Materials Transportation
below) should be conducted at least every three years. The
Plan containing all of the elements presented below93.
audit program should include:
o Preparation of a report of the findings
Hazard Assessment
o Determination and documentation of the appropriate
The hazard assessment should identify the potential hazard
response to each finding
involved in the transportation of hazardous materials by reviewing:
o Documentation that any deficiency has been corrected.
The hazard characteristics of the substances identified during
Incident Investigation: Incidents can provide valuable
the screening stage
information about transportation hazards and the steps
The history of accidents, both by the company and its
needed to prevent accidental releases. The implementation
contractors, involving hazardous materials transportation
of incident investigation procedures should ensure that:
92 Threshold quantities for the transport of hazardous materials are found in the UN
Transport of Dangerous Goods Model Regulations cited above.

o Investigations are initiated promptly
93 For further information and guidance, please refer to International Finance o Summaries of investigations are included in a report
Corporation (IFC) Hazardous Materials Transportation Manual. Washington,
D.C. December 2000. o Report findings and recommendations are addressed
APRIL 30, 2007 83

WORLD BANK GROUP
o Reports are reviewed with staff and contractors Preventive Measures

Employee Participation: There should be a written plan of The plan should include procedures to implement preventive
action regarding the implementation of active employee measures specific to each hazardous material offered for
participation in the prevention of accidents. transportation, including:
Classification and segregation of hazardous materials in

Contractors: The plan should include procedures to ensure
warehouses and transport units
that:
Packaging and packaging testing
o The contractor is provided with safety performance
Marking and labeling of packages containing hazardous
procedures and safety and hazard information
materials
o Contractors observe safety practices
Handling and securing packages containing hazardous
o Verify that the contractor acts responsibly
materials in transport units
The plan should also include additional procedures to ensure Marking and placarding of transport units
the contractors will: Documentation (e.g. bills of lading)
o Ensure appropriate training for their employees Application of special provisions, as appropriate
o Ensure their employees know process hazards and
applicable emergency actions Emergency Preparedness and Response
o Prepare and submit training records It is important to develop procedures and practices for the
o Inform employees about the hazards presented by their handling of hazardous materials that allow for quick and efficient
work responses to accidents that may result in injury or environmental
damage. The sponsor should prepare an Emergency
Training: Good training programs on operating procedures
Preparedness and Response Plan that should cover:
will provide the employees with the necessary information to
understand how to operate safely and why safe operations Planning Coordination: This should include procedures for:
are needed. The training program should include: o Informing the public and emergency response agencies
o The list of employees to be trained o Documenting first aid and emergency medical treatment
o Specific training objectives o Taking emergency response actions
o Mechanisms to achieve objectives (i.e. hands-on o Reviewing and updating the emergency response plan
workshops, videos, etc.) to reflect changes and ensuring that the employees are
o Means to determine the effectiveness of the training informed of such changes
program
Emergency Equipment: The plan should include procedures
o Training procedures for new hires and refresher
for using, inspecting, testing, and maintaining emergency
programs
response equipment.
Training: Employees should be trained in any relevant

procedures
APRIL 30, 2007 84

WORLD BANK GROUP
3.6 Disease Prevention access to medical treatment, confidentiality and appropriate

care, particularly with respect to migrant workers
Communicable Diseases Promoting collaboration with local authorities to enhance
Communicable diseases pose a significant public health threat access of workers families and the community to public
worldwide. Health hazards typically associated with large health services and promote immunization
development projects are those relating to poor sanitation and
living conditions, sexual transmission and vector-borne infections. Vector-Borne Diseases
Communicable diseases of most concern during the construction Reducing the impact of vector-borne disease on the long-term
phase due to labor mobility are sexually-transmitted diseases health of workers is best accomplished through implementation of
(STDs), such as HIV/AIDS. Recognizing that no single measure diverse interventions aimed at eliminating the factors that lead to
is likely to be effective in the long term, successful initiatives disease. Project sponsors, in close collaboration with community
typically involve a combination of behavioral and environmental health authorities, can implement an integrated control strategy for
modifications. mosquito and other arthropod-borne diseases that might involve:
Prevention of larval and adult propagation through sanitary

Recommended interventions at the project level include94:
improvements and elimination of breeding habitats close to
Providing surveillance and active screening and treatment of human settlements
workers Elimination of unusable impounded water
Preventing illness among workers in local communities by: Increase in water velocity in natural and artificial channels
o Undertaking health awareness and education initiatives, Considering the application of residual insecticide to
for example, by implementing an information strategy to dormitory walls
reinforce person-to-person counseling addressing Implementation of integrated vector control programs
systemic factors that can influence individual behavior Promoting use of repellents, clothing, netting, and other
as well as promoting individual protection, and barriers to prevent insect bites
protecting others from infection, by encouraging condom Use of chemoprophylaxis drugs by non-immune workers and
use collaborating with public health officials to help eradicate
o Training health workers in disease treatment disease reservoirs
o Conducting immunization programs for workers in local
Monitoring and treatment of circulating and migrating
communities to improve health and guard against
populations to prevent disease reservoir spread
infection
Collaboration and exchange of in-kind services with other
o Providing health services control programs in the project area to maximize beneficial
Providing treatment through standard case management in effects
on-site or community health care facilities. Ensuring ready Educating project personnel and area residents on risks,
prevention, and available treatment
Monitoring communities during high-risk seasons to detect
Additional sources of information on disease prevention include IFC, 2006;
94
UNDP, 2000, 2003; Walley et al., 2000; Kindhauser, 2003; Heymann, 2004. and treat cases
APRIL 30, 2007 85

WORLD BANK GROUP
Distributing appropriate education materials Alarm bells, visual alarms, or other forms of communication
Following safety guidelines for the storage, transport, and should be used to reliably alert workers to an emergency. Related
distribution of pesticides to minimize the potential for misuse, measures include:
spills, and accidental human exposure
Testing warning systems at least annually (fire alarms
monthly), and more frequently if required by local regulations,
3.7 Emergency Preparedness and equipment, or other considerations
Response Installing a back-up system for communications on-site with
An emergency is an unplanned event when a project operation off-site resources, such as fire departments, in the event that
loses control, or could lose control, of a situation that may result in normal communication methods may be inoperable during an
risks to human health, property, or the environment, either within emergency
the facility or in the local community. Emergencies do not
normally include safe work practices for frequent upsets or events Community Notification
that are covered by occupational health and safety. If a local community may be at risk from a potential emergency
arising at the facility, the company should implement
All projects should have an Emergency Preparedness and
communication measures to alert the community, such as:
Response Plan that is commensurate with the risks of the facility
and that includes the following basic elements: Audible alarms, such as fire bells or sirens
Administration (policy, purpose, distribution, definitions, etc) Fan out telephone call lists
Organization of emergency areas (command centers, Vehicle mounted speakers
medical stations, etc) Communicating details of the nature of the emergency
Roles and responsibilities Communicating protection options (evacuation, quarantine)
Communication systems Providing advise on selecting an appropriate protection
Emergency response procedures option
Emergency resources
Media and Agency Relations
Training and updating
Emergency information should be communicated to the media
Checklists (role and action list and equipment checklist)
through:
Business Continuity and Contingency
A trained, local spokesperson able to interact with relevant
Additional information is provided for key components of the stakeholders, and offer guidance to the company for
emergency plan, as follows below. speaking to the media, government, and other agencies
Written press releases with accurate information, appropriate
Communication Systems
level of detail for the emergency, and for which accuracy can
Worker notification and communication be guaranteed
APRIL 30, 2007 86

WORLD BANK GROUP
Emergency Resources Considering the quantity, response time, capability,

limitations, and cost of these resources, for both site-specific
Finance and Emergency Funds emergencies, and community or regional emergencies
A mechanism should be provided for funding emergency Considering if external resources are unable to provide
activities. sufficient capacity during a regional emergency and whether
additional resources may need to be maintained on-site
Fire Services
The company should consider the level of local fire fighting Mutual Aid
capacity and whether equipment is available for use at the Mutual aid agreements decrease administrative confusion and
facility in the event of a major emergency or natural disaster. provide a clear basis for response by mutual aid providers.
If insufficient capacity is available, fire fighting capacity
Where appropriate, mutual aid agreements should be
should be acquired that may include pumps, water supplies,
maintained with other organizations to allow for sharing of
trucks, and training for personnel.
personnel and specialized equipment.
Medical Services
Contact List
The company should provide first aid attendants for the
The company should develop a list of contact information for
facility as well as medical equipment suitable for the
all internal and external resources and personnel. The list
personnel, type of operation, and the degree of treatment
should include the name, description, location, and contact
likely to be required prior to transportation to hospital.
details (telephone, email) for each of the resources, and be
maintained annually.
Availability of Resources
Appropriate measures for managing the availability of resources in
Training and Updating
case of an emergency include:
The emergency preparedness facilities and emergency response
Maintaining a list of external equipment, personnel, facilities, plans require maintenance, review, and updating to account for
funding, expert knowledge, and materials that may be changes in equipment, personnel, and facilities. Training
required to respond to emergencies. The list should include programs and practice exercises provide for testing systems to
personnel with specialized expertise for spill clean-up, flood ensure an adequate level of emergency preparedness. Programs
control, engineering, water treatment, environmental science, should:
etc., or any of the functions required to adequately respond
Identify training needs based on the roles and
to the identified emergency
responsibilities, capabilities and requirements of personnel
Providing personnel who can readily call up resources, as
in an emergency
required
Develop a training plan to address needs, particularly for fire
Tracking and managing the costs associated with emergency
fighting, spill response, and evacuation
resources
APRIL 30, 2007 87

WORLD BANK GROUP
Conduct annual training, at least, and perhaps more frequent

training when the response includes specialized equipment,
procedures, or hazards, or when otherwise mandated
Provide training exercises to allow personnel the opportunity
to test emergency preparedness, including:
o Desk top exercises with only a few personnel, where the
contact lists are tested and the facilities and
communication assessed
o Response exercises, typically involving drills that allow
for testing of equipment and logistics
o Debrief upon completion of a training exercise to assess
what worked well and what aspects require improvement
o Update the plan, as required, after each exercise. Elements
of the plan subject to significant change (such as contact
lists) should be replaced
o Record training activities and the outcomes of the training
Business Continuity and Contingency

Measures to address business continuity and contingency include:
Identifying replacement supplies or facilities to allow business

continuity following an emergency. For example, alternate
sources of water, electricity, and fuel are commonly sought.
Using redundant or duplicate supply systems as part of
facility operations to increase the likelihood of business
continuity.
Maintaining back-ups of critical information in a secure
location to expedite the return to normal operations following
an emergency.
APRIL 30, 2007 88

GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING
WORLD BANK GROUP
4.0 Construction and Decommissioning

planned during periods of the day that will result in least
4.1 Environment.............................................................89
disturbance
Noise and Vibration ................................................89
Soil Erosion............................................................89 Using noise control devices, such as temporary noise
Air Quality..............................................................90 barriers and deflectors for impact and blasting activities, and
Solid Waste............................................................90 exhaust muffling devices for combustion engines.
Hazardous Materials...............................................91
Wastewater Discharges..........................................91 Avoiding or minimizing project transportation through
Contaminated Land ................................................91 community areas
4.2 Occupational Health and Safety................................92
4.3 Community Health and Safety ..................................94
General Site Hazards .............................................94
Soil Erosion
Disease Prevention ................................................94 Soil erosion may be caused by exposure of soil surfaces to rain
Traffic Safety..........................................................95 and wind during site clearing, earth moving, and excavation
activities. The mobilization and transport of soil particles may, in
turn, result in sedimentation of surface drainage networks, which
may result in impacts to the quality of natural water systems and
This section provides additional, specific guidance on prevention
ultimately the biological systems that use these waters.
and control of community health and safety impacts that may
Recommended soil erosion and water system management
occur during new project development, at the end of the project
approaches include:
life-cycle, or due to expansion or modification of existing project
facilities. Cross referencing is made to various other sections of
Sediment mobilization and transport
the General EHS Guidelines.
Reducing or preventing erosion by:
Scheduling to avoid heavy rainfall periods (i.e., during

4.1 Environment{ TC "4.1 o
the dry season) to the extent practical
Environment" \f C \l "2" }
o Contouring and minimizing length and steepness of
Noise and Vibration slopes
During construction and decommissioning activities, noise and o Mulching to stabilize exposed areas
vibration may be caused by the operation of pile drivers, earth o Re-vegetating areas promptly
moving and excavation equipment, concrete mixers, cranes and o Designing channels and ditches for post-construction
the transportation of equipment, materials and people. Some flows
recommended noise reduction and control strategies to consider o Lining steep channel and slopes (e.g. use jute matting)
in areas close to community areas include: Reducing or preventing off-site sediment transport through
Planning activities in consultation with local communities so use of settlement ponds, silt fences, and water treatment,
that activities with the greatest potential to generate noise are and modifying or suspending activities during extreme rainfall
and high winds to the extent practical.
APRIL 30, 2007 89

WORLD BANK GROUP
Clean runoff management Air Quality

Segregating or diverting clean water runoff to prevent it Construction and decommissioning activities may generate
mixing with water containing a high solids content, to emission of fugitive dust caused by a combination of on-site
minimize the volume of water to be treated prior to release excavation and movement of earth materials, contact of
construction machinery with bare soil, and exposure of bare soil
Road design and soil piles to wind. A secondary source of emissions may
Limiting access road gradients to reduce runoff-induced include exhaust from diesel engines of earth moving equipment,
erosion as well as from open burning of solid waste on-site. Techniques to
Providing adequate road drainage based on road width, consider for the reduction and control of air emissions from
surface material, compaction, and maintenance construction and decommissioning sites include:
Minimizing dust from material handling sources, such as

Disturbance to water bodies
conveyors and bins, by using covers and/or control
Depending on the potential for adverse impacts, installing
equipment (water suppression, bag house, or cyclone)
free-spanning structures (e.g., single span bridges) for road
Minimizing dust from open area sources, including storage
watercourse crossings
piles, by using control measures such as installing
Restricting the duration and timing of in-stream activities to
enclosures and covers, and increasing the moisture content
lower low periods, and avoiding periods critical to biological
Dust suppression techniques should be implemented, such
cycles of valued flora and fauna (e.g., migration, spawning,
as applying water or non-toxic chemicals to minimize dust
etc.)
from vehicle movements
For in-stream works, using isolation techniques such as
Selectively removing potential hazardous air pollutants, such
berming or diversion during construction to limit the exposure
as asbestos, from existing infrastructure prior to demolition
of disturbed sediments to moving water
Managing emissions from mobile sources according to
Consider using trenchless technology for pipeline crossings
Section 1.1
(e.g., suspended crossings) or installation by directional
Avoiding open burning of solid (refer to solid waste
drilling
management guidance in Section 1.6)
Structural (slope) stability

Solid Waste
Providing effective short term measures for slope
Non-hazardous solid waste generated at construction and
stabilization, sediment control and subsidence control until
decommissioning sites includes excess fill materials from grading
long term measures for the operational phase can be
and excavation activities, scrap wood and metals, and small
implemented
concrete spills. Other non-hazardous solid wastes include office,
Providing adequate drainage systems to minimize and
kitchen, and dormitory wastes when these types of operations are
control infiltration
part of construction project activities. Hazardous solid waste
includes contaminated soils, which could potentially be
encountered on-site due to previous land use activities, or small
APRIL 30, 2007 90

WORLD BANK GROUP
amounts of machinery maintenance materials, such as oily rags, Wastewater Discharges

used oil filters, and used oil, as well as spill cleanup materials from Construction and decommissioning activities may include the
oil and fuel spills. Techniques for preventing and controlling non- generation of sanitary wastewater discharges in varying quantities
hazardous and hazardous construction site solid waste include depending on the number of workers involved. Adequate portable
those already discussed in Section 1.6. or permanent sanitation facilities serving all workers should be
provided at all construction sites. Sanitary wastewater in
Hazardous Materials
construction and other sites should be managed as described in
Construction and decommissioning activities may pose the
Section 1.3.
potential for release of petroleum based products, such as
lubricants, hydraulic fluids, or fuels during their storage, transfer, Contaminated Land
or use in equipment. These materials may also be encountered Land contamination may be encountered in sites under
during decommissioning activities in building components or construction or decommissioning due to known or unknown
industrial process equipment. Techniques for prevention, historical releases of hazardous materials or oil, or due to the
minimization, and control of these impacts include: presence of abandoned infrastructure formerly used to store or
Providing adequate secondary containment for fuel storage handle these materials, including underground storage tanks.
tanks and for the temporary storage of other fluids such as Actions necessary to manage the risk from contaminated land will
lubricating oils and hydraulic fluids, depend on factors such as the level and location of contamination,
Using impervious surfaces for refueling areas and other fluid the type and risks of the contaminated media, and the intended
transfer areas land use. However, a basic management strategy should include:
Training workers on the correct transfer and handling of fuels Managing contaminated media with the objective of
and chemicals and the response to spills protecting the safety and health of occupants of the site, the
Providing portable spill containment and cleanup equipment surrounding community, and the environment post
on site and training in the equipment deployment construction or post decommissioning
Assessing the contents of hazardous materials and Understanding the historical use of the land with regard to
petroleum-based products in building systems (e.g. PCB the potential presence of hazardous materials or oil prior to
containing electrical equipment, asbestos-containing building initiation of construction or decommissioning activities
materials) and process equipment and removing them prior Preparing plans and procedures to respond to the discovery
to initiation of decommissioning activities, and managing their of contaminated media to minimize or reduce the risk to
treatment and disposal according to Sections 1.5 and 1.6 on health, safety, and the environment consistent with the
Hazardous Materials and Hazardous Waste Management, approach for Contaminated Land in Section 1.6
respectively Preparation of a management plan to manage obsolete,
Assessing the presence of hazardous substances in or on abandoned, hazardous materials or oil consistent with the
building materials (e.g., polychlorinated biphenyls, asbestos- approach to hazardous waste management described in
containing flooring or insulation) and decontaminating or Section 1.6.
properly managing contaminated building materials
APRIL 30, 2007 91

WORLD BANK GROUP
Successful implementation of any management strategy may Implementing good house-keeping practices, such as the
require identification and cooperation with whoever is responsible sorting and placing loose construction materials or demolition
and liable for the contamination. debris in established areas away from foot paths
Cleaning up excessive waste debris and liquid spills regularly
4.2 Occupational Health and Safety{ Locating electrical cords and ropes in common areas and
TC "4.2 Occupational Health and marked corridors
Safety" \f C \l "2" } Use of slip retardant footwear
Over-exertion Work in Heights

Over-exertion, and ergonomic injuries and illnesses, such as
Falls from elevation associated with working with ladders,
repetitive motion, over-exertion, and manual handling, are among
scaffolding, and partially built or demolished structures are among
the most common causes of injuries in construction and
the most common cause of fatal or permanent disabling injury at
decommissioning sites. Recommendations for their prevention
construction or decommissioning sites. If fall hazards exist, a fall
and control include:
protection plan should be in place which includes one or more of
Training of workers in lifting and materials handling the following aspects, depending on the nature of the fall hazard95:
techniques in construction and decommissioning projects,
Training and use of temporary fall prevention devices, such
including the placement of weight limits above which
as rails or other barriers able to support a weight of 200
mechanical assists or two-person lifts are necessary
pounds, when working at heights equal or greater than two
Planning work site layout to minimize the need for manual
meters or at any height if the risk includes falling into
transfer of heavy loads
operating machinery, into water or other liquid, into
Selecting tools and designing work stations that reduce force hazardous substances, or through an opening in a work
requirements and holding times, and which promote
surface
improved postures, including, where applicable, user
Training and use of personal fall arrest systems, such as full
adjustable work stations
body harnesses and energy absorbing lanyards able to
Implementing administrative controls into work processes,
support 5000 pounds (also described in this section in
such as job rotations and rest or stretch breaks
Working at Heights above), as well as fall rescue procedures
to deal with workers whose fall has been successfully
Slips and Falls
arrested. The tie in point of the fall arresting system should
Slips and falls on the same elevation associated with poor
also be able to support 5000 pounds
housekeeping, such as excessive waste debris, loose construction
Use of control zones and safety monitoring systems to warn
materials, liquid spills, and uncontrolled use of electrical cords and
workers of their proximity to fall hazard zones, as well as
ropes on the ground, are also among the most frequent cause of
lost time accidents at construction and decommissioning sites.
Recommended methods for the prevention of slips and falls from, 95 Additional information on identification of fall hazards and design of protection
systems can be found in the United States Occupational Health and Safety
or on, the same elevation include: Administrations (US OSHA) web site:
http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/fallprotection/index.html
APRIL 30, 2007 92

WORLD BANK GROUP
securing, marking, and labeling covers for openings in floors, a turn while moving. Techniques for the prevention and control of
roofs, or walking surfaces these impacts include:
Planning and segregating the location of vehicle traffic,

Struck By Objects
machine operation, and walking areas, and controlling
Construction and demolition activities may pose significant
vehicle traffic through the use of one-way traffic routes,
hazards related to the potential fall of materials or tools, as well as
establishment of speed limits, and on-site trained flag-people
ejection of solid particles from abrasive or other types of power
wearing high-visibility vests or outer clothing covering to
tools which can result in injury to the head, eyes, and extremities.
direct traffic
Techniques for the prevention and control of these hazards
Ensuring the visibility of personnel through their use of high
include:
visibility vests when working in or walking through heavy
Using a designated and restricted waste drop or discharge equipment operating areas, and training of workers to verify
zones, and/or a chute for safe movement of wastes from eye contact with equipment operators before approaching the
upper to lower levels operating vehicle
Conducting sawing, cutting, grinding, sanding, chipping or Ensuring moving equipment is outfitted with audible back-up
chiseling with proper guards and anchoring as applicable alarms
Maintaining clear traffic ways to avoid driving of heavy Using inspected and well-maintained lifting devices that are
equipment over loose scrap appropriate for the load, such as cranes, and securing loads
Use of temporary fall protection measures in scaffolds and when lifting them to higher job-site elevations.
out edges of elevated work surfaces, such as hand rails and
toe boards to prevent materials from being dislodged Dust
Evacuating work areas during blasting operations, and using Dust suppression techniques should be implemented, such
blast mats or other means of deflection to minimize fly rock or as applying water or non-toxic chemicals to minimize dust
ejection of demolition debris if work is conducted in proximity from vehicle movements
to people or structures PPE, such as dusk masks, should be used where dust levels
Wearing appropriate PPE, such as safety glasses with side are excessive
shields, face shields, hard hats, and safety shoes
Confined Spaces and Excavations
Moving Machinery Examples of confined spaces that may be present in construction
Vehicle traffic and use of lifting equipment in the movement of or demolition sites include: silos, vats, hoppers, utility vaults,
machinery and materials on a construction site may pose tanks, sewers, pipes, and access shafts. Ditches and trenches
temporary hazards, such as physical contact, spills, dust, may also be considered a confined space when access or egress
emissions, and noise. Heavy equipment operators have limited is limited. In addition to the guidance provided in Section 2.8 the
fields of view close to their equipment and may not see occupational hazards associated with confined spaces and
pedestrians close to the vehicle. Center-articulated vehicles create excavations in construction and decommissioning sites should be
a significant impact or crush hazard zone on the outboard side of prevented according to the following recommendations:
APRIL 30, 2007 93

WORLD BANK GROUP
Controlling site-specific factors which may contribute to respirators, clothing/protective suits, gloves and eye
excavation slope instability including, for example, the use of protection
excavation dewatering, side-walls support, and slope
gradient adjustments that eliminate or minimize the risk of
4.3 Community Health and Safety{ TC
collapse, entrapment, or drowning
"4.3 Community Health and Safety" \f
Providing safe means of access and egress from
C \l "2" }
excavations, such as graded slopes, graded access route, or General Site Hazards
stairs and ladders
Projects should implement risk management strategies to protect
Avoiding the operation of combustion equipment for
the community from physical, chemical, or other hazards
prolonged periods inside excavations areas where other
associated with sites under construction and decommissioning.
workers are required to enter unless the area is actively
Risks may arise from inadvertent or intentional trespassing,
ventilated
including potential contact with hazardous materials, contaminated
soils and other environmental media, buildings that are vacant or
Other Site Hazards
under construction, or excavations and structures which may pose
Construction and decommissioning sites may pose a risk of
falling and entrapment hazards. Risk management strategies may
exposure to dust, chemicals, hazardous or flammable materials,
include:
and wastes in a combination of liquid, solid, or gaseous forms,
which should be prevented through the implementation of project- Restricting access to the site, through a combination of
specific plans and other applicable management practices, institutional and administrative controls, with a focus on high
including: risk structures or areas depending on site-specific situations,

including fencing, signage, and communication of risks to the
Use of specially trained personnel to identify and remove
local community
waste materials from tanks, vessels, processing equipment
Removing hazardous conditions on construction sites that
or contaminated land as a first step in decommissioning
cannot be controlled affectively with site access restrictions,
activities to allow for safe excavation, construction,
such as covering openings to small confined spaces,
dismantling or demolition
ensuring means of escape for larger openings such as
Use of specially trained personnel to identify and selectively
trenches or excavations, or locked storage of hazardous
remove potentially hazardous materials in building elements
materials
prior to dismantling or demolition including, for example,
insulation or structural elements containing asbestos and Disease Prevention
Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs), electrical components
Increased incidence of communicable and vector-borne diseases
containing mercury96
attributable to construction activities represents a potentially
Use of waste-specific PPE based on the results of an serious health threat to project personnel and residents of local
occupational health and safety assessment, including communities. Recommendations for the prevention and control of
communicable and vector-borne diseases also applicable to
96 Additional information on the management and removal of asbestos containing
building materials can be found in ASTM Standard E2356 and E1368
APRIL 30, 2007 94

WORLD BANK GROUP
construction phase activities are provided in Section 3.6 (Disease

Prevention).
Traffic Safety
Construction activities may result in a significant increase in
movement of heavy vehicles for the transport of construction
materials and equipment increasing the risk of traffic-related
accidents and injuries to workers and local communities. The
incidence of road accidents involving project vehicles during
construction should be minimized through a combination of
education and awareness-raising, and the adoption of procedures
described in Section 3.4 (Traffic Safety).
APRIL 30, 2007 95

GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: REFERENCES AND ADDITIONAL SOURCES
WORLD BANK GROUP
References and Additional Sources

ATSDR (Agency for Toxic Substance and Disease Registry). Quick Reference Chavasse, D.C. and H.H. Yap, eds. 1997. Chemical Methods for the Control of
Pocket Guide for Toxicological Profiles. http://www.atsdr.cdc.gov/toxguides/ Vectors and Pests of Public Health Importance. Geneva, Switzerland: World
(accessed May 19, 2006). Health Organization.
ATSDR. 2005. Top 20 Hazardous Substances 2005. Dockrill, Paul and Frank Friedrich. 2001. Boilers and Heaters: Improving Energy
http://www.atsdr.cdc.gov/cxcx3.html (accessed May 19, 2006). Efficiency. NRCAN.
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/infosource/pub/cipec/boilersheaters.pdf
Air and Waste Management Association (AWMA). 2000. Air Pollution Engineering
Manual, Second Edition. John Wiley & Sons, Inc.. New York, NY. Environment Canada, 2005. Hazardous Waste.
http://www.atl.ec.gc.ca/pollution/hazardouswaste.html (accessed May 19, 2006).
ACGIH (American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists). 2005.
Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances in the Work Environment. European Commission. 2000. Guidance Document for EPER implementation.
Cincinnati:ACGIH. Directorate-General for Environment.
http://ec.europa.eu/environment/ippc/eper/index.htm
ANSI (American National Standards Institute). Homepage. http://www.ansi.org/
(accessed May 19, 2006). European Council Directive 91/271 of 21 May 1991 concerning urban wastewater
treatment (http://ec.europa.eu/environment/water/water-
ADB. 2003. Road Safety Audit for Road Projects: An Operational Tool. Asian urbanwaste/info/docs_en.htm)
Development Bank, Manila.
EPER (European Pollutant Emission Register). Homepage.
American Petroleum Institute, Management of Process Hazards (R.P. 750). http://www.eper.cec.eu.int/eper/default.asp (accessed May 19, 2006).
Assum, T. 1998. Road Safety in Africa: Appraisal of Road Safety Initiatives in EREC (European Renewable Energy Council). 2006. Renewable Energy Sources.
Five African Countries. Working Paper No. 33. The World Bank and United http://www.erec-renewables.org/sources/default.htm (accessed April 24, 2006).
Nations Economic Commission for Africa.
EUROPA. Summaries of Legislation: Air Pollution.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E1739-95(2002) Standard http://europa.eu.int/scadplus/leg/en/s15004.htm (accessed March 25, 2006)
Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action Applied at Petroleum Release Sites
Fairman, Robyn, Carl D.Mead, and W. Peter Williams. 1999. Environmental Risk
ASTM E2081-00(2004)e1 Standard Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action (at Assessment - Approaches, Experiences and Information Sources. London:
chemical release sites). Monitoring and Assessment Research Centre, King's College,.
ASTM E 1368 - Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos Abatement http://reports.eea.eu.int/GH-07-97-595-EN-C2/en
Projects FAO (Food and Agriculture Organization). 1995. Guidelines on Good Labeling
ASTM E 2356 - Standard Practice for Comprehensive Building Asbestos Surveys Practices for Pesticides. Rome: FAO.
http://ecoport.org/Resources/Refs/Pesticid/Guides/guides.htm
ASTM E 2394 - Standard Practice for Maintenance, Renovation and Repair of
Installed Asbestos Cement Products. FAO. 1985. Guidelines for the Packaging and Storage of Pesticides. Rome:
FAO http://www.fao.org/ag/AGP/AGPP/Pesticid/Code/Download/pacstor.doc
Australian Government. NPI Industry Reporting. Department of the Environment
and Heritage. http://www.npi.gov.au/handbooks/ Francey, R., J. Pickford and R. Reed. 1992. A Guide to the Development of On-
site Sanitation. Geneva: World Health Organization.
Australian Government. 2004. National Pollutant Inventory Guide. Department http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/hygiene/envsan/onsitesan/en/print.html
Of Environment and Heritage. http://www.npi.gov.au/handbooks/pubs/npiguide.pdf
GVRD (Greater Vancouver Regional District). 1999. Caring for our Waterways:
Awareness and Preparedness for Emergencies at Local Level (APELL) Guidelines Liquid Waste Management Plan Stage 2, Discussion Document. 136 pp.
available at: http://www.uneptie.org/pc/apell/publications/handbooks.html
GVRD. 2001. Liquid Waste Management Plan. Greater Vancouver: Stormwater
Bringezu, Stefan and Helmut Schutz. 2001. Material use indicators for the Management Technical Advisory Task Group.
European Union, 1980-1997 Economy-side material flow accounts and balances http://www.gvrd.bc.ca/sewerage/lwmp_feb2001/lwmp_plan_feb2001.pdf
and derived indicators of resource use. European Commission.
http://www.belspo.be/platformisd/Library/Material%20use%20Bringezu.PDF IESNA (Illuminating Engineering Society of North America). Homepage.
http://www.iesna.org/ (accessed May 18, 2006)
BC MOE (BC Ministry of Environment). Guidance on Contaminated Sites.
http://www.env.gov.bc.ca/epd/epdpa/contam_sites/guidance/ (accessed May 18, Industry Canada. Eco-efficiency. http://strategis.ic.gc.ca/epic/internet/inee-
2006) ee.nsf/en/Home (accessed May 18, 2006)
CIWMB (California Integrated Waste Management Board). Sustainable Materials. IPCC (Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change). National Greenhouse Gas
State Training Manual. Inventories Program. http://www.ipcc-nggip.iges.or.jp/ (accessed May 18, 2006)
http://www.ciwmb.ca.gov/GreenBuilding/Training/StateManual/Materials.doc ILO-OSH (International Labour Organization Occupational Safety and Health).
(accessed May 18, 2006) 2001. Guidelines on Occupational Safety & Health Management Systems.
CCPS (Center for Chemical Process Safety). Homepage. American Institute of Geneva: International Labour
Chemical Engineers. www.aiche.org/ccps (accessed May 18, 2006) Office. http://www.ilo.org/public/english/protection/safework/cops/english/download
/e000013.pdf
CCPS. 1992. Guidelines for Hazard Evaluation Procedures. American Institute of
Chemical Engineers. ICC (International Code Council). 2006. International Building Code. Falls
Church, Virginia: ICC.
APRIL 30, 2007 96

WORLD BANK GROUP
IATA (International Air Transport Association). 2005. Dangerous Goods NRCAN. 2004. EnerGuide for Industry: Your guide to selecting energy-efficient
Regulations Manual. Geneva: IATA. http://www.iata.org/ps/publications/9065.htm industrial equipment. Office of Energy Efficiency.
(accessed May 18, 2006) http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/infosource/pub/Energuide-industry/EGI-
brochure-e.cfm
IAEA (International Atomic Energy Agency). International Basic Safety Standard
for protection against Ionizing Radiation and for the Safety of Radiation Sources NRCAN. Energy Star - Heating, Cooling and Ventilation. Office of Energy
http://www-ns.iaea.org/standards/documents/default.asp?sub=160 (accessed May Efficiency.
19, 2006). http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/energystar/english/consumers/heating.cfm?text=N&printvie
w=N#AC (accessed April 9, 2006)
IHS 1996. ISO 9613 Acoustics Attenuation of sound during propagation
outdoors Part 2: General method of calculation. NRCAN. Technical Factsheet CanMOST Canadian Motor Selection Tool. Office
http://engineers.ihs.com/document/abstract/XVNLCAAAAAAAAAAA (accessed of Energy Efficiency.
May 19, 2006). http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/infosource/pub/cipec/canadian-motor/index.cfm
(accessed May 18, 2006)
IMO (International Maritime Organization). International Maritime Dangerous
Goods Code. http://www.imo.org/Safety/mainframe.asp?topic_id=158 (accessed NRCAN. 2005a. Team up for Energy Savings - Compressed Air. Office of Energy
May 18, 2006) Efficiency. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/industrial/cipec/compressed-air.pdf
ISO (International Organization for Standardization). Quality and Environmental NRCAN. 2005b. Team up for Energy Savings Lighting. Office of Energy
Management. http://www.iso.org/iso/en/iso9000-14000/index.html (accessed May Efficiency. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/industrial/cipec/light.pdf
18, 2006)
NRCAN. 2006a. Model National Energy Code for Buildings (MNECB) for the
IOMC (Inter-Organization Programme for the Sound Management of Chemicals. Commercial Building Incentive Program.
2001. The WHO Recommended Classification of Pesticides by Hazard and http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/commercial/financial-assistance/new-
Guidelines to Classification 2000-2002. International Program on Chemical buildings/mnecb.cfm?attr=20 (accessed March 24, 2006)
Safety. http://whqlibdoc.who.int/hq/2002/a76526.pdf
NRCAN. 2006b. Office of Energy Efficiency General Database.
Kates, R., Hohenemser, C., and J. Kasperson, Editors. 1985. Perilous Progress: http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/infosource/PDFs (accessed March 24, 2006)
Management the Hazards of Technology. Westview Press, London.
NRCAN. 2006c. Office of Energy Efficiency Industry Projects Database.
Knowlton, R. Ellis. 1992. A Manual of Hazard & Operability Studies. Chemetics http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/infosource/home/index.cfm?act=category&cate
International. gory=07&PrintView=N&Text=N (accessed March 24, 2006)
LDAR (Leak Detection and Repair Professionals). http://www.ldar.net/ (accessed NRCAN. 2006d. Energy Efficiency Regulations and Standards for Industry
May 18, 2006). Canadas Energy Efficiency Regulations.
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/industrial/regulations-standards/index.cfm?attr=24
Lijzen, J.P.A., A.J. Baars, P.F. Otte, M.G.J. Rikken, F.A. Swartjes, E.M.J. (accessed April 24, 2006)
Verbruggen and A.P. van Wezel. 2001. Technical evaluation of the Intervention
Values for Soil/sediment and Groundwater - Human and ecotoxicological risk New Zealand Ministry of the Environment. 2004. Contaminated Land
assessment and derivation of risk limits for soil, aquatic sediment and Management Guidelines No.5: Site Investigation and Analysis of Soils. Federal
groundwater. RIVM report 711701 023. Netherlands National Institute of Public Government of New Zealand.
Health and the Environment. http://www.mfe.govt.nz/publications/hazardous/contaminated-land-mgmt-
http://www.rivm.nl/bibliotheek/rapporten/711701023.pdf guidelines-no5/index.html
Massachusetts Department of Environment. Cleanup Sites and Spills. North American Energy Working Group. North American Energy Efficiency
http://www.mass.gov/dep/cleanup (accessed May 19, 2006). Standards and Labeling.
MSHA (Mine Safety and Health Administration). Homepage. http://www.msha.gov/ Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD). Database on
(accessed May 19, 2006). Use and Release of Industrial Chemicals. http://appli1.oecd.org/ehs/urchem.nsf
NIOSH (National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health). Center for Disease OECD. 1999. Safety Strategies for Rural Roads. Organization for Economic
Control and Prevention Department of Health and Human Services. Cooperation and Development, Paris. www.oecd.org/dataoecd/59/2/2351720.pdf
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/homepage.html (accessed May 18, 2006)
OHSAS. 2000. OHSAS 18002:2000. Occupational Health and Safety
National Research Council of Canada, 2005. Building Codes. http://www.nrc- Management Systems - Guidelines for the Implementation of OHSAS 18001.
cnrc.gc.ca/doingbusiness/codes_e.html (accessed May 18, 2006).
OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration). Emergency Standards.
NRCAN (Natural Resources Canada). Electric Motors Factsheet 6. Office of http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/etools/evacuation/standards_card.html (accessed May
Energy Efficiency. 18, 2006)
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/regulations/html/Factsheet6.cfm?text=N&printview=N
(accessed May 18, 2006) OSHA. Safety and Health Topics - Toxic Metals.
http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/metalsheavy/ (accessed May 19, 2006)
NRCAN. Energy-Efficient Motor Systems Assessment Guide. Office of Energy
Efficiency. Peden, Margie, David Sleet, Adnan Hyder and Colin Mathers, eds. 2004. World
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/cipec/ieep/newscentre/motor_system/introduction.cfm?text= Report on Road Traffic Injury Prevention. Geneva: World Health Organization.
N&printview=N (accessed May 18, 2006) http://www.who.int/world-health-day/2004/infomaterials/world_report/en/
NRCAN (Natural Resources Canada). EnerGuide Program. Office of Energy PDEP (Pennsylvania Department of Environment Protection). Official Recycled
Efficiency. Product Guide. http://www.dep.state.pa.us/wm_apps/recycledproducts/ (accessed
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/equipment/english/index.cfm?PrintView=N&Text=N May 18, 2006)
(accessed March 24, 2006)
APRIL 30, 2007 97

WORLD BANK GROUP
PTCL (Physical and Theoretical Chemistry Lab). Safety (MSDS) data for (US DOE). Industry Plant Managers and Engineers Combustion.
benzo(a)pyrene. http://www.physchem.ox.ac.uk/MSDS/BE/benzo(a)pyrene.html http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/combustion.html#opp1 (accessed
(accessed May 18, 2006) April 30, 2006).
Prokop, Gundula. 2002. Second Technical Workshop on Contaminated Sites - US DOE (US Department of Energy). Industry Plant Managers and Engineers
Workshop Proceedings and Follow-up. European Environment Agency. Process Heating Systems.
http://reports.eea.europa.eu/technical_report_2002_76/en/Tech76.pdf http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/process.html (accessed April 30,
2006).
Ritter, L., K.R. Solomon, J. Forget, M. Stemeroff and C.OLeary. An Assessment
Report on: DDT-Aldrin-Dieldrin-Endrin-Chlordane, Heptachlor-Hexachlorobenzene, US DOE. Industry Plant Managers and Engineers Steam Boilers.
Mirex-Toxaphene, Polychlorinated Biphenyls, Dioxins and Furans. International http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/steam.html (accessed April 30,
Programme on Chemical Safety. 2006).
http://www.pops.int/documents/background/assessreport/en/ritteren.pdf (accessed
May 18, 2006) US DOE. Industrial Technologies Program Best Practices.
http://www1.eere.energy.gov/industry/bestpractices/ (accessed April 30, 2006)
Ross A, Baguley C, Hills B, McDonald M, Solcock D.1991. Towards Safer Roads
in Developing Countries: A Guide for Planners and Engineers. Berkshire: US DOE. The Big Picture on Process Heating. Industrial Technologies Program
Transport and Road Research Laboratory. Best Practices.
http://eereweb.ee.doe.gov/industry/bestpractices/pdfs/em_proheat_bigpict.pdf
Rushbrook, P. and M. Pugh. 1998. Solid Waste Landfills in Middle- and Lower- (accessed April 30, 2006).
Income Countries: A Technical Guide to Planning, Design, and Operation. World
Bank. http://www- US DOE. 2005. Improve Motor System Efficiency for a Broader Range of Motors
wds.worldbank.org/external/default/WDSContentServer/IW3P/IB/2002/12/06/0000 with MotorMaster+ International. Industrial Technologies Program.
94946_02112104104987/Rendered/PDF/multi0page.pdf http://eereweb.ee.doe.gov/industry/bestpractices/pdfs/mmplus_international.pdf
SCPOP (Stockholm Convention on POPs). Guidance Documents. US DOT (US Department of Transportation). HAZMATS Regulations.
http://www.pops.int/documents/guidance/ (accessed May 19, 2006) http://hazmat.dot.gov/ (accessed May 18, 2006)
Tsunokawa, Koji and Christopher Hoban, eds. 1997. Roads and the US Energy Star Program. Guidelines for Energy Management.
Environment: A Handbook. Washington, D.C.: World Bank. http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?c=guidelines.download_guidelines (accessed
http://www.worldbank.org/transport/publicat/reh/toc.htm April 24, 2006)
UK Department of Environment, Food and Rural Affairs. http://www.defra.gov.uk/ US Energy Star Program. Tools and Resources.
(accessed May 18, 2006) http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?c=tools_resources.bus_energy_management
_tools_resources (accessed April 9, 2006)
UK Environment Agency. Contaminated Land Exposure Assessment (CLEA).
http://www.environment- US EPA (US Environmental Protection Agency). Air Compliance Advisor.
agency.gov.uk/subjects/landquality/113813/672771/?version=1&lang=_e http://www.epa.gov/ttn/ecas/ACA.htm (accessed May 18, 2006)
(accessed May 18, 2006) US EPA. Ambient Air Monitoring QA Program.
UN/ECE (United Nations/Economic Commission for Europe). United Nations http://www.epa.gov/airprogm/oar/oaqps/qa/index.html#guidance (accessed May
Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods Model Regulations. 19, 2006).
http://www.unece.org/trans/ (accessed May 18, 2006) US EPA. Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines Product Fact Sheets.
UN/ECE. The Atmospheric Emission Inventory Guidebook. http://www.epa.gov/cpg/factshts.htm (accessed May 18, 2006)
http://www.aeat.co.uk/netcen/airqual/TFEI/unece.htm (accessed May 18, 2006). US EPA. EPA Guidance. Environmentally Preferable Purchasing.
UNEP (United Nation Environment Program). Secretariat of the Basel Convention http://www.epa.gov/oppt/epp/pubs/guidance/guidancepage.htm (accessed May
on Hazardous Waste Management. http://www.basel.int/index.html (accessed 18, 2006)
May 18, 2006) US EPA. Hazardous Waste. http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/osw/hazwaste.htm
UNEP. Persistant Organic Pollutants. http://www.chem.unep.ch/pops/ (accessed (accessed May 19, 2006).
May 18, 2006) US EPA. Hazardous Waste Identification.
UNEP. Country contributions: Information on the regulatory status of POPs; bans, http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/id/id.htm#id (accessed May 19, 2006).
restrictions, and/or other legal permitted uses. US EPA. Major Environmental Laws. Laws and Regulations.
http://www.chem.unep.ch/pops/POPs_Inc/INC_3/inf-english/inf3-9/sect5.pdf http://www.epa.gov/epahome/laws.htm (accessed May 18, 2006)
(accessed May 18, 2006).
US EPA. Performance Track Assistance. National Environmental Performance
UNEP. 1993. Cleaner Production Worldwide Volume 1. Track. http://www.epa.gov/performancetrack/ptrackassist.htm (accessed May 18,
http://www.uneptie.org/PC/cp/library/catalogue/regional_reports.htm . 2006)
UNEP. 1997. The Environmental Management of Industrial Estates. Industry and US EPA 40 CFR Part 133, Secondary Treatment Regulation
Environment, United Nations Environment Programme. (http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/waisidx_02/40cfr133_02.html)
US DOE. Building Toolbox Boilers. Building Technologies Program. US EPA. Persistant Organic Pollutants (POPs).
http://www.eere.energy.gov/buildings/info/components/hvac/boilers.html http://www.epa.gov/oppfead1/international/pops.htm (accessed May 19, 2006)
(accessed April 30, 2006)
US EPA. Pollution Prevention Highlights. http://www.epa.gov/p2/ (accessed May
US DOE. 2002. Heating and Cooling Equipment Selection. Office of Building 18, 2006)
Technology, State and Community Programs Energy Efficiency and Renewable
Energy. http://www.eere.energy.gov/buildings/info/documents/pdfs/26459.pdf
APRIL 30, 2007 98

WORLD BANK GROUP
US EPA. Region 9 Preliminary Remediation Goals. WHO. 2000a. Guidelines for the Purchase of Public Health Pesticides.
http://www.epa.gov/region9/waste/sfund/prg/ (accessed May 19, 2006). WHO/CDS/WHOPES/2000.1. Communicable Disease Control, Prevention and
Eradication, World Health Organization.
US EPA. Technology Transfer Network Clearinghouse for Inventories and
Emissions Factors. http://www.epa.gov/ttn/chief/ WHO. 2000b. Air Quality Guidelines for Europe. Geneva:WHO.
http://www.euro.who.int/document/e71922.pdf
US EPA. Waste Minimization. http://www.epa.gov/wastemin/ (accessed May 19,
2006). WHO. 2000. Towards an Assessment of the Socioeconomic Impact of Arsenic
Poisoning in Bangladesh. WHO/SDE/WSH/00.4. World Health Organization.
US EPA. 1991. Technical support document for water quality-based toxic control.
Washington, DC.: Office of Water Enforcement and Permits, Office of Water WHO. 2001. Chemistry and Specifications of Pesticides. Technical Report Series
Regulations and Standards. 899. Geneva: WHO.
US EPA. 2004. National Recommended Water Quality Criteria. Washington. DC: WHO. 2003. Draft Guidelines for the Management of Public Health Pesticides.
United States Office of Water. Environmental Protection Agency Office of Science Communicable Disease Control, Prevention and Eradication, World Health
and Technology (4304T). Organization. http://whqlibdoc.who.int/hq/2003/WHO_CDS_WHOPES_2003.7.pdf
US EPA. 2005. Chromated Copper Arsenate (CCA). Pesticides Re-registration. WHO. 2004. Guidelines for Drinking-water Quality - Volume 1 Recommendations.
http://www.epa.gov/oppad001/reregistration/cca/ (accessed May 18, 2006) Geneva: WHO.
http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/GDWQ2004web.pdf
US EPA. 2006. 40CFR Chapter 1, Subchapter J, section 302.4, Designation of
Hazardous Substances. http://ecfr.gpoaccess.gov/cgi/t/text/text- WHO Guidelines for the Safe Use of Wastewater, Excreta and Greywater. Volume
idx?c=ecfr&sid=a1d39cb9632558b450b2d09e45b5ca78&rgn=div8&view=text&nod 2: Wastewater Use in Agriculture
e=40:27.0.1.1.2.0.1.4&idno=40 http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/wastewater/gsuweg2/en/index.html
WHO. 2005. Guidelines for drinking-water quality.
USGS (US Geological Survey). 2000. Recycled AggregatesProfitable Resource http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/gdwq3/en/ (accessed May 18,
Conservation. USGS Fact Sheet FS18199. http://pubs.usgs.gov/fs/fs-0181- 2006)
99/fs-0181-99so.pdf
Woolliams, J. 2002. Planning, Design and Construction Strategies for Green
US NFPA (US National Fire Protection Association). 2006. 101- Life Safety Code Buildings. Eco-City Planning Company.
Handbook. http://www.greenbuildingsbc.com/new_buildings/pdf_files/greenbuild_strategies_g
http://www.nfpa.org/catalog/product.asp?category%5Fname=&pid=10106&target% uide.pdf
5Fpid=10106&src%5Fpid=&link%5Ftype=search (accessed May 19, 2006).
Yassi, A. et al. 1998. Basic Environmental Health. WHO/EHG/98.19. Office of
US Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 29 CFR 1910.119 App Global and Integrated Environmental Health, World Health Organization, Geneva.
A, Threshold Quantities.
Zaim, M. 2002. Global Insecticide Use for Vector-Borne Disease Control.
US Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 29CFR Part 1910.120, WHO/CDS/WHOPES/GCDPP/2002.2. Communicable Disease Control,
Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response Standard. Prevention and Eradication, World Health Organization.
US Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 29 CFR Part 1910.119.
WHO. 1987. Technology for Water Supply and Sanitation in Developing
Countries. Technical Report Series No. 742. World Health Organization, Geneva.
WHO. 1989. New Approaches to Improve Road Safety. Technical Report 781b.
World Health Organization, Geneva.
WHO. 1993. Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality. Volume 1:
Recommendations. 2nd Edition. World Health Organization, Geneva.
WHO. 1994. Operation and Maintenance of Urban Water Supply and Sanitation
Systems: A Guide for Managers. World Health Organization, Geneva.
WHO. 1996. Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality. Volume 2: Health Criteria and
Other Supporting Information. World Health Organization, Geneva.
WHO. 1997. Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality. Volume 3: Surveillance and
Control of Community Supplies. World Health Organization, Geneva.
http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/gdwq2v1/en/index2.html
(accessed May 18, 2006)
WHO. 1999. Draft Specifications for Bacterial Larvicides for Public Health Use.
WHO/CDS/CPC/WHOPES/99.2. Communicable Diseases Prevention and
Control, WHO Pesticide Evaluation Scheme, World Health Organization.
WHO. 1999. Prevention and Control of Dengue and Dengue Haemorrhagic
Fever: Comprehensive Guidelines. WHO Regional Publication, SEARO No. 29.
Regional Office for South-East Asia, World Health Organization, New Delhi.
WHO. 1999. Safety of Pyrethroid-Treated Mosquito Nets.
WHO/CDS/CPE/WHOPES/99.5. World Health Organization, Geneva.
APRIL 30, 2007 99

ESMP

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ESMP

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FATA URBAN CENTERS PROJECT (FUCP)

MC Khar Bajaur Agency, FATA

ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION UNIT (PMU)

2. The FUCP includes a comprehensive package of possible municipal infrastructure subprojects

5. A Grievance Redress/Complaint Handling Mechanism is a part of this ESMP. It also includes

ACS Additional Chief Secretary

AIU Agency Implementation Unit

EHS Environment, Health, and Safety

EIA Environmental Impact Assessment

EPA Environment Protection Agency

EPP Emergency Project Paper

ESA Environmental and Social Assessment

ESSAF Environmental and Social Screening and Assessment Framework

ESFP Environmental and social focal point

ESMP Environmental and Social Management Plan

FATA Federally Administered Tribal Area

FDA FATA Development Authority

GIS Geographical information system

GoKP Government of Khyber Pakhtunkhwa

GoP Government of Pakistan

GPS Global positioning system

ICT Information Communication Technology

IDP Internally displaced person

IEE Initial Environmental Examination

LAA Land Acquisition Act (1894)

MDTF Multi Donor Trust Fund

MEA Multilateral Environmental Agreement

MoU Memorandum of understanding

M&E Monitoring and evaluation

NEQS National Environmental Quality Standards

NGO Non-Governmental Organization

NWFP North-Western Frontier Province (now KP)

O&M Operation and maintenance

PDO Project Development Objective

PCNA Post-Crisis Needs Assessment

PEPA Pakistan Environmental Protection Act (of 1997)

PEPC Pakistan Environmental Protection Council

PKR Pakistan Rupees

PMU Project Management Unit

PSC Project Steering Committee

TARUCCI Tribal Areas Rural to Urban Centers Conversion Initiative

TPMU TARUCCI Project Management Unit

TPV Third party validation

4.2.6 Slaughter House .......................................................................................................25

Table 3.1: Indicative List of Investments ....................................................................... 8

1.1 ESMP Objectives

3. The specific objectives of the ESMP include the following:

1.2 ESMP Components

1.3 Background of MDTF

1.4 TARUCCI Program

1.5 Environmental and Social Screening and Assessment Framework

2. Legislative and Regulatory Review

2.1 National Laws and Regulations

2.1.4 Land Acquisition Act, 1894

2.2 The World Bank Operational Policies:

Operational Policy Triggered Reason

2.3 National Institutional Setup for Environmental Management

2.4 Environmental and Social Guidelines

3.1 Project Objectives

3.2 Project Components

Municipal Services Description

1 Paved Road 5.4 km new municipal roads

Municipal Services Description